ECDIS FMD3200 Operator's Manual

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
ELECTRONIC CHART
DISPLAY AND
INFORMATION SYSTEM
(ECDIS)
Model
FMD-3200
FMD-3200-BB
FMD-3300
www.furuno.com
The paper used in this manual

is elemental chlorine free.
FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan
A : APR . 2012
E1 : FEB . 09, 2015
Pub. No. OME-44730-E1

( DAMI )
FMD-3200/3200BB/3300
0 0 0 1 7 6 1 2 5 1 4
IMPORTANT NOTICES
General
This manual has been authored with simplified grammar, to meet the needs of international users.
The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual. Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.
The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you
see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment
settings.
Save this manual for future reference.
Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will
cancel the warranty.
All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders.
C-MAP means C-MAP by Jeppesen in this manual.
How to discard this product

Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal
in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the
correct method of disposal.
How to discard a used battery

Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the chapter
on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery is used. Tape the + and - terminals of
battery before disposal to prevent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit.
In the European Union

The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries
must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the
used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national
legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU.
Cd
In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that Ni-Cd
and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled. Take the used
batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws.
Ni-Cd
Pb
In the other countries

There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can
increase when the other countries make their own recycle symbols in the future.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The operator must read the safety instructions before attempting to operate the equipment.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moderate injury.
Warning, Caution
Mandatory Action
Prohibitive Action
WARNING
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Do not dissassemble or modify the

equipment.
This equipment uses high voltage that

can cause electrical shock.
Only qualified persons can work inside
the equipment.
Fire, electrical shock or bodily injury can

result.
Turn off power at switchboard if the

something is dropped inside the
equipment.
Do not operate the equipment with

wet hands.
Fire or electrical shock can result.
Fire or electrical shock can result if the

power remains on.
Keep the equipment away from areas

where contact with water is likely.
Turn off power at switchboard if the

equipment is emitting smoke or fire.
Fire or electrical shock can result if

water gets into the equipment.
Fire or electrical shock can result if the

power remains on.
Do not place liquid filled containers
on the top of the equipment.
Fire or electrical shock can result if a
liquid spills into the equipment.
Use the correct fuse.
Warning Label
Warning labels are attached to the Processor
Unit. Do not remove any label. If a label is
missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO
agent or dealer about replacement.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do not
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
Name: Warning Label (2)

Type: 03-129-1001-3
Code No.: 100-236-743-10
Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire

or damage the equipment.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock,
do not remove cover.
No user-serviceable parts
inside.
ii
Name: Warning Label (1)

Type: 86-003-1011-3
Code No.: 100-236-233-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD .................................................................................................................. xii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................ xiv
1.
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
2.
System Configuration ................................................................................................ 1-1

Processor Unit EC-3000............................................................................................ 1-1
How to Turn the Power On/Off .................................................................................. 1-2
The Standby Mode .................................................................................................... 1-2
ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024.................................................................................... 1-3
1.5.1 Control description......................................................................................... 1-3
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 ................................................................................ 1-5
How to Select a Color Palette.................................................................................... 1-6
How to Adjust the Display Brilliance (FURUNO or Hatteland monitor)...................... 1-7
1.8.1 Manual brilliance adjustment ......................................................................... 1-7
How to Select Sensor Settings .................................................................................. 1-8
How to Enter Ship Speed .......................................................................................... 1-9
How to Enter Heading ............................................................................................. 1-11
How to Mark MOB Position ..................................................................................... 1-12
How to Select Time Format, Set Local Time ........................................................... 1-13
How to Take a Screenshot of the Display ............................................................... 1-13
The Settings Menu .................................................................................................. 1-14
How to Manage User Profiles.................................................................................. 1-14
1.16.1 How to create a profile................................................................................. 1-14
1.16.2 How to disable a profile ............................................................................... 1-14
1.16.3 How to restore default settings to a profile .................................................. 1-14
1.16.4 How to activate a profile .............................................................................. 1-15
How to View ECDIS Software Version No., ECDIS System Information, and
Operator's Manual ................................................................................................... 1-15
Split Screen ............................................................................................................. 1-16
1.18.1 How to activate, deactivate the split screen ................................................ 1-16
1.18.2 Function availability ..................................................................................... 1-17
1.18.3 Split screen usage characteristics ............................................................... 1-17
Tips.......................................................................................................................... 1-18
Printer Information ................................................................................................... 1-18
OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .................................................................................2-1

2.1 ECDIS Display........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Electronic chart area...................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Status bar ...................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.3 InstantAccess bar .......................................................................................... 2-6
2.1.4 Sensor information box.................................................................................. 2-9
2.1.5 Own ship functions box ............................................................................... 2-10
2.1.6 Route information box ................................................................................. 2-11
2.1.7 Overlay/NAV Tools box ............................................................................... 2-12
2.1.8 Alert box ...................................................................................................... 2-12
2.1.9 Permanent warning box............................................................................... 2-12
2.1.10 EBL, VRM boxes ......................................................................................... 2-13
2.1.11 Context-sensitive menus ............................................................................. 2-13
2.1.12 How to enter alphanumeric data.................................................................. 2-14
2.2 How to Select the Operating Mode.......................................................................... 2-15
2.3 How to Select the ECDIS Operating Mode.............................................................. 2-16
2.4 How to Select the Chart Scale................................................................................. 2-16
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
How to Select the Presentation Mode......................................................................2-17

Cursor Position Box .................................................................................................2-18
True Motion Reset....................................................................................................2-19
How to Control Route and User Charts in Voyage Navigation and
Voyage Planning Modes ..........................................................................................2-20
2.9 How to Use the VRM and EBL.................................................................................2-21
2.9.1 How to hide/show an EBL, VRM ..................................................................2-21
2.9.2 How to measure the range and bearing.......................................................2-21
2.9.3 How to select bearing reference ..................................................................2-21
2.9.4 EBL, VRM functions available with the context-sensitive menu...................2-22
2.10 Datum....................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.10.1 General ........................................................................................................2-23
2.10.2 Paper charts.................................................................................................2-23
2.10.3 Electronic sea charts....................................................................................2-23
2.10.4 Positioning devices and datum ....................................................................2-23
2.10.5 ECDIS and datum ........................................................................................2-23
2.11 Set up Before Departure ..........................................................................................2-24
2.11.1 Updates before departure ............................................................................2-24
2.11.2 Create or update a route ..............................................................................2-24
2.11.3 How to check and prepare route to monitor .................................................2-26
2.11.4 Check configuration of navigation sensors ..................................................2-28
2.11.5 How to reset odometer and trip meter..........................................................2-29
3.
HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS ............................................................................... 3-1

3.1 How to Install Public Keys for ENC Charts ................................................................3-1
3.2 How to Install ENC Licenses, Charts .........................................................................3-2
3.2.1 How to install an ENC license ........................................................................3-2
3.2.2 How to install ENC charts ..............................................................................3-3
3.3 How to Install ARCS Licenses, Charts.......................................................................3-5
3.3.1 How to install an ARCS license......................................................................3-5
3.3.2 How to install ARCS charts ...........................................................................3-6
3.4 How to Delete ENC, ARCS Licenses.........................................................................3-8
3.5 How to Read ENC Judgment Information ..................................................................3-8
3.6 How to Install C-MAP Charts .....................................................................................3-9
3.6.1 How to register the eToken ............................................................................3-9
3.6.2 How to install the C-MAP database and licenses ..........................................3-9
3.6.3 How to generate, order and apply an update file .........................................3-12
3.7 How to Delete a C-MAP Database...........................................................................3-13
3.8 How to Install C-MAP DL (Dynamic Licensing) Charts ............................................3-13
3.8.1 How to generate, order and apply an update file .........................................3-13
3.8.2 How to enable and set up the C-MAP DL ....................................................3-14
3.9 How to Export a List of Charts .................................................................................3-14
3.10 How to Export a List of Specific Licenses ................................................................3-15
3.11 How to Show the ENC Permit, ARCS License.........................................................3-15
3.12 How to Backup, Restore Licenses ...........................................................................3-15
3.13 How to View Permit Expiration Date ........................................................................3-16
3.14 How to Display Install/Update History ......................................................................3-17
3.15 Catalog of Chart Cells ..............................................................................................3-18
3.15.1 How to group chart cells...............................................................................3-20
3.15.2 How to view status of chart cells ..................................................................3-21
3.16 How to Open Charts.................................................................................................3-22
3.17 How to Print Chart List, Cell Status List ...................................................................3-22
3.17.1 How to print the chart list..............................................................................3-22
3.17.2 How to print the cell status list......................................................................3-23
3.18 How to Delete Charts ...............................................................................................3-24
3.19 How to Show Publishers Notes for ENC Charts ......................................................3-24
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.20 How to Find the Chart Type..................................................................................... 3-25

3.21 How to Update ENC, C-MAP Charts Manually........................................................ 3-25
3.21.1 How to insert update symbols ..................................................................... 3-26
3.21.2 How to delete update symbols .................................................................... 3-27
3.21.3 How to modify existing update symbols ...................................................... 3-27
3.22 How to Synchronize Chart Data .............................................................................. 3-28
3.22.1 How to select the units to synchronize ........................................................ 3-28
3.22.2 How to check synchronization status .......................................................... 3-29
3.22.3 Manual updates and synchronization .......................................................... 3-30
3.23 How to Reconvert All SENC Charts ........................................................................ 3-30
4.
HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS ..............................................................4-1

4.1 How to Browse Your Charts ...................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects.................................................................. 4-1
4.2.1 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and
deep contour.................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.2 Basic Setting menu........................................................................................ 4-3
4.2.3 Chart Display menu ....................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.4 Display base .................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3 How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features.......................................................... 4-5
4.3.1 General page................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3.2 Tracking page................................................................................................ 4-7
4.3.3 Route page .................................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.4 Mariner page ................................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.5 Targets page ................................................................................................. 4-9
4.4 Control of Predefined IMO Chart Display Settings .................................................. 4-10
5.
VECTOR (S57) CHARTS.......................................................................................5-1

5.1 Introduction to S57 Charts......................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Definitions of terms........................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.2 Chart legend for S57 charts........................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 Permanent warnings for S57 charts .............................................................. 5-3
5.2 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the S57 Chart ................................ 5-4
5.2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 How to approve and highlight S57 chart updates.......................................... 5-4
5.2.3 How to set Display date and Approved until dates ........................................ 5-5
5.2.4 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard ................................ 5-5
5.3 Symbology Used in S57 Charts................................................................................. 5-6
5.3.1 Presentation library used for S57 chart features ........................................... 5-6
5.4 How to Find Information about S57 Chart Objects .................................................... 5-6
5.5 Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO).......................................................................... 5-8
5.5.1 Installation ..................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5.2 How to display the AIO .................................................................................. 5-8
5.5.3 Catalog of AIO cells....................................................................................... 5-9
5.5.4 How to find AIO chart object information ..................................................... 5-10
5.5.5 How to select the information to display ...................................................... 5-11
6.
RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS ...................................................................................6-1

6.1 ARCS Charts ............................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 Chart legend of ARCS chart .......................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Datum and ARCS Charts .......................................................................................... 6-5
6.3 Permanent Warnings of ARCS.................................................................................. 6-5
6.4 ARCS Subscriptions .................................................................................................. 6-6
6.4.1 ARCS Navigator ............................................................................................ 6-6
6.4.2 ARCS license information.............................................................................. 6-6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.
C-MAP CHARTS ................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
C-MAP Cartographic Service .....................................................................................7-1

How to Register the System at C-MAP Norway.........................................................7-1
How to Order Charts ..................................................................................................7-1
How to Apply for Licenses..........................................................................................7-1
Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................7-2
Chart Subscription Services.......................................................................................7-2
7.6.1 C-MAP Dynamic Licensing (DL) service ........................................................7-2
7.6.2 What is ENC delivery? ...................................................................................7-2
7.7 Chart Display..............................................................................................................7-3
7.7.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................7-3
7.8 Permanent Warnings .................................................................................................7-4
8.
CHART ALERTS................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Chart Alerts ................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.1 How to set safety contour...............................................................................8-2
8.1.2 How to select objects used in chart alerts......................................................8-3
8.2 How to Activate Own Ship Check ..............................................................................8-4
8.3 Route Planning...........................................................................................................8-5
8.3.1 Chart alerts for route planning........................................................................8-5
8.4 Route Monitoring........................................................................................................8-7
9.
ROUTES................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1 Route Planning Overview...........................................................................................9-1
9.2 Main Menu for Route Planning...................................................................................9-2
9.3 How to Create a New Route ......................................................................................9-2
9.3.1 How to use the Waypoints page ....................................................................9-4
9.3.2 How to use the User Chart page....................................................................9-5
9.3.3 How to use the Optimize page .......................................................................9-6
9.3.4 How to use the Alert Parameters page ..........................................................9-7
9.3.5 How to use the Check Results page ..............................................................9-8
9.4 How to Modify an Existing Route ...............................................................................9-9
9.4.1 How to change waypoint position...................................................................9-9
9.4.2 How to change other waypoint data...............................................................9-9
9.4.3 How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route ..........................................9-9
9.4.4 How insert a waypoint .................................................................................9-10
9.4.5 How to delete a waypoint .............................................................................9-10
9.4.6 Geometry check of route..............................................................................9-10
9.5 SAR Operations .......................................................................................................9-11
9.6 Route Bank ..............................................................................................................9-14
9.7 Route Optimization...................................................................................................9-15
9.7.1 Available route optimization strategies.........................................................9-15
9.7.2 How to optimize a route ...............................................................................9-16
9.7.3 How to plan a speed profile..........................................................................9-17
9.8 How to Import Routes ..............................................................................................9-18
9.8.1 How to import FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 route data ..........................................9-18
9.8.2 How to import FEA-2x07 route data ............................................................9-18
9.8.3 How to import csv, ASCII format route data.................................................9-19
9.9 How to Export Route Data .......................................................................................9-19
9.9.1 How to export FMD-3xx0 route data ............................................................9-19
9.9.2 How to export route data in FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII format ...........................9-20
9.10 How to Delete Routes ..............................................................................................9-20
9.11 Reports..................................................................................................................... 9-21
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
10. USER CHARTS ...................................................................................................10-1

10.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.1 Objects of user charts.................................................................................. 10-1
10.2 How to Create a User Chart .................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 How to Import a User Chart Created with ECDIS FEA-2x07................................... 10-6
10.4 How to Edit Objects on a User Chart....................................................................... 10-7
10.4.1 How to edit objects on the chart area .......................................................... 10-7
10.4.2 How to edit objects from the User Chart dialog box .................................... 10-7
10.5 How to Delete Objects from a User Chart ............................................................... 10-8
10.6 How to Select the User Chart Objects to Display ................................................... 10-8
10.7 How to Delete User Charts...................................................................................... 10-9
10.8 User Chart Reports.................................................................................................. 10-9
11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES.............................................................................11-1

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
How to Start Route Monitoring ................................................................................ 11-1

How to Stop Monitoring a Route (Manual, Automatic) ............................................ 11-3
How to Select What Parts of a Route to Display ..................................................... 11-3
How to View Waypoint Information.......................................................................... 11-4
How to View User Chart Information ....................................................................... 11-5
How to Change Monitored Route to Planned Route ............................................... 11-5
How to Use Instant Track to Return to or Deviate from Monitored Route ............... 11-6
11.7.1 Safe off track mode ..................................................................................... 11-6
11.7.2 Back to track mode...................................................................................... 11-7
11.7.3 Instant track messages................................................................................ 11-9
11.7.4 Instant track details.................................................................................... 11-10
11.7.5 How to monitor, stop monitoring an instant track route ............................. 11-10
11.7.6 How to return to a monitored route when following an instant track
route (safe off track mode only)................................................................. 11-12
11.7.7 Button label and equipment state .............................................................. 11-13
11.8 How to Share Route During Route Monitoring ...................................................... 11-14
12. NAVIGATION TOOLS .........................................................................................12-1

12.1 How to Access the Nav Tools in the Overlay/NAV Tools Box ................................. 12-1
12.2 Parallel Index (PI) Lines .......................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.1 How to activate, deactivate PI lines............................................................. 12-2
12.2.2 PI line bearing reference ............................................................................. 12-2
12.2.3 Number of PI lines to display....................................................................... 12-2
12.2.4 PI line mode................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2.5 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval ......................................... 12-3
12.2.6 How to reset the PI lines.............................................................................. 12-3
12.2.7 How to adjust PI line length ......................................................................... 12-4
12.3 Check Area.............................................................................................................. 12-5
12.4 Ring ......................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.5 Predictor .................................................................................................................. 12-6
12.6 Anchor Watch .......................................................................................................... 12-7
12.7 UKC (Under Keel Clearance) .................................................................................. 12-8
12.7.1 UKC overview.............................................................................................. 12-8
12.7.2 How to set UKC ........................................................................................... 12-8
12.7.3 UKC window ................................................................................................ 12-9
12.8 Divider ................................................................................................................... 12-10
12.8.1 How to use the divider ............................................................................... 12-10
12.8.2 Usage characteristics, limitations .............................................................. 12-11
12.8.3 How to deactivate and erase the divider ................................................... 12-11
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS.............................................................. 13-1

13.1 How to Show, Hide TT .............................................................................................13-1
13.2 TT Symbols and TT Attributes .................................................................................13-2
13.2.1 TT symbols...................................................................................................13-2
13.2.2 TT symbol color and size .............................................................................13-2
13.3 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm ...............................................................................................13-3
13.3.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA limits, enable, disable the alarm.................13-3
13.4 Lost TT Alarm...........................................................................................................13-3
13.4.1 How to enable, disable the lost TT alarm.....................................................13-3
13.4.2 How to set the lost TT alarm filter ................................................................13-4
13.5 How to Set Vector Length and Vector Motion ..........................................................13-4
13.6 How to Display TT Data ...........................................................................................13-6
13.6.1 How to display target data for individual TT .................................................13-6
13.7 Displaying Past Positions of TT ...............................................................................13-7
13.7.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past
position reference.........................................................................................13-7
13.7.2 Past position point attributes ........................................................................13-7
13.8 TT Source ................................................................................................................13-8
14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS ................................................................................. 14-1

14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
Introduction ..............................................................................................................14-1
AIS Symbols.............................................................................................................14-2
Voyage Data ............................................................................................................14-4
How to Show, Hide AIS Targets...............................................................................14-5
How to Filter AIS Targets .........................................................................................14-6
AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm ..............................................................................................14-6
Automatic Activation of Sleeping Targets ................................................................14-8
14.7.1 Enabling, disabling automatic activation of sleeping targets........................14-8
14.7.2 Conditions for automatic activation of sleeping targets................................14-8
14.8 How to Sleep All Activated Targets..........................................................................14-9
14.9 AIS Lost Target Alarm..............................................................................................14-9
14.9.1 How to enable, disable the AIS lost target alarm .........................................14-9
14.9.2 How to set the AIS lost target alarm filter...................................................14-10
14.10Vector Length, Vector Stabilization in True Motion Mode .....................................14-10
14.11How to Display AIS Target Data............................................................................14-11
14.12How to Display AIS Target Past Positions.............................................................14-13
14.12.1How to enable/disable the past position display, set past
position reference.......................................................................................14-13
14.13How to Display Own Ship Data .............................................................................14-13
15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES.................................................................. 15-1

15.1 AIS Safety Messages...............................................................................................15-1
15.1.1 How to send an AIS safety message ...........................................................15-1
15.1.2 How to manage received and sent AIS safety messages............................15-2
15.2 Navtex Messages.....................................................................................................15-3
15.2.1 How to receive Navtex messages................................................................15-4
15.2.2 How to manage received Navtex messages................................................15-5
16. RADAR OVERLAY ............................................................................................. 16-1

16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
viii
Introduction ..............................................................................................................16-1
How to Setup the Radar Overlay .............................................................................16-2
Error Between Radar Echo Image and Chart ..........................................................16-3
Error Sources for Radar Echo Image and TT Mismatch ..........................................16-4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
17. WEATHER OVERLAY .........................................................................................17-1

17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
What is the Weather Overlay?................................................................................. 17-1

How to Activate, Deactivate the Weather Overlay................................................... 17-1
How to Select, Playback a Weather Data File......................................................... 17-2
How to Set up the Weather Overlay ........................................................................ 17-3
Weather Overlay Examples..................................................................................... 17-5
17.5.1 Wind display ................................................................................................ 17-5
17.5.2 Temperature display.................................................................................... 17-6
17.5.3 Cloud coverage display ............................................................................... 17-6
17.5.4 Precipitation rate display ............................................................................. 17-6
17.5.5 Waves display ............................................................................................. 17-7
17.5.6 Ocean current display.................................................................................. 17-7
17.6 Weather Spot Information........................................................................................ 17-8
17.7 Summary of Weather Overlay Viewability, Operability and Operating Mode .......... 17-8
18. NAVIGATION SENSORS ....................................................................................18-1

18.1 CCRS ...................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.2 How to Select Navigation Sensors .......................................................................... 18-2
18.2.1 Sensors menu description ........................................................................... 18-2
18.3 Source of Position ................................................................................................... 18-5
18.4 CCRP, System, Primary, Secondary and Pivot Positions of Own Ship................... 18-6
18.5 Source of Navigation Data....................................................................................... 18-7
18.6 Switching of Sensor and Indication ......................................................................... 18-9
18.7 Filter Status ............................................................................................................. 18-9
18.8 Position Alignment................................................................................................. 18-11
18.8.1 How to align position ................................................................................. 18-11
18.8.2 How to cancel position alignment .............................................................. 18-11
18.9 Wind Sensor .......................................................................................................... 18-12
18.10Depth Sensor ........................................................................................................ 18-13
19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS............................................................19-1

19.1 How to Record User, Position Events ..................................................................... 19-1
19.1.1 User events ................................................................................................. 19-1
19.1.2 Position events ............................................................................................ 19-2
19.2 Details Log............................................................................................................... 19-5
19.3 Voyage Log ............................................................................................................. 19-6
19.3.1 How to set conditions for voyage logging .................................................... 19-7
19.4 Chart Usage Log ..................................................................................................... 19-8
19.5 Danger Targets Log................................................................................................. 19-9
19.5.1 How to set the conditions for logging danger targets ................................ 19-10
19.6 How to Playback the Log....................................................................................... 19-11
20. ALERTS ...............................................................................................................20-1

20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8
What is an Alert? ..................................................................................................... 20-1

Alert Box .................................................................................................................. 20-2
How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer for an Alarm or Warning ........................... 20-5
How to Acknowledge an Alarm or Warning ............................................................. 20-5
Alert List................................................................................................................... 20-6
Alert Log .................................................................................................................. 20-8
Alert Reception from Connected Sensors ............................................................... 20-8
List of Alerts............................................................................................................. 20-9
21. PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................21-1

21.1 Ship and Route Parameters .................................................................................... 21-1
21.2 Forwarding Distances.............................................................................................. 21-2
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
21.3 Cost Parameters ......................................................................................................21-3

21.4 Instant Track Parameters.........................................................................................21-4
22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS ..................................................... 22-1

22.1 Conning Display .......................................................................................................22-1
22.2 Mini Conning Display ...............................................................................................22-9
23. SETTINGS MENU ............................................................................................... 23-1

23.1 How to Access the Settings Menu ...........................................................................23-1
23.2 File Export ................................................................................................................23-2
23.3 File Import ................................................................................................................23-3
23.4 File Maintenance......................................................................................................23-4
23.5 Self Test ................................................................................................................... 23-5
23.6 Data Sharing ............................................................................................................23-6
23.7 Customize ................................................................................................................23-7
23.8 Display Test .............................................................................................................23-8
23.9 Keyboard Test..........................................................................................................23-9
23.10Screenshots...........................................................................................................23-11
23.10.1How to export screenshots.........................................................................23-12
23.10.2How to delete screenshots.........................................................................23-12
23.11User Default...........................................................................................................23-13
23.12CCRP ....................................................................................................................23-14
24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................... 24-1

24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
24.5
24.6
24.7
Maintenance.............................................................................................................24-1
How to Replace the Fuse.........................................................................................24-2
Trackball Maintenance .............................................................................................24-3
How to Clean the Filter in the Processor Unit ..........................................................24-3
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................24-4
Consumable Parts....................................................................................................24-5
Color Differentiation Test for S57 Charts .................................................................24-6
25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) ....................................................... 25-1

25.1 What is an Alert Management System (AMS)?........................................................25-1
25.2 System Configuration...............................................................................................25-1
25.3 Alert Definition, Priority and Category of Alerts........................................................25-1
25.4 Alert Category and Alert acknowledgement From Connected Equipment, AMS .....25-3
25.5 How to Acknowledge an Alert, Stop the Buzzer From the AMS ..............................25-3
25.6 About the ALR and ACK Sentences ........................................................................25-3
25.7 How an Alert is Transferred to the BNWAS .............................................................25-5
25.8 Change of Priority for Unacknowledged Warning ...................................................25-6
25.9 How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer ...................................................................25-6
25.10Buzzer Patterns .......................................................................................................25-6
25.11Alert Priority, Alert State ..........................................................................................25-7
25.12Alert Icons................................................................................................................25-8
25.13AMS Mode Operations ............................................................................................25-9
25.13.1How to select the AMS mode.......................................................................25-9
25.13.2AMS mode windows...................................................................................25-10
26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS ............................................................................... 26-1

26.1 Configuration............................................................................................................26-1
26.2 Controls.................................................................................................................... 26-2
26.2.1 EMRI FAP-2000 ...........................................................................................26-2
26.2.2 EMRI FAP-3000 ...........................................................................................26-4
26.2.3 TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000 ...............................................................................26-5
26.2.4 YOKOGAWA PT-500A.................................................................................26-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
26.3 Steering Modes ..................................................................................................... 26-10

26.3.1 EMRI FAP-2000, FAP-3000 ...................................................................... 26-10
26.3.2 TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000, YOKOGAWA PT-500A ...................................... 26-11
26.3.3 Summary of steering modes...................................................................... 26-13
26.4 Autopilot Functions at the ECDIS .......................................................................... 26-14
26.5 How to Select the ECDIS to Control the Autopilot................................................. 26-15
26.6 How to Activate, Deactivate the Track Control System (TCS) from the ECDIS .... 26-16
26.6.1 How to activate the TCS............................................................................ 26-16
26.6.2 How to deactivate the TCS........................................................................ 26-16
26.7 Route Steering Related Indications, Alerts and Messages Generated by ECDIS 26-17
26.7.1 Route steering related information in Route Information box .................... 26-17
26.7.2 Alerts and messages when precondition for route steering are
not complete .............................................................................................. 26-18
26.7.3 Alerts given when approaching a waypoint ............................................... 26-20
26.7.4 Other route steering indications and alerts................................................ 26-22
26.8 Route Steering Operations .................................................................................... 26-23
26.8.1 How to stop or change a pre-enabled turn in route steering ..................... 26-23
26.8.2 Collision avoidance maneuver in route steering........................................ 26-24
26.9 Steering Performance............................................................................................ 26-24
26.9.1 Expected steering performance for going ahead....................................... 26-24
26.9.2 Expected steering performance for turns .................................................. 26-25
26.9.3 Expected steering performance under critical failure ................................ 26-26
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE .......................................................................................AP-1

APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS...........................................................AP-5
APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE ......................................................................AP-18
APPENDIX 4 DATA COLOR AND MEANING........................................................AP-31
APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST ......................................................................................AP-33
SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1
INDEX ......................................................................................................................... IN-1
xi
FOREWORD
Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information
System) FMD-3200, FMD-3200-BB, FMD-3300. We are confident you will see why the FURUNO
name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
Since 1948, FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and
dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers.
This equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless installed, operated and
maintained properly. Please carefully read and follow the recommended procedures for operation
and maintenance.
Features
The FMD-3000 series ECDIS is the product of FURUNOs extensive experience in computer technology and marine electronics. The ECDIS displays electronic charts, nav lines, TT data, AIS targets and other navigation data on a high-resolution 19-inch (FMD-3200) or 23.1-inch display
(FMD-3300). The FMD-3200-BB is supplied without a monitor, permitting use of the commercial
monitor of your choice.
The main features of this ECDIS series are
Complies with IMO MSC.232(82), IMO A.694(17), IEC 61174 Ed. 3, IEC 61162-1 Ed. 4 2010-11,
IEC 61162-2 Ed. 1, IEC 62288, IEC 60945 Ed. 4.
Continuous monitoring of ships position through multi-sensor Kalman filter processing using GPS,
DGPS, SDME.
Route planning and route monitoring facilities.
Radar image can be overlaid on electronic charts. (Requires FURUNO FAR-2xx7 or FCR-2xx9 series radar.)
Grounding warnings, safe depth contours.
Chart database loaded and updated using DVD ROMs or CD ROMs.
Target data from TT (Tracked Target) and AIS transponder to aid in collision avoidance.
Standards Used in this Manual

The keys and controls of the ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 are shown in bold face; for example,
the ENTER key.
The buttons on the InstantAccess bar and Status bar and menu items are shown in brackets; for
example, the [PLAN] button.
Context-sensitive menus are available with many buttons and boxes and objects within the display
area. Right-click those items to display the related context-sensitive menu.
Unless noted otherwise, "click" means to push the left button on a trackball module (in order to do
a function).
There are two types of Control Units: ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 (alphabet keyboard, controls,
trackball module) and Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 (trackball module only). Unless noted otherwise, "Control Unit" refers to the RCU-024.
"Keyboard" refers to the alphabet keyboard of the ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024.
The system can be operated with the controls of the ECDIS Control Unit or a trackball module. The
descriptions in this manual use the trackball module.
The color mentioned in this manual are the default colors. Your colors may vary.
xii
FOREWORD
Program No.
ECDIS: 2450074-01.xx, Conning: 2450079-01.xx (xx is version no.)
Data protection scheme

Product
FMD-3xx0
Software
Version
01.xx
Testing
Std.
Elec. Nav.
Chart (ENC)
IEC 61174 S-57 Ed. 3.1,

Ed.3
S-57 Ed.
3.1.1, and S57 Maint.
Doc. (Cumulative) No. 8
Raster
Nav. Chart
(RNC)
S-61 Ed.1.0
ECDIS
Presentation
Library
S-52 PresLib
Ed.3.4
Data
Protection
Scheme
S-63
Ed.1.1.1
Virus Prevention
The ECDIS is not equipped with a virus checker. The ECDIS operates in real time; therefore, having a virus checker that periodically checks the equipment for viruses would increase the processing load, which can affect operation. However, you can avoid viruses by following the instructions
in this section.
When you update a chart

The PC and medium (USB flash memory, etc.) used to download and store an update for an existing chart or a new chart may be infected with a virus. Check the PC and the medium for viruses
with a commercial virus checker - BEFORE you connect them to the ECDIS. Be sure the virus
checker contains the latest virus definition files.
Network connection
The ECDIS receives and displays information from various navigation equipment and radar via a
LAN. A PC and other equipment connected to a network can carry viruses. To prevent the introduction of a virus to the LAN, DO NOT connect the ECDIS or HUB to an external network, including other shipboard LAN.
Do not install 3rd party programs in the ECDIS

Do not install any 3rd party software.
Open source software

This product includes software to be licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), BSD, Apache, MIT and others. The program(s) is/are free
software(s), and you can copy it and/or redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GPL
or LGPL as published by the Free Software Foundation. Please access to the following URL if you
need source codes: https://www.furuno.co.jp/cgi/cnt_oss_e01.cgi.
This product uses the software module that was developed by the Independent JPEG Group.
Reverse engineering
Reverse engineering (reverse assemble, reverse compiler) of the software of this equipment is
strictly prohibited.
xiii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Single workstation
Main Monitor
Monitor Unit
MU-190
MU-231
HD26T21-MMD-MA4-FAGA
Sub Monitor
Monitor Unit
MU-190
MU-231
ECDIS
Control Unit
RCU-024
or
Trackball
Control Unit
RCU-026
Category of units
All units protected
from the weather.
Dashed lines indicate
optional or local supply
equipment.
ECDIS
Control Unit
RCU-024
or
Trackball
Control Unit
RCU-026
(Max. 2)
IF Signal:
- Serial Interface x2 (IEC 61162-1/2)
- Serial Interface x6 (IEC 61162-1)
- Digital Out x6
(power fail/system fail/ NO x2, NC x2)
- Digital In (ack in)
Note: The following monitors are
available with the FMD-3200-BB:
Model
MU-190
MU-231
MU-201CE
MU-231CE
JH19T14FUD
JH20T17FUD
Maker
FURUNO
FURUNO
FURUNO
FURUNO
Hatteland
Hatteland
Monitor Unit
MU-190
MU-231
Switching
Hub
HUB-100
EC-3000
PROCESSOR
UNIT
Sensor Adapter
MC-3000S
Serial interface
Sensor Adapter
MC-3010A
Analog interface
Sensor Adapter
MC-3020D
Digital IN interface
Sensor Adapter
MC-3030D
Digital OUT interface
Intelligent
Hub
HUB-3000
Gateway network equipment

(radar, ECDIS, etc.)
100-115/
220-230 VAC,
1, 50/60 Hz
Monitor viewing distance (m):
Model
Maker
JH23T12FUD
JH23T14FUD
HD24T21MMD
JH26T11MMD
HD26T21MMD
Hatteland
Hatteland
Hatteland
Hatteland
Hatteland
For information about a Hatteland monitor, see its

Operators Manual.
xiv
Conning
Monitor
Model
MU-190
MU-231
MU-201CE
MU-231CE
JH19T14FUD
JH20T17FUD
Viewing Dist.
1.0138
1.0138
1.0759
1.0138
1.0138
0.8793
Model
JH23T12FUD
JH23T14FUD
HD24T21MMD
JH26T11MMD
HD26T21MMD
Viewing Dist.
1.0138
1.0138
0.9517
0.9879
0.9879
Multiple workstation
Main Monitor
Sub Monitor
Monitor Unit
MU-190
MU-231
Monitor Unit
MU-190
MU-231
Conning
Monitor
Conning
Monitor
Monitor Unit
MU-190
MU-231
Monitor Unit
MU-190
MU-231
Main Monitor
Sub Monitor
Monitor Unit
MU-190
MU-231
Monitor Unit
MU-190
MU-231
ECDIS
Control Unit
RCU-024
or
Trackball
Control Unit
RCU-026
ECDIS
Control Unit
RCU-024
or
Trackball
Control Unit
RCU-026
(Max. 2)
ECDIS
Control Unit
RCU-024
or
Trackball
Control Unit
RCU-026
ECDIS
Control Unit
RCU-024
or
Trackball
Control Unit
RCU-026
(Max. 2)
Intelligent Hub
HUB-3000
EC-3000
PROCESSOR
UNIT
Gateway network
equipment
(radar, ECDIS, etc.)
EC-3000
PROCESSOR
UNIT
IF Signal:
- Serial Interface x2
(IEC 61162-1/2)
- Serial Interface x6
(IEC 61162-1)
- Digital Out x6
(power fail/system fail/
100-115/
NO x2, NC x2)
- Digital In220-230
(ack in) VAC,
1, 50/60 Hz
Category of units
All units protected
from the weather.
IF Signal:
(Same as left.)
Switching Hub
HUB-100
100-115/
220-230 VAC,
1, 50/60 Hz
Dashed lines indicate

optional or local supply
equipment.
Sensor Adapter
MC-3000S
Sensor Adapter
MC-3010A
Sensor Adapter
MC-3020D
Sensor Adapter
MC-3030D
Serial
interface
Analog
interface
Digital IN
interface
Digital OUT
interface
Note: The following monitors are

available with the FMD-3200-BB:
Model
MU-190
MU-231
MU-201CE
MU-231CE
JH19T14FUD
JH20T17FUD
Maker
FURUNO
FURUNO
FURUNO
FURUNO
Hatteland
Hatteland
100-115/
220-230 VAC,
1, 50/60 Hz
* Monitor viewing distance (m):
Model
Maker
JH23T12FUD
JH23T14FUD
HD24T21MMD
JH26T11MMD
HD26T21MMD
Hatteland
Hatteland
Hatteland
Hatteland
Hatteland
Model
MU-190
MU-231
MU-201CE
MU-231CE
JH19T14FUD
JH20T17FUD
Viewing Dist.
1.0138
1.0138
1.0759
1.0138
1.0138
0.8793
Model
JH23T12FUD
JH23T14FUD
HD24T21MMD
JH26T11MMD
HD26T21MMD
Viewing Dist.
1.0138
1.0138
0.9517
0.9879
0.9879
For information about a Hatteland monitor, see its

Operators Manual.
xv
This page is intentionally left blank.
xvi
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
System Configuration
This ECDIS series is comprised of the components shown in the illustration on the
System Configuration page.
The Processor Unit is connected to various sensors, and performs navigation calculations, route planning and route monitoring. The Sensor Adapters interface between
the Processor Unit and external equipment.
The operator controls the ECDIS with the ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 or the Trackball Control Unit RCU-026. Both units are equipped with a trackball module (trackball,
right and left mouse buttons and a scrollwheel). The RCU-024 is additionally equipped
with an alphabet keyboard. All functions of the ECDIS can be accessed from the trackball module.
1.2
Processor Unit EC-3000

The Processor Unit is the heart of the ECDIS system, and is mainly responsible for the
chart management, route planning and route navigation.
The Processor Unit has two power switches. The Mains switch controls the power
from the switchboard, and the Power switch controls the power to the ECDIS system.
DVD
drive
Mains switch
Power switch
Note 1: Do not operate the system with a medium inserted in the DVD drive when its
use is not required, to prevent damage to the drive and medium. After use of a medium
is completed, remove the medium from the drive and store it in its case.
Note 2: To keep the system stable, restart the unit at least once every two weeks.
Note 3: Close the lid of the DVD drive when the drive is not in use.
Note 4: The DVD ROM provided with this equipment contains the ECDIS program.
Store the DVD in a place where the temperature and humidity are moderate. The recommended storage temperature is -10C(50F) to 40C(104F).
1-1
1. INTRODUCTION
1.3
How to Turn the Power On/Off

Normally, leave the power switches at the front of the Processor Unit on and control
the power with the power key on a Control Unit (RCU-024, RCU-026). The Monitor
Unit is powered independently.
How to power the system

Push the Mains switch on the Processor Unit for the "I" position. Turn on the power
switch on the Processor Unit or the power key on the Control Unit. The start-up display
appears on the monitor.
Note: If the ambient temperature is less than 0C (32F) when the power is applied,
nothing appears on the display. This is because the heater is warming the Processor
Unit. The display appears after the Processor Unit becomes warm, in approx. two minutes.
How to power off the system

Press the power switch on the Processor Unit or the power key on the Control Unit.
Then, push the Mains switch for the "O" position.
1.4
The Standby Mode

The standby mode, which requires a password to activate, deactivates the audio
alarms from the ECDIS. Use this mode when the ECDIS is not required, like in a harbor.
To go to the standby mode, first click the [OTHERS] button on the Status bar then click
[STANDBY]. Have the holder of the password enter the password then click the [OK]
button.
Click OTHERS,
STANDBY.
Playback
Enter password;
click OK button.
Click to return to normal operation.
To return to normal operation, click [Back to Normal Mode].
1-2
1. INTRODUCTION
1.5
ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024

The RCU-024 consists of controls, keys, alphabet keyboard and trackball module
(trackball, scrollwheel and left and right mouse buttons). The trackball module functions like a PC mouse. The operator rolls the trackball and operates the left and right
mouse buttons and the scrollwheel to do various functions.
Status LED
Rotary encoder
for EBL
InstantAccess
knob
1.5.1
Rotary encoder
for VRM
Keyboard
USB port
POWER key
Trackball module
Control description
Key
Description
POWER key
Turns the system on or off. (With a FURUNO or Hatteland monitor unit, the monitor is also turned on or off with this key.)
Status LED
The color and state of the LED change according to system or

alert status.
Green, lighting: Normal operation status; no alerts generated.
Red, lighting: Acknowledged alert (but not rectified) or SYSTEM FAIL. SYSTEM FAIL occurs when there is trouble in the
Processor Unit or communication failure between the Processor
Unit and an ECDIS Control Unit. Each Control Unit detects trouble and its lamp flashes in red and the buzzer sounds. If this
condition occurs at the No. 1 ECDIS Control Unit, the SYSTEM
FAIL signal is output.
Red, flashing rapidly: Alert not acknowledged nor rectified.
Red, flashing slowly: Alert not acknowledged but rectified.
OFF: The heater on the CPU board is on, because the ambient
temperature is not at least 0C. The heater takes about two minutes to warm the equipment. The LED lights green after the
heater goes off.
EBL rotary encoder
Adjusts active EBL.
EBL 1
Activates or deactivates EBL 1.
1-3
1. INTRODUCTION
Key
1-4
Description
EBL 2
Activates or deactivates EBL 2.
ALARM ACK
Alert acknowledgement for alerts generated by chart, navigation, etc.
InstantAccess knob,
ESC key
Selects and processes the functions on the InstantAccess bar.

Rotate: Selects item.
Push: Confirms selection.
ESC key: Goes back one step in the current operating sequence on the InstantAccess bar.
BRILL
Rotate: Adjusts the brilliance of a FURUNO or Hatteland monitor.

Push: Selects a color palette.
A/C RAIN
No use.
A/C SEA
No use.
GAIN
No use.
Alphabet keyboard
Enter alphanumeric data. The CTRL key has no function.
VRM rotary encoder
Adjusts active VRM.
MFD
Switches between the ECDIS and CONNING modes.
VRM 1
Activates or deactivates VRM1.
VRM 2
Activates or deactivates VRM2.
UNDO
Undo the last operation, when creating a route or user chart.
VIEW/HIDE
Shows or hides the Instant Access bar, [Route Information] box,

VRMs, EBLs, [Overlay/NAV Tools] box.
RANGE
Selects the display scale.
ACQ/ACT
Activates cursor-selected sleeping AIS target.
TARGET DATA
Displays detailed target data for selected TT, AIS target.
TARGET CANCEL
Sleeps cursor-selected activated AIS target.
USB port
For connection of USB flash memory (FAT16 or FAT32 format

only). Do not connect a USB HDD or PC keyboard. The DVD
drive (Maker: TEAC, Type: PU-DRV10) is for chart updates.
Trackball module
See the description in section 1.6.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.6
Trackball Control Unit RCU-026

The RCU-026 has a power key, a trackball module (trackball, scrollwheel and left and
right mouse buttons), a status LED, and a USB port. The trackball module functions
like a PC mouse; the user rolls the trackball and operates the left and right buttons and
the scrollwheel to do various functions.
Power
key
Left
Scrollwheel
button
USB port
Status
LED
Right
button
Trackball
Control
Description
Power key
Turns the system on or off. (With a FURUNO or Hatteland monitor unit, the monitor is also turned on/off with this key.)
Status
LED
The color and state of the LED change according to system or alert status. See
the LED status description on page 1-3.
Left
button
Does the operation related to the object selected.

Confirms the operation done for the object selected.
Scrollwheel
Select options.
Selects chart scale.
Sets numeric data.
The scrollwheel does not have a push function.
Right
button
Displays context-sensitive menu when cursor is put in the display area.

Cancels operation done on the object selected.
Trackball
Moves the cursor.

Selects an object.
USB port
For connection of USB flash memory (FAT16 or FAT32 format). Do not connect a
USB HDD or PC keyboard. The DVD drive (Maker: TEAC, Type: PU-DRV10) is
for chart updates.
1-5
1. INTRODUCTION
1.7
How to Select a Color Palette

The system provides three sets of color and brilliance sets (palette), day, dusk and
night, to match any ambient lighting condition. The default specifications of each set
are as shown in the table below. The panel dimmer setting is automatically changed,
and the number of steps depends on the color palette selected.
Palette
Brilliance
Panel dimmer
(step)
Text
color
Background
color
120 cd/m2
15
White
Gray
110 cd/m2
120 cd/m2
15
White
Blue
Dusk-gray
50 cd/m2
50 cd/m2
Light gray
Dark gray
Dusk-blue
50 cd/m2
50 cd/m2
Light gray
Dark blue
Night-gray
5 cd/m2
5 cd/m2
Orange
Dark gray
Night-blue
5 cd/m2
5 cd/m2
Light gray
Dark blue
19
display unit
23
display unit
Day-gray
110 cd/m2
Day-blue
To select a palette, do the following:

1. Click the [Palette] button.
[Palette]
button
2. Select [Day], [Dusk] or [Night] as appropriate. For example, select [Day] to show
its options.
3. Click the palette desired.

Note 1: A palette can also be selected by pushing the BRILL control on the Control
Unit.
Note 2: If the display cannot be seen when switching from a Night to Day palette, push
and hold the right button (approx. 2 seconds) to switch to the dusk-gray mode.
Note 3: The color palette setting may not get synchronized among ECDIS units selected for synchronization if a unit is being booted during the selection of the color palette. If this occurs, wait until all ECDIS units selected for synchronization have booted
then reselect required color palette.
1-6
1. INTRODUCTION
1.8
How to Adjust the Display Brilliance (FURUNO or

Hatteland monitor)
The brilliance setting is defined according to the color palette setting. However, manual adjustment of the brilliance is also possible.
Note 1: The brilliance of only the FURUNO or Hatteland monitor can be adjusted from
the Control Unit. Use a serial cable for brilliance adjustment to make the connection
between the Processor Unit and the Control Unit.
Note 2: For how to adjust display brilliance from the Hatteland monitor, see its operators manual.
Note 3: Improper brilliance may affect the visibility of information, especially on the
night display.
1.8.1
Manual brilliance adjustment

Manual adjustment with the BRILL control on the ECDIS control unit
Operate the BRILL control to adjust brilliance. Turn it clockwise to increase the brilliance; counterclockwise to decrease the brilliance. Watch the brilliance level indication on the [BRILL] button (see the illustration below) to see the current brilliance level.
Manual adjustment with the InstantAccess knob

1. Push the InstantAccess knob.
2. Rotate the knob to select the [BRILL] button then push the knob to show the brilliance adjustment window.
Current brilliance level
[BRILL]
button
[CALIB]
button
Calibration state
(CALIB or UNCALIB)
3. Push the knob, rotate the knob to set the brilliance then push the knob to confirm
the setting. The calibration state indication changes to "UNCALIB".
4. Rotate the knob to select the [CALIB] button then push the knob to calibrate the
brilliance. The calibration state indication changes to "CALIB".
1-7
1. INTRODUCTION
Manual adjustment with the trackball module

1. Click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the brilliance adjustment window.
2. For coarse adjustment, put the cursor on a location within the slider bar area
then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor on the end of the
slider bar and roll the trackball while holding down the left button.
3. Release the left button to confirm setting. The calibration state indication changes
to "UNCALIB".
4. Click the [CALIB] button to calibrate the brilliance. The calibration state indication
changes to "CALIB".
1.9
How to Select Sensor Settings

This ECDIS system accepts navigation data input two ways: System or Local. System
shares sensor data among multiple ECDIS in network. Sensor priority is also commonly shared among the ECDIS. Local selects a sensor outside the network.
1. Right-click anywhere in the [Sensor information] box to show the context-sensitive
menu.
2. Click [Local] or [System] as applicable.
Note: Sensor system can also be selected
from the menu. Open the menu and click
[System/Local Select] on the [Sensor]
menu. Click the circle next to [System Sensor] or [Local Sensor] as appropriate then
click the [Save] button.
1-8
Open MENU
1. INTRODUCTION
1.10
How to Enter Ship Speed

The speed can be entered from a log (STW) or GPS (SOG), or manually on the menu.
Note that FURUNO GPS Navigator GP-150 provides both COG and SOG.
Speed data is checked for integrity (see section 18.7 for details), and the data is
judged as Passed, Doubtful or Failed. The results of the check appear on the [SPD]
page, shown below. (The results do not appear when the TCS is engaged.)
Passed (green): Data is available for comparison and data is normal.
Doubtful (yellow): Data is not available for comparison, but data is normal.
Failed (red): Data may or may not be available for comparison, and data is abnormal.
1. Right-click anywhere in the [Own ship information] box to show the context-sensitive menu.
Open MENU
2. Click [Open MENU].

3. Click [System Sensor Settings] or [Local System Settings] as applicable.
4. Click the [SPD] tab.
Fill circle for automatic speed input
Speed sensor list
Stablilization
mode
SPD:
Integrity: Passed
LOG/GPS
selection
Integrity
check
result
Set course and speed of drift

Check to use radar as source for speed and course
Fill circle for manual speed input
SPD page, local sensor
1-9
1. INTRODUCTION
Check for automatic speed input

Speed sensor list
Stablilization
mode
SPD:
Integrity: Passed
LOG/GPS
selection
Integrity
check
result
Check for manual speed input
SPD page, system sensor

5. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to step
6.
1) Check [Sensors].
2) Set the priority for the speed sensors in case of Local sensor. Click the triangle
on the Priority1 line to select the sensor to be the Priority1 sensor. Do the
same for the Priority2. Only one sensor can be Priority1; all others are priority
2. If a speed sensor is changed from Priority2 to Priority1, then that sensor previously selected to Priority1 is then automatically selected to Priority2 state.
3) Check [LOG] or [GPS] at [Sensor Type] as appropriate.
4) Select [Bottom] or [Water] at [Stabilization Mode]. Select [Bottom] if GPS is the
source of speed data, or [Water] if a speed log is the source of speed data.
5) Go to step 7.
6. For manual input, set the stabilization mode for [Water] and check [Manual]. Enter
the speed, using the scrollwheel or software keyboard.
Note: For set and drift, see page 18-3.
7. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the
menu.
Notes on speed input

Be sure not to select a LOG option when a speed log is not connected. If the log
signal is lost, the GPS sensor is used. In the event of GPS loss, the SPD is shown
as "**.* kn".
The SPD is shown as "**.* kn", and the label "LOG" is erased if no log signal is present for a certain amount of time. The timeout varies according to ship.
If SOG is changed to STW, the label "LOG" (in orange) appears. If log signal is lost
"LOG" is colored yellow.
A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the
leeway direction.
1-10
1. INTRODUCTION
1.11
How to Enter Heading

Heading can be entered manually or automatically. Heading data is checked for integrity (see section 18.7 for details), and the data is judged as [Passed], [Doubtful] or
[Failed]. The integrity check results appear on the [HDG] page, shown below. (The results do not appears when the TCS is engaged.)
Note: If there is only one gyro connected to the ECDIS, heading data is compared to
COG from GPS. When the speed is five knots or less, and COG is unstable when it is
compared to heading data, the message Doubtful appears for heading data. When
the ships speed becomes greater than 10 knots and COG stabilizes, the message
disappears after a short while.
1. Right-click anywhere in the [Own ship information] box to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Click [Open MENU].
3. Click [System Sensor Settings] or [Local System
Settings] as applicable.
4. Click the [HDG] tab.
Open MENU
Fill circle for automatic

heading input
Sensor list
GYRO1
Doubtful
GYO001
GYO002
Fill circle for

manual heading
Fill circle for
gyro correction
Integrity
check
result
Second shows
Integrity as
Not available
when only one
gyrocompass
is connected.
Local sensor settings
GYRO1
Doubtful
GYO001
GYO002
System sensor settings
1-11
1. INTRODUCTION
5. For automatic input follow the procedure below. For manual input go to step 6.
1) Check [Sensors].
2) For local system settings, set the priority for each sensor connected, referring to
section 1.10.
3) Go to step 7.
Note: For the local sensor, an offset can be applied to the gyro reading if it is
wrong. Check [Gyro Correction], then spin the scrollwheel to set the offset.
6. For manual input, check [Manual]. Enter heading by spinning the scrollwheel or
entering numeric data with the keyboard on the Control Unit.
menu.
1.12
How to Mark MOB Position

Use the MOB (man overboard) feature to mark the position of man overboard on the
display screen. Access the [MOB] button (in any mode) on the InstantAccess bar.
[MOB]
button
The MOB mark (orange) instantly appears at the system position when the button is
operated.
Up to 100 MOB marks can be saved. When the capacity for MOB marks is reached,
the oldest mark is automatically erased to make room for the latest.
To hide an MOB mark, get into the Navigation voyage mode (NAVI) or Voyage planning mode (PLAN), right-click the mark to show the context-sensitive menu then select
[Hide MOB].
Exercise caution when using this feature in strong tide or current. The person will not
be at the MOB position for a very long time.
1-12
1. INTRODUCTION
1.13
How to Select Time Format, Set Local Time

A GPS navigator feeds time and date data (ZDA sentence) to the ECDIS and they appear on the Status bar. Neither the time nor the date can be adjusted, however you
can select between UTC time (default) and local time. You can switch between the local time and the UTC time by left-clicking the Current time format indication.
Note: The date and time are yellow when the ZDA sentence is lost.
Current time format

Left click: Switch between
local and UTC times
Right click: Adjust local time
Time
To set the local time, enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC
time as shown below.
1. Right-click the Current time format indication to show the context-sensitive menu
then click [Adjust Local Time] to display the [Local Time Adjust] dialog box.
2. Enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC time, in hours and
minutes. Use the button on the left to select the time offset direction. Select "+" if
the local time is ahead of the UTC time, or "-" if it is behind the UTC time.
1.14
How to Take a Screenshot of the Display

Click the [Capture] button on the InstantAccess bar to take a screenshot and save it
to the SSD (Solid State Drive). You can save a maximum of 100 screenshots. When
the memory for screenshots becomes full, you cannot take any more screenshots. In
this case, delete unnecessary screenshots. You cannot take a screenshot when a
menu or a dialog box is open. Screenshots can be copied to a USB flash memory. For
how to process screenshots, see section 23.10.
[Capture]
button
1-13
1. INTRODUCTION
1.15
The Settings Menu

The [Settings] button gives you access to the user profiles and the [Settings] menu.
The [Settings] menu has facilities for screenshot management, file management, diagnostic tests and customizing. See chapter 23.
[Settings]
button
1.16
How to Manage User Profiles

Ten sets of [Chart Display], [Symbol Display] and [Chart Alert] menu settings can be
stored in user profiles for later retrieval.
1.16.1
How to create a profile

1. Set the [Chart Display], [Symbol Display] and [Chart
Alert] menus as desired.
2. Click [
file].
] on the Status bar then click [Manage Pro-
3. Select a profile number from the Profile drop-down

list.
Note: Profiles 06-10 are disabled in the default setting. To enable a disabled profile, select the profile
to enable from the Profile drop-down list then uncheck [Disable this profile].
4. Click [Save Current Settings].
1.16.2
How to disable a profile

Select the profile to disable from the Profile drop-down list then check [Disable this
profile]. Profile 01 cannot be disabled.
1.16.3
How to restore default settings to a profile

Select the applicable profile from the Profile drop-down list then click [Restore Default Settings].
1-14
1. INTRODUCTION
1.16.4
How to activate a profile

Click [
] on the Status bar then click the profile number to activate.
Profiles
(enabled)
1.17
How to View ECDIS Software Version No., ECDIS

System Information, and Operator's Manual
You can show ECDIS program no., ECDIS
system information, and the operator's manual. Click the [?] button on the Status bar then
select [Manual] to show the operator's manual, or [About] to show ECDIS and system related information.
On the [About] screen, click the [Version] tab
to show the ECDIS software version no., conning software version no., S52 presentation library version, ENC user permit no., and C-MAP SDK software version no. Click
the [System 1] tab to show ECDIS system information: CPU type, RAM capacity, SSD
free/SSD capacity, Equipment ID and dongle information. [Function] shows the systems capabilities. The [System 2] tab shows the startup time of the current session.
The information shown may be different than what appears on your display.
ecdis,conning,ams
* Actual number appears.

Version and ID nos. subject to change.
1-15
1. INTRODUCTION
1.18
Split Screen
You can split the screen in two, horizontally or vertically, in the Voyage navigation
mode.
1.18.1
How to activate, deactivate the split screen

To activate the split screen or return to the full screen, click the [DISP] and [TWO
DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the choices for screen division. Click
the screen division desired.
Full screen
Vertical split
screen
Horizontal split
screen
The example below shows the vertical split screen. The active display can be switched
by clicking an [ACTIVE] button at the top of the display. The dividing line between the
main and sub views cannot be moved.
Click ACTIVE button to
switch active display.
MAIN
VIEW
SUB
VIEW
Dividing line
1-16
1. INTRODUCTION
1.18.2
Function availability
Item
1.18.3
Viewable
Operable
Main
Sub
Main
Sub
AIS target
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Anchor watch
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Chart display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Danger highlight
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Divider
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
EBL, VRM
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Parallel index lines
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Radar overlay
Yes
No
Yes
Range rings
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
TT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Weather overlay
Yes
No
Yes
Split screen usage characteristics

If the sub view is not displayed correctly, restore the full screen display then try to activate the split screen again.
The display may not be updated when switching to the Voyage planning mode. If this
occurs, switch to the Voyage navigation mode, restore the split screen display then return to the Voyage planning mode.
The own ship mark may not appear at the screen center when releasing the split
screen display. If this occurs, click the indication "TM/CU Reset" at the top right position on the screen to show the own ship mark at the screen center.
The TM reset feature only works on the active display. To return the own ship mark to
the screen center, click the indication [TM/CU Reset] at the top right position on the
screen.
The sub view can use a location and chart scale different from the main view.
The chart scale related messages (overscale, larger ENC available, etc.), which appear beneath the chart scale indication, show only on the main view.
CAUTION
Changes to settings, including safety features such as safety contour, are only reflected on the main view when the split
screen is in use.
For that reason use caution when observing
the sub view.
1-17
1. INTRODUCTION
1.19
Tips
This ECDIS provides operational tips for the display area and the InstantAccess bar.
To get a tip, simply put the cursor on an object. The tip appears to the right of the object. For example, put the cursor on the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar. The
tip "Adjust brilliance" appears.
Tip
1.20
Printer Information
A Hewlett Packard (HP) printer may be connected to the system to print ENC Publisher's Notes, reports, logs, etc. The available HP printers are Officejet Pro 8000, Officejet Pro 8100 and Officejet 100 Mobile. No other makes or models are permitted.
1-18
2.
OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
2.1
ECDIS Display
The ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information Systems) screen is divided into
several areas, as illustrated below. (The illustration shows the layout for the FURUNOmonitor. The layout may be slightly different with the Hatteland monitor.)
Status bar
Cursor position
box
Instant
Track
Sensor
information
box
Chart scale/presentation mode

box
Electronic chart area
Own ship
functions
box
TC:
TC:
MANUAL
Instant
Access
bar
Route
information
box
Overlay/
NAV Tools
box
Alert
box
EBL1 box, EBL2 box
Permanent
warning box
VRM1 box, VRM2 box
The Status bar provides for selection of operating mode, chart format, IMO chart display;
one-click restoration of IMO standard display, etc.
The Sensor information box displays ship's speed, course and position and selects sensors.
The Own ship functions box applies offset to the chart; changes geodetic data system, and
provides true motion reset.
The Route information box shows route and waypoint data, when a route is selected for
navigation.
The Overlay/NAV Tools box provides for setup of the radar overlay and navigation-related
functions.
The Alert box shows operational and system alert messages.
The VRM boxes measure the range to an object.
The Permanent warning box displays chart-related warning messages.
The EBL boxes measure the bearing to an object.
The InstantAccess bar provides quick access to functions such as brilliance adjustment,
display palette and the menu. The contents change according to the ECDIS mode selected.
The Chart scale/presentation mode box selects the chart scale and presentation mode.
The Cursor position box shows the latitude and longitude position of the cursor and the
TTG to the cursor.
The Electronic chart area shows the ECDIS chart.
2-1
2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
2.1.1

The ECDIS can use the following types of charts:
S-57 (IHO)
S-63 (IHO) (S-63 encrypted)
ARCS (UKHO)
CM-ENC (C-MAP by Jeppesen)
CM-93/3 (C-MAP by Jeppesen)
The following information can also be displayed:
Cursor (moved by trackball)
Planned route
EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) and VRM (Variable Range Marker)
Radar image
Own ship symbol with speed vector
TT (Tracked Target, acquired from radar)
AIS target
Electronic charts in ECDIS

The electronic navigational charts are displayed in the electronic chart area. There are
two kinds of electronic navigational charts available for use in the ECDIS:
S57ed3 ENC or CM-93 (vector format)
ARCS (raster format)
The ECDIS combines chart and navigational information. It should be noted that modern navigation systems (e.g., differential GPS) may offer more accurate positioning
than what was used to position some of the surveys from which the electronic navigational chart was derived.
S57 vector format

ECDIS is compatible with S57
Ed.3 ENC format charts. ENC
charts are converted to SENC
for use with ECDIS.
The details for the chart are displayed in the electronic chart
area and these can be modified.
You can change the chart scale
with the ZOOM IN and ZOOM
OUT functions, and the scale
range is 1:1,000 - 1:70,000,000.
2-2
CM-93 vector format

The CM-93 charts require a contract with applicable provider. These charts are from
a private source and they cannot be used as a substitute for paper charts under any
condition. To emphasize this point these charts are called "Non-ENC" charts in this
manual. Note that some eToken dongles from the FEA-2xx7 can be used. These are
labeled JeT FURUNO XXXXX.
This ECDIS accepts the following C-MAP chart types: CM-ENC, Professional, Professional+ and Jeppesen Primary ECDIS Service.
C-MAP produced official ENC chart that complies with the IHO's (International Hydrographic Organization's) S-57 Edition 3 product specification. When used in an ECDIS,
the ENC data improves the safety of navigation at sea.
ARCS raster format

ARCS charts are digital reproductions of British Admiralty (BA) paper charts. They retain the same standards of accuracy, reliability and clarity as paper charts.
Zooming into the ARCS chart can be useful for magnifying a complex detail, however
this decreases the density of the data displayed, and can give a false impression of
the distance from danger.
2-3
2.1.2
Status bar
The Status bar mainly provides for selection of operating mode, chart type and IMO
chart display setting.
NAVI
No.
1
Button
Operating mode
10
Description
Selects the operating mode, ECDIS or conning. (If the conning display
is fed to a separate monitor, only ECDIS is available; the button is inoperative.)
Selects the Voyage navigation mode.
Goes to the Chart maintenance mode.
Selects the Voyage planning mode.
Sets system in standby.
Plays back log data (AMS connection must be off).
Shows only the chart, when the left button is pressed and held down.
Restores the IMO standard display instantly.
Selects chart priority when both vector or raster are available.
Selects the pre-defined presentations of ENC content: IMO BASE, IMO
STD or IMO ALL. CUSTOM appears when the symbols selected or deselected on the [Chart Display] menu do not match the preset conditions
for IMO BASE, IMO STD or IMO ALL.
Displays the operator's manual, ECDIS program no. and system info.
2
3
4
5
NAVI
CHARTS
PLAN
OTHERS
6
7
8
9
CHART ONLY
STD DISP
Chart priority
Chart database
11
Manages user profiles; opens the Settings menu.
12
Date
13
14
Time
2-4
Displays the date.

Selects the time to use, local or UTC.
Sets the time difference between local and UTC (to use local time).
Shows the time, UTC or local.
Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. If it is not spinning
the system is not working. Shortly after it stops spinning the buzzer
sounds. Reset the power to restore normal operation.
How to operate the buttons on the Status bar

There are two types of buttons on the Status bar: Toggle button and Drop-down list
button. You operate the buttons with the trackball module.
Button type
Toggle button
A toggle button alternately selects one of two functions
assigned to a button. The background color of a toggle
button is light-blue when the buttons function is enabled;
gray (default color) when disabled. The [NAVI] button is
an example of a toggle button.
Drop-down list button
A drop-down list button provides a drop-down list from
which to select an option related to the label on the button. The [Chart Database] button is an example of a dropdown list button. See the right figure. A drop-down list
button has a list status indicator whose position changes
according to list status.
List closed
Operating procedure
OFF
(gray)
Click
button.
ON
(light-blue)
Click
button.
List opened
2-5
2.1.3
InstantAccess bar
The InstantAccess bar contains all the operating functions related to the selected ECDIS mode (Voyage planning, Voyage navigation and Chart maintenance). The bar is
divided into two sections, upper and lower. The buttons in the upper section change
according to the mode selected. The buttons in the lower section are static in all
modes. A button with a triangle mark at its bottom right corner indicates a button with
multiple functions.
[NAVI] button
activated
[PLAN] button
activated
[CHARTS] button
activated
Instant
Track
Voyage navigation
mode bar
2-6
Chart maintenance
mode bar
Voyage planning
mode bar
Button
Description
Voyage navigation mode bar
Minimizes the InstantAccess bar. To restore the maximized bar, click anywhere on the minimized bar.
Click
arrow
Click
anywhere
on the
minimized
bar
Route
Manual Update
Mini Conning
Route functions: select route, deselect route, move route to plan, monitor route.
Processes AIS Safety and Navtex messages. If you have unS
N
read Navtex or Safety messages, the icon changes as shown
right; S for unread Safety, N for unread Navtex, S/N for
unread Safety and Navtex.
Shows the menu for manual update of chart objects.
Shows, hides the mini conning display.
Activates or deactivates the weather overlay.
Instant Track
Creates a temporary track to return to or make a temporary detour from the monitored course.
TCS
Controls for use with specific Autopilots (see chapter 26). TCS Setting* has two
buttons for selection of steering mode, Go AW and Go SEA. TCS State shows or
hides the [Track Control Status] window.
*Not shown with Autopilot FAP-2000.
Chart maintenance mode bar
Minimizes the InstantAccess bar.

AUTO Load
Automatically loads and installs ENC charts.
Manage Charts Deletes charts; installs charts manually.
Cell Status
Finds cell status.
License
Enters license information.
Public Key
Shows the current public key. The public key changes each time a new one is
installed.
System
Functions for chart synchronization. Sync Config selects the ECDIS units to synchronize. Sync Status checks synchronization status. Reconvert reconverts outdated SENC charts to the corresponding current ones.
Voyage planning mode bar
Minimizes the InstantAccess bar.

Planning
Creates routes and user charts.
Report
Displays route and user chart reports.
Guide Box
Shows or hides the guide box, which provides range and bearing measurement
between waypoints when creating a route.
Manage
Manages routes and user charts. Route imports, exports, deletes routes. User
Data
Chart deletes user charts. Data Import imports routes and user charts.
2-7
Button
Common bar
Chart INFO
DISP
Record
Description
Provides chart information. Chart Legend shows chart legend, in the Voyage
planning and Voyage navigation modes. Viewing Dates sets Display date and
Approved until dates. Chart 1 displays an overview of the ECDIS chart symbols.
SET shows the [Basic Setting] dialog box, [Chart Display] menu, [Symbol Display]
menu, [Chart Alert] dialog box. TWO DISP splits the screen in two, vertically or
horizontally, in the Voyage navigation mode. AIO shows, hides the AIO overlay.
Keyboard shows, hides the software keyboard.
Displays Chart log (ENC, ARCS, C-MAP), Event log (user event, POSN event)*,
NAV log (Voyage, Details, Chart Usage), Target log (Danger Target).
*Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes
Selects a color palette, day, dusk or night.
Adjusts the brilliance of a FURUNO or Hatteland monitor unit.
MOB
Inscribes the MOB (ManOverBoard) mark.

Takes a screenshot.
Restores the previous condition in route and user chart creation.
How to operate the buttons on the InstantAccess bar

The InstantAccess bar has four types of buttons: toggle button, drop-down list button,
slider bar button, and specialty button. (The MOB, Capture and Undo buttons are specialty buttons that provide a single-action function.) The buttons can be operated with
the trackball module or the InstantAccess knob. This section shows you how to operate the buttons with the InstantAccess knob.
Toggle button
Drop-down list button
Slider bar button
[Palette] button
OFF
(gray)
ON
(light-blue)
Palette
choices
1. Push the InstantAccess knob to enable its use with the InstantAccess bar.
2. Rotate the InstantAccess knob to select a button. The background color of the
button selected is light blue.
3. Do one of the following depending on button type.
1) Toggle button: Push the knob to select setting.
2) Drop-down list button or slider bar: Rotate the knob to select an item or adjust the slider bar. Push the knob to confirm your selection or setting.
Note 1: You can use the ESC key to go back one step in the current operating
sequence.
Note 2: The InstantAccess knob only adjusts the slider bar on the
InstantAccess bar.
2-8
2.1.4
Sensor information box

The sensor information box displays ship's heading, speed, course over the ground,
speed over the ground and position. When the user-selected sensor fails, the system
automatically selects another sensor. When this occurs, the color of the sensor name
changes from green to yellow. See the table below.
The digital indications and sensor names are
colored according to sensor state. See the
table below.
HDG: Heading and its source.
SPD: Longitudinal speed and its source.
The direction of transverse speed is indicated with arrows, , Starboard, , Port.
COG: Course over ground and its source.
SOG: Speed over ground and its source.
POSN: Latitude and longitude position of
own ship and its source.
Note: The position source shall meet the requirements of IMO MSC.112(73).
Color of nav data indications and sensor name

The color of the nav data indications and sensor name change according to the state
of the sensor data. The table shown below provides basic information. For detailed information, see Appendix 4. When no sensor data is received, the sensor source indication is blank.
Nav data indication
Color of nav data

indication
Color of
sensor name
Green
White
Yellow
White
Red
Red
Green, data shown

with asterisks
(***.*)
No display
Yellow
Yellow
State
Sensor is normal.
Validity of data is low or offset

is applied.
Validity of data is critically low.
Data is not being received.
Data is input manually (dead

reckoning).
2-9
2.1.5
Own ship functions box

The own ship functions box shows information about own ship, enables offset, and does
TM reset.
Offset button
WGS84 button
RNC info
appears here.
ENC info
appears here.
TM/CU status
[Offset] button: See section 18.8.1. This button is only operative in the Voyage navigation mode.
[WGS84] button: Convert position data between
datum; go to selected position on the current
chart. Click the button to show the dialog box below. To convert a position from one datum to another, select the datum source at the [Source] pulldown list and enter position. Select the datum to
convert to at the [Converted] pull-down list then
click the button. The position on the chart selected is shown below the [Converted] pull-down list.
To go to a position, click a [Go To] button.
ENC info: ENC chart info appears here.
No indication: ENC chart is currently displayed.
"ENC data available": Currently, RNC chart is
shown, but ENC chart is available.
"Non-ENC data": Non-official ENC material, in yellow characters. See section 3.20.
RNC info: "RNC data" appears (in yellow) when raster chart is in use.
TM/CU status:
"TM/CU Reset": True motion reset is active. (Chart is stationary and own ship moves
on the chart.)
"TM Reset off": When dragging the chart; true motion is OFF. To restart true motion,
click the indication,
"Ship off screen": Ship is out of the display area.
2-10
2.1.6
Route information box

Asterisks appear in data locations when no route
is selected for navigation.
Route: Name of monitored route
Plan Speed: Planned speed to approach "To
WPT".
Plan Course: Planned course between previous WPT and "To WPT".
Course to Steer: Calculated set course to follow the monitored route, including off track, drift
and gyro error compensations.
CH Limit: Planned width of channel to approach
"To WPT".
Off Track: Perpendicular distance the ship is
from the intended track.
TC: Track Control System status. No indication
if TCS is disengaged from the ECDIS.
To WPT: The waypoint that the ship is approaching.
DIST to WOP (Wheel Over Point): Distance to
the point where rudder order for course change
at "To WPT" is given.
Time to Go: Time to go to WOP (hh:mm:ss).
Turn RAD: Planned turning radius at "To WPT".
Turn Rate: Calculated rate of turn that is based
on current speed and planned turning radius.
Next WPT: The WPT following the "To WPT".
Next Course: Next course (in degrees).
Minimize button
TC:
MANUAL
Course to steer
WOL
WOL
Course to steer: 110
Planned course: 90
Course to steer: 120
Planned course: 90
Current
No current
Current present
2-11
2.1.7
Overlay/NAV Tools box

The Overlay/NAV Tools box sets up
the following:
TT/AIS
Echo (radar overlay)
Range rings
Predictor (predicts ships future
movements)
Under the keel clearance graphic
Anchor watch
Check area
See chapter 13 and 14 for TT/AIS descriptions. Refer to section 16.2 for the
radar overlay.
2.1.8
Page name
Minimize button
Page
selection
buttons
Alert box
The [Alert] box shows operational and system
alert messages, with alert ID no. and alert message. See chapter 20.
2.1.9
Permanent warning box

The permanent warning box displays chart-related
warning messages. The box cannot be closed or minimized.
2-12
2.1.10
EBL, VRM boxes

The EBL measures the bearing to an object, and the VRM measures the range to an
object. See section 2.9.
2.1.11
Context-sensitive menus
Context-sensitive menus are available at the locations shown below. Right-click the
applicable area then select the appropriate item from the menu. The availability of the
context-sensitive menu depends on the mode in use, as shown in the table below.
Cursor info
display
Sensor
selection
Chart scale
Instant
Track
TC:
TC:
Route selection,
route information
MANUAL
ROT:
TT/AIS
page
EBL reference
Item
Chart scale
Cursor info display
Sensor selection
Route selection, route
information
TT, AIS page
Alert list, Alert log
VRM reference
EBL reference
VRM
reference
Functions
Drop-down list of chart scales.
Switch cursor displays.
Select sensors.
Select route; unselect route;
move route to plan; show
route info.
Access TT, AIS functions.
Open alert list, alert log.
Select VRM reference; offset
(heading or north).
Select EBL reference; offset
(heading or north).
Ship offcenter; object info; radar info erase; chart legend;
manual update*; divider, hide
MOB, weather info**
Alert list,
Alert log
Mode and availability

NAVI
CHART
PLAN
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
*NAVI only **Available when weather overlay is active.
2-13
2.1.12
How to enter alphanumeric data

On some screens it is necessary to enter alphanumeric data. The data can be input
three ways: keyboard of the Control Unit, software keyboard or trackball.
Alphanumeric data entry from the keyboard of the Control Unit

1. Click the input box.
Cursor
Input box example
2. Press appropriate keys and press the ENTER key.

Key
TAB
CAPS LOCK
SHIFT
BS
ENTER
, ,,
Spacebar
CTRL
Function
Move the selection cursor.
Switch between upper case
and lower case alphabet.
Turn caps lock on and off
with the CAPS LOCK key.
Erase the character left of
the cursor.
Terminate keyboard input;
insert line feed.
Move cursor in direction of
arrow.
Insert a space
No use.
Keyboard
Space bar
Alphanumeric data entry from the software keyboard

A software keyboard is also available for entry of alphanumeric data. Do as follows to
use the software keyboard. Display the keyboard before opening menus.
1. On the InstantAccess bar, press the [DISP], [
] and [ON] buttons to show the
software keyboard. The [BS], [Enter], [], [],[ ], [] and [Spacebar] on the keyboard function the same as those keys on the keyboard of the Control Unit.
Space bar
2-14
2. To switch between the alphabet keyboard and symbols keyboard, click the [!$&]
key.
Alphabet keyboard
Symbols keyboard
3. Click the input box.

4. Click appropriate keys and finally click the [Enter] key.
To erase the software keyboard, click the X button at the top right corner of the keyboard.
Alphanumeric data entry with the trackball module

The trackball module can also be used to enter alphanumeric data.
1. Put the cursor in the input box. Up and down arrows
appear at the right side of the box.
2. Enter data by one of the methods shown below.
Spin the scrollwheel to set data. Upward to decrease the value; downward to
increase the value.
Note: The incrementing direction can be changed with [Wheel rotation] in the
[Customize] menu of the [Settings] menu.
Click to increase the value; to decrease the value.
How to enter latitude and longitude data with the trackball module
The trackball module can also be used to enter latitude and longitude data.
1. Put the cursor in the input box. A selection cursor (lightblue) appears.
Selection cursor
2. Enter data by spinning the scrollwheel.

3. To switch coordinate between N and S and vice versa,
put the cursor at the right edge of the input box. Dual arrows appear
4. Click to switch the coordinates. The method to switch E to W and vice versa is the
same.
2.2
How to Select the Operating Mode
[Display Mode] button
Click the [Display Mode] button at the far left side of the Status
bar to select the operating mode, [ECDIS], [CONNING] or
AMS (option). [ECDIS] displays electronic charts. [CONNING]
display provides comprehensive navigation displays such as
wind direction and rudder angle, in analog and digital formats.
(Note that this button is inoperative if the conning display is fed
to another monitor.) See section 22.1. [AMS] opens the Alert
Management System. See Chapter 25.
2-15
2.3
How to Select the ECDIS Operating Mode

The ECDIS has three operating modes: Voyage navigation, Chart maintenance, and
Voyage planning. Select the mode from the Status bar with the [PLAN], [CHARTS]
and [NAVI] buttons. The background of the button of the active mode is blue.
For Voyage navigation For Voyage planning
mode
mode
ECDIS
For Chart maintenance
mode
Note 1: When switching between the Voyage navigation and Chart maintenance
modes it may take several minutes to read the chart database when using C-MAP
charts or there are many charts installed.
Note 2: If the equipment accepts no key operation after switching to the Chart maintenance mode, reset the power.
2.4
How to Select the Chart Scale

When you open a chart it is displayed with the default scale, called the compilation
scale. To change the chart scale, do one of the procedures shown below. The scale
range is 1:1,000 to 1:70,000,000.
Click the chart scale selection buttons in the Chart scale/presentation mode box.
Right-click anywhere inside the Chart scale/presentation mode to show a dropdown list of chart scales.
Put the cursor anywhere on the chart and spin the scrollwheel.
Chart scale indication
Chart
related message
Chart scale
selection buttons
Note: When the radar overlay is active the chart scale is shown in nautical miles (NM).
The table below lists the chart related messages and their meanings.
Message
Display date is not current
Non-ENC data
Large scale ENC available
Overscale
2-16
Meaning
Displayed date is not the current
date.
ENC non-compatible chart in use.
Larger scale available at current
position (TM reset ON) or cursor
location (TM reset OFF).
Scale too large.
Remarks
Message
RNC data
Larger RNC available
Underscale
ENC data available
WGS shift undefined
RM(OFF)
2.5
Meaning
RNC chart in use.
Larger RNC is available.
Scale too small.
ENC data available for current
area.
WGS shift is not defined.
Relative motion off.
Remarks
ARCS only
ARCS only
ARCS only
ARCS only
ARCS only
How to Select the Presentation Mode

The presentation mode is available in North-up TM, North-up RM, Course-up TM,
Course-up RM, Route-up RM and Head-up RM. To select a presentation mode, click
the presentation mode indication to cycle through the presentation mode choices, or
click the triangle to show the drop-down list of presentation modes.
Click to show drop-down list of

presentation mode choices
Presentation mode
2-17
2.6
Cursor Position Box

The Cursor position box shows
Cursor position in latitude and longitude
Time to go to the cursor position
The bearing (True or Relative) and range to the cursor position, or x-y coordinates
of cursor position. Click the bearing and range or x-y coordinates indication to
switch the display, in the sequence shown below.
Cursor position, Time to go

to cursor position
Bearing(T) and range to cursor position
Bearing(R) and range to cursor position
x-y coordinates of cursor position
2-18
2.7
True Motion Reset

In the true motion mode, the chart is stationary and own ship moves on the screen.
With TM reset active, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline(s), then the chart is redrawn and own ship jumps back to an opposite position on
screen based on its course. (This resetting can also be done manually by clicking the
[TM/CU Reset] button.) When the TM reset function is active, "TM/CU Reset" appears
at the right side of the display.
TM reset borderline setting
(Ring does not appear on the display.)
OWN SHIP
TM
Reset
OWN SHIP
How to enable, disable automatic TM reset

To enable automatic TM reset, click the [TM Reset off] indication at the right side of
the display to show [TM/CU Reset].
Click
When the TM reset is disabled, change the chart scale with the scrollwheel and scroll
the chart by drag and drop. The own ship information box shows [TM Reset off]. When
own ship moves off the screen the box shows [Ship off screen].
How to set the true motion reset borderline

You can set the limit for TM reset (in percentage) on the [Basic Setting] page. See
section 4.2.2.
2-19
2.8
How to Control Route and User Charts in Voyage

Navigation and Voyage Planning Modes
Click for Voyage navigation mode
Functions in Voyage navigation mode
Click for Voyage planning mode
Functions in Voyage planning mode
Click the appropriate chart mode button [PLAN] or [NAVI] at the top of the display to
go to respective mode. For the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] button then
click the button corresponding to the action to take. For the Voyage planning mode,
click the [Planning] button followed by the [Route] button to select a route, or [User
Chart] button to select a user chart.
Voyage navigation mode functions
Voyage planning mode functions
Select: Selects the route to use in the Voy- Route: Shows the [Route Plan] dialog box
age navigation mode.
to create or edit a route.
Unselect: Deselects active route.
Move to Plan: Moves active route to Voyage planning mode.
Route INFO: Shows the [Route Information] dialog box.
2-20
User Chart: Shows the [User Chart] dialog

box to create or edit a user chart.
2.9
How to Use the VRM and EBL

The VRM measures the range to an object and the EBL measures the bearing to an
object. There are two each of VRMs and EBLs. The lengths of the dashes on the EBL2
and VRM2 are longer than those of the EBL1 and VRM1 to distinguish them. The color
of the VRMs and EBLs is orange.
VRM1
EBL2
VRM2
EBL1
EBL On/Off
EBL no.
240.8
VRM On/Off
EBL bearing
EBL reference
2.9.1
VRM no.
VRM range
How to hide/show an EBL, VRM

Control Unit: Push EBL or VRM key to hide or show respective marker.
Trackball: Click the arrow on an EBL or VRM box to hide the respective marker. To
redisplay the marker, click the minimized box.
2.9.2
How to measure the range and bearing

Range: Put the cursor on the VRM then drag the cursor until the VRM is on the inner
edge of the object.
Bearing: Put the cursor on the EBL then drag the cursor until the EBL bisects the object.
2.9.3
How to select bearing reference

The EBL bearing reference can be true or relative. Click the EBL reference indication
to display T (True) or R (Relative).
2-21
2.9.4
EBL, VRM functions available with the context-sensitive menu

The EBLs and VRMs have additional functions that are accessed from the contextsensitive menu. Right-click any VRM or EBL box to show the context-sensitive menu.
Function
Description
Centered
Centers the origin of the EBL and VRM on the current position.
Ground
Anchors the EBL and VRM to ground; neither the EBL or VRM move
with ship's movement.
Offset HDG
Select
[Offset
HDG].
Drag and drop EBL, VRM
on desired location.
When vessel changes course, the

EBL, VRM move so that the angle (D)
to their centers stays fixed.
Offset North
Select
[Offset
North].
Drag and drop EBL, VRM
on desired location.
2-22
The EBL, VRM move to keep the

angle from North to the center of the
EBL, VRM, even if the vessel
changes course. The distance to the
center of the EBL, VRM is fixed.
2.10
Datum
2.10.1
General
Datum is a mathematical model of the earth based on which a sea chart is produced.
If the datum of a position sensor and that of a sea chart are different, a transformation
has to be made somewhere in the system. Not doing so can result in errors of several
sea miles. The difference between two datum is never constant, but depends on position. This means that the difference between WGS-84 and local datum, generally
used in paper charts, is not generally valid with electronic sea charts.
2.10.2
Paper charts
Datum used in paper charts have been traditionally national datum for historical reasons. Many paper charts do not have a marked datum, therefore compatibility with
electronic charts may be complicated. In some paper charts, the correction terms are
printed in lieu of datum, for correction of the WGS-84 system satellite locations. The
correction terms are usable but only with the paper chart in question.
2.10.3
Electronic sea charts

The ENC vector material has to be produced by a National Hydrographic Office in
the WGS-84 datum.
The ARCS (raster) material includes polynomials for each chart, making it possible
for the ECS system to solve the difference between the WGS-84 datum and the local datum with an accuracy sufficient for authority responsibility. In some charts, the
mentioned difference is not known with sufficient accuracy, resulting in displaying a
message in the Cursor position box when displayed in ARCS compatible systems.
2.10.4
Positioning devices and datum

In early days of electronic positioning devices, datum received little attention because
the commonly used systems utilized special charts (like Decca charts). Later on, data
output was added to these systems, but still no attention was paid to datum and the
position errors were considered as an inaccuracy of the system. With the spread of
the GPS, however, datum has become better known. An accurate position is of no value if co-ordinates are in a wrong datum. GPS satellites utilize the WGS-84 datum.
2.10.5
ECDIS and datum

The ECDIS uses ENC material, produced to standards using WGS-84 datum. Positioning devices connected to the ECDIS must work in the WGS-84 datum. IMO requires that the ECDIS must give an alert if the datum of a positioning device is not the
WGS-84.
2-23
2.11
Set up Before Departure
2.11.1
Updates before departure

Update chart material
Update your chart material before embarking on a new voyage. See section 3.21.
Display and approve dates for charts and manual updates

Note: It is very important that you set the Display and Approve dates for charts as the
current date.
There may be features that require chart viewing dates or seasonal dates in charts.
Accordingly, if you have not set Display and Approve dates as the current date there
is a possibility that you can get a wrong presentation or some feature may be absent.
See section 5.2.
Create or update user chart, Notes

If necessary, create a new user chart and Notes or modify existing ones. See
chapter 10.
Chart alert calculation

Set chart alert areas suitable for your coming voyage, on the [Check Area] page in the
[Overlay/NAV Tools] box. See section 8.2.
2.11.2
Create or update a route

Create a new route or modify an existing one. See chapter 9.
Check your route against chart alerts

Before you sail your route, you should always check your route against chart alerts.
This is important because your S57 charts and manual updates may contain chart
viewing dates information. You can check chart alerts from the [Check Results] page
on the [Route Plan] dialog box.
The following information is stored with the monitoring route plan:
2-24
Conditions for chart alerts during route monitoring, which includes safety contour
and other chart alerts, on the [Alert Parameters] page of the [Route Plan] dialog
box.
Route Bank
Name of the user chart to be used during route monitoring together with this
planned route, on the [User Chart] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box.
Name of the Notes to be used during route monitoring together with this planned
route, on the [User Chart] dialog box.
Check in Notes column indicates Notes is used with route monitoring and planned route
2-25
Recalculate timetable and ETA values

Timetable and ETA values can be recalculated from the [Optimize] page in the [Route
Plan] dialog box. Minimally set ETD to equal departure time, and set optimization values.
Route Bank
2.11.3
How to check and prepare route to monitor

Select a route for the voyage: In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] button
followed by the [Select] button, or right-click the route indication in the [Route Information] box (right edge of screen) then select [Select Route]. See chapter 11.
Note: A route cannot be opened if its planned settings are different from its navigation
settings. The reason is given on the [Select Route] dialog box. In this case, open the
route in the Voyage planning mode and click the [Check Route] button, on the [Alert
Parameters] page. Adjust the route as necessary.
The To WPT can be selected, however WPT 01 cannot be selected.
2-26
Select confirm conditions of the route plan

Check the setting on the [Chart Alert] dialog box; click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart
Alert] buttons to show that dialog box.
Planned user chart, Notes

To check what planned user chart is selected, open the [Route Information] dialog box
and click the [User Chart] tab. The name of the user chart(s) to be used is in the
[Linked User Chart] window.
2-27
2.11.4
Check configuration of navigation sensors

You can check the configuration of your navigation sensors in the [System Sensor
Settings] page and [Local System Settings] page in the [Sensor] menu.
Check speed settings ([SPD] page)

Open the menu and click the [SPD] tab in the [System Sensor Settings] page or [Local
System Settings] page. The user can select navigation sensors for use in navigation
and view their current values.
SPD:
Integrity: Passed
SPD page, local sensor
SPD:
Integrity: Passed
SPD page, system sensor
If there is no value shown for a sensor, this means that the sensor is not valid. Note
that the content of these pages depends on the sensors that are in use on the ship.
The content of the display changes with sensor.
Note that manual speed should only be used in an emergency, when no other speed
reference is available. Remember that position sensors are also available as speed
sources.
2-28
Check position sensors (POSN page)

Open the menu and click the [POSN] tab in the [System Sensor Settings] page or [Local System Settings] page. The [Prim] and [Second] labels indicate the type of the position sensor. (In the figure below the [Prim] label shows FILT). [Prim] and [Second]
indicate sensor status and priority.
FILT
LAT:
3515.743N
LON:
13950.064E
Integrity: Passed
LAT:
LON:
Integrity: Not Available
Second shows Integrity as Not available when

only one position-fixing equipment is connected.
Only one sensor can be Primary1 while the others are Primary2 or off position. After
a sensor is turned off, its status is changed to Primary2 state. When a position sensor
state is changed to Primary1 and another sensor was Primary1, the sensor formerly
primary1 becomes Primary2.
Select the Primary1 navigation sensor as the sensor that is considered to be most accurate and reliable. Set all other navigation sensors as Primary2.
2.11.5
How to reset odometer and trip meter

To reset the odometer and/or trip meter do as follows:
1. Open the menu and select the [Voyage] menu from the [NAVI Log] menu.
2. Click one of the following buttons as appropriate.

Reset Trip: Reset the trip distance (ground and water).
Reset All: Reset both the odometer and the trip meter (ground and water).
3. Click the [Close] button to finish.
2-29
2-30
3.
HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

This chapter mainly shows you how to install the public keys, licenses and charts,
manually update chart objects, and synchronize charts. All chart-related operations
begin from the Chart maintenance mode, which you access by clicking the [CHARTS]
button on the Status bar.
Note 1: Charts, routes and user charts are shared with other FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9
and FAR-3x00 units, via LAN. Data is shared automatically; no operation is required.
Note 2: Chart processing (installation, deletion, etc.) may take several minutes depending on the number of charts to be processed.
Note 3: If, when attempting to install charts, nothing appears on the display at the start
of the procedure, reset the power and try again.
Note 4: If installation of AVCS charts stops, the message "Chart installation has
stopped. Run the installation again. Installation will continue from the chart not yet installed." appears. This does not indicate completion of the installation. Restart the installation. The installation resumes from the chart not yet installed.
This message may also appear when installing CM-ENC, C-MAP Professional and
C-MAP Professional+ charts if the user does not confirm completion of the installation
within approx. one hour. (Installation window remains on the screen.) However, this is
not an indication of failed installation.
Note 5: When installing the AVCS LargeMedia, the message "No connection to dongle" may appear in the [Error/Warning Guidance] window at the completion of the installation. If this occurs, reinstall the media.
3.1
How to Install Public Keys for ENC Charts

Public keys authenticate the source and integrity of the ENC chart materials used in
this chart system. Before you install a new ENC chart, confirm that the corresponding
public key is installed.
1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the public key. (The
IHO public key is preinstalled.)
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Public Key] button on the
InstantAccess bar.
3. Click the [Load New Key] button to show the [Open File] dialog box.
4. Find the .pub file then click the [Open] button. The [Public Key] dialog box reappears.
3-1
3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS
5. Click the [Display Content] button on the [Public Key] dialog box to show the display contents.
Public Key content
//BIG p
FCA6 82SE 8E12 CABA 26EF CCF7 110E 526D
B078 B05E DECB CD1E B4A2 08F3 AE16 17AE
01F3 5B91 A47E 6DF6 3413 C5E1 2ED0 8998
CD13 2ACD 50D9 9151 BDC4 3EE7 3579 2E17
//BIG q
FCA6 82SE 8E12 CABA 26EF CCF7 110E 526D
B078 B05E DECB CD1E B4A2 08F3 AE16 17AE
01F3 5B91 A47E 6DF6 3413 C5E1 2ED0 8998
CD13 2ACD 50D9 9151 BDC4 3EE7 3579 2E17
6. To accept the contents, click the [Activate] button on the [Public Key] dialog box.
3.2
How to Install ENC Licenses, Charts

Install your ENC licenses and charts, in that order.
3.2.1
How to install an ENC license

Automatic installation
1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the ENC license.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar to show the [Licenses] dialog box.
3. Click the [Install Licenses] button.
4. Select the medium that contains the license then click the [Open] button.
3-2
5. Find the license (permit.txt) then click the [OK] button to install the license.
The [Licenses] dialog box then shows cell name, date of expiration, data server
name and subscription type of the license.
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
Manual installation
If you do not have the medium which has your ENC license, you can enter the license
number manually.
1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar to go the Chart maintenance mode,
then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar.
2. Click the [Input Manually] button to show the [Input License Manually] box.
3. Select the type [ENC/ARCS] at the bottom of the screen.

4. Enter the license number(s) then click the [OK] button.
3.2.2
How to install ENC charts

When you install charts from a medium, the system first loads a catalog, which stores
certain information into your SSD such as cell IDs, their position, and edition number,
from the install medium. Then, the system asks which charts you want to install from
the chosen medium. After building the catalog, you can view the contents of it by clicking the [Cell Status] button.
Note: Do not cancel the installation (with the [Cancel] button) while it is in progress.
Cancellation automatically resets the power, stopping the installation. If the power is
reset, try to install the charts again. If the installation fails, reset the power and try
again.
1. Set the medium that contains the ENC charts.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [AUTO Load] button on the
InstantAccess bar. A prompt informs you that it may take a while to do the installation and are you sure to continue. Click the [OK] button to continue. A message
3-3
informs you that the system is searching the medium (in the figure below the medium is a DVD) for chart data.
The results of the search are displayed, an example of which is shown below. To
cancel the installation, click the [Cancel] button.
3. Click the [OK] button to install the charts. The [Install chart data] window appears
and shows the percentage of completion, with digital and analog indications.
To show details during the installation, click the [Show detail] button.
To close the [Message] window, click the [Hide detail] button.
3-4
4. When the installation is

completed, information
about the installation appears in the [Error/Warning/Guidance] window.
Click the [Confirm] button
to finish.
100%
5. If applicable, set the next

sequential medium and
repeat steps 2-4 to install
the next charts.
Note 1: When many charts
are installed, the ECDIS
checks for error in the installed chart data at the next power up. This is not an indication of malfunction.
Note 2: Previous versions of charts cannot be displayed if installed after installing the
latest versions.
3.3
How to Install ARCS Licenses, Charts
3.3.1
How to install an ARCS license

An ARCS license can be installed automatically or manually. The procedure which follows is for automatic installation. For manual installation, see "Manual
installation" on page 3-3.
Note: Do not cancel the installation (with the [Cancel] button) while it is in progress.
Cancellation automatically resets the power, stopping the installation. If the power is
reset, try to install the charts again. If the installation fails, reset the power and try
again.
1. Insert the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the ARCS license.
3-5
4. Find the medium that contains the license then click the [Open] button.
5. Click the [OK] button to install the license.
4937
3249
4937
1473
2376
4173
31 Mar 2015
31 Mar 2015
31 Mar 2015
31 Mar 2015
31 Mar 2015
31 Mar 2015
N
N
N
N
N
N
ARCS License
Delete Licenses
Export List
3.3.2
How to install ARCS charts

When you install charts from a medium, the system first loads a catalog, which stores
certain information into your SSD such as cell IDs, their position, and edition number,
from the install medium. Then, the system asks which charts you want to install from
the chosen medium. After building the catalog, you can view the contents of it by clicking the [Cell Status] button.
Note: Do not cancel the installation (with the [Cancel] button) of a chart while it is in
progress. Cancellation will automatically reset the power, stopping the installation. If
this occurs, try to install the chart again. If the installation fails, reset the power and try
again.
1. Set the medium that contains the ARCS charts.
InstantAccess bar. A prompt informs you that it may take a while to do the installation and are you sure to continue. Click the [OK] button. A message informs you
3-6
that the system is searching the medium (in the figure below the medium is a
DVD) for chart data.
The results of the search are displayed, an example of which is shown below. To
cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button.
3. Click the [OK] button to install the charts. The [Install chart data] window appears
and shows the percentage of completion, with digital and analog indications.
3-7
4. When the installation is completed, information about the installation appears in

the [Error/Warning/Guidance] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish.
5. If applicable, set the next sequential medium then repeat steps 2-4 to install the
next charts.
Note 1: When many charts are installed, the ECDIS checks for error in the installed
data at the next power up. This is not an indication of malfunction.
Note 2: If, after installation, no ARCS chart appears, delete all ARCS charts and then
reinstall them.
3-8
3.4
How to Delete ENC, ARCS Licenses

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode.
2. Click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar.
3. Click the [ENC] or [ARCS] tab as appropriate to show a list of licenses.
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
31 Sep 2015
4. Put a checkmark next to the license(s) to delete.

5. Click the [Delete Licenses] button to delete the license(s) selected.
3.5
How to Read ENC Judgment Information

You can find out if your installed ENC charts are official or unofficial, with the [Producer
Code] button in the [Licenses] dialog box. The following functions use this feature.
[Filter] window (see section 3.15) can show or hide official or
unofficial charts.
Official:
Official
Unofficial
.Chart judgment is shown for unofficial charts on the [Check Results] of the [Route
Plan] dialog box (see section 9.3.5) if the corresponding alert check is active.
1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [License] button to show the [Licenses]
dialog box.
2. Click the [ENC] tab.
3. Click the [Producer Code] button.
4. Select the judgment information file then click the [Open] button.
3-9
3.6
How to Install C-MAP Charts

Synchronize chart data before you install C-MAP charts, grouping the ECDIS units to
synchronize, otherwise the chart data cannot be shared. See the procedure in
section 3.22.1 for how to synchronize chart data. If C-MAP charts are not synchronized after installation, delete all C-MAP charts, and do the above procedure again.
3.6.1
How to register the eToken

The eToken is a hardware mechanism (installed inside the PCU) used for password
authentication. Registration of the eToken is required only once, before you install the
C-MAP database.
2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to the show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.
E-mail size
1MB
3. Click the [C-MAP Setup] button.

4. You are asked if you are sure to continue; click the [OK] button to continue and
register the eToken.
Note 1: "CMAP: No connection to eToken" disappears from the Permanent warning
box after completion of the registration.
Note 2: You can show your CMAP system ID by clicking the
[C-MAP System ID] button on
the [Licenses] dialog box for CMAP.
3.6.2
C-MAP system ID
appears here.
How to install the C-MAP database and licenses

When you install the C-MAP database from a medium, all data is saved to the SSD.
Note 1: If several ECDIS units are installed, synchronize C-MAP charts among the
units after you have installed the database.
Note 2: The installation of a chart cannot be cancelled while it is in progress. If you get
an error message, try to install the charts again.
Note 3: Disable the Chart Alert function at the [Check Area] page of the [NAV Tools]
box (see section 8.2) before removing any C-MAP charts.
Note 4: The C-MAP database in the units selected for synchronization are synchronized upon the successful completion of the database installation.
3-10
How to install the C-MAP database

1. Insert the medium that contains the C-MAP database.
InstantAccess bar.
The [Install chart data] window appears and shows the percentage of completion,
with digital and analog indication.

3. When the installation is completed, information about the chart database installed
appears in the [Error/Warning/Guidance] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish.
4. If applicable, set the next sequential medium and repeat steps 2-3 to install the
next databases.
Note 1: If, after installation, C-MAP Pro+ charts do not appear, delete all corresponding charts and then reinstall them.
3-11
Note 2: Synchronization is not done for charts which could not be installed successfully. Reinstall failed charts.
How to install C-MAP licenses

A C-MAP license file is normally installed automatically. Manual installation is also
available.
Automatic installation:
1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the C-MAP license.
InstantAccess bar.
4. Select the medium that contains the license then click the [Open] button.
5. Click the [OK] button to install the license.
Manual installation:
1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar to go the Chart maintenance mode,
then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar.
2. Click the [Input Manually] button to
show the [Input License Manually]
box.
3. Select the type [C-MAP] at the bottom of the window.
4. Enter the [Database name] and
[Collection name] information as
shown in the
table below. Enter the names exactly as shown to ensure correct installation.
Database name
Chart type
Professional:
Professional+:
CM-ENC:
JeppesenPRIMAR:
Name to enter
World
Professional+
ENC
JeppesenPRIMAR
Collection name
Enter the contracted zone number according to chart
type as follows:
Professional/Professional+: Enter Zone * (without quotations)
Ex. Zone 0
CM-ENC/JeppesenPRIMAR: Enter Zone * ENC
(without quotations)
Ex. Zone 0 ENC
*=Zone no.
5. Enter the license (max. 16 characters) in the bottommost window.

6. Click the [OK] button to finish.
3-12
3.6.3
How to generate, order and apply an update file

How to generate and order an update file
To update the C-MAP chart database, you have to generate an update file, and e-mail
the file directly to C-MAP. The update file defines coverage of charts you can display
on your chart radar.
1. Connect a USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
InstantAccess bar.
3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.
4. From the [E-mail Size] drop-down list, select the size of the update file. The choices are [100KB], [200KB], [300KB], [400KB], [500KB], [750KB], [1MB], [2MB],
[3MB], [4MB], [10MB], [Unlimited]. This is the size of the data file in an e-mail. The
file may be sent in pieces depending of the size selected.
5. Click the [Order Update File] button. A file name (C-MAP system ID and chart
type) is automatically created, with the extension .ord.
6. Select the USB flash memory.

7. Click the [Save] button to save the order file to the USB flash memory.
8. Send the order file to [email protected].
Within a few minutes you will receive a file that includes the terms for using the chart
service and the chart updates. Save the file to a USB flash memory and apply it as
shown in the next section.
How to apply the update file

1. Insert the USB flash memory that contains the update file (.ans extension) into the
USB port on the Control Unit.
InstantAccess bar.
4. Click the [Update from File] button.
5. Find the update file on the USB flash memory then click the [Open] button.
3-13
3.7
How to Delete a C-MAP Database

InstantAccess bar.
3. Select the database to delete with the [Database] pull-down list.
4. Click the [Delete Database] button.
3.8
How to Install C-MAP DL (Dynamic Licensing)

Charts
Register the eToken if it has not already been registered. See section 3.6.1.
3.8.1
How to generate, order and apply an update file

How to generate and order an update file
To update the C-MAP chart database, you have to create an update file, and
e-mail the file directly to C-MAP. The update file defines coverage of charts you can
display on your ECDIS.
1. Insert a USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
InstantAccess bar.
4. Click the [Order Update File] button. A file name (C-MAP system ID and chart
type) is automatically created, with the extension .ord.
6. Click the [Save] button to save the order file to the USB flash memory.
7. Send the order file to [email protected].
Within a few minutes you will receive a file that includes the terms for using the chart
service and the chart updates. Save the file to a USB flash memory and apply it as
shown in the next section.
How to apply the update file

1. Insert the USB flash memory that contains the update file (.ans extension) into the
InstantAccess bar.
4. Click the [Update from File] button.
5. Find the update file on the USB flash memory then click the [Open] button.
Note: If the .ans file does not update the status of all shared C-MAP DL charts, reset
the power of all Processor Units.
3-14
3.8.2
How to enable and set up the C-MAP DL

InstantAccess bar.
2. Click the [C-MAP DL] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP DL.
C1210011
ENC
01 Jun 2012
Unissued
3. Check [Enable Dynamic License] to enable the dynamic licensing.

You now have access to all the charts contained within the selected subscription
zones - both already licensed charts and new charts.
Settings, indications on the Licenses dialog box for C-MAP DL

Set your annual credit limit with [Credit Limit]. A permanent warning is given if your
credit goes below this value. A new chart cannot be enabled if it causes the credit
to go below this value.
[Credit Rest] shows the amount of credit remaining and is updated each time you
receive a confirmation answer for your request via e-mail.
[Next Report Date] is the date when the next report should be sent to Jeppesen. If
charts are not reported before the mandatory report date, access to all non-reported
charts is discontinued and can be resumed only after the confirmation answer allowing use of the charts is received via e-mail.
[Confirmation Date] is the date when you receive the confirmation answer for your
request via e-mail.
[Confirm before open new chart], if checked, a confirmation window asks for confirmation before opening charts that require issuing a new license. A chart denied is
added to the list of protected charts, so the confirmation request will not be repeated
for that chart. Those charts cannot be opened until they are removed from the list
of protected charts.
[Protected], if checked, shows the protected charts in the cell list. To remove a
chart from protection, select it then click the [Release] button. Then, when an attempt is made to open that chart, the confirmation window appears. Note that multiple confirmation windows open when releasing multiple charts from protection.
3.9
How to Export a List of Charts

Get into the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box. Check the charts to add
to the list. Click the [Export List] button to export the checked charts to a USB flash
memory, in .txt format.
3-15
3.10
How to Export a List of Specific Licenses

You can export a list of your ENC, ARCS or C-MAP (excluding C-MAP DL) licenses
to a USB flash memory, in .txt format.
1. Set a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button.
3. Click the [ENC], [ARCS] or [C-MAP] tab.
4. Click the [Export List] button.
5. Change the file name at [File Name] if desired.
6. Select the USB flash memory then click the [Save] button.
3.11
How to Show the ENC Permit, ARCS License

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button.
2. Click the [ENC] or [ARCS] tab as applicable.
3. Click the [ENC User Permit] or [ARCS Licenses] button as applicable to show permit or license.
3.12
How to Backup, Restore Licenses

You can make backup copies of your ENC, ARCS and AVCS (AIO) licenses and save
them to a USB flash memory. If re-installation of the licenses becomes necessary, you
can reinstall them from the USB flash memory. The backup and restore functions are
not available with C-MAP charts.
To backup licenses:
1. Insert a USB flash memory into the USB port on the Control Unit.
3. Click the [Backup Licenses] button.
4. Select the USB flash memory then click the [OK] button to save the licenses.
3-16
To restore licenses:
1. Insert the USB flash memory that has the licenses into the USB port on the Control
Unit.
3. Click the [Restore Licenses] button.
4. Select the licenses from the USB flash memory then click the [OK] button.
3.13
How to View Permit Expiration Date

Permits are used to control the right to use chart data in the ECDIS. A permit is connected to the edition of a chart. Permits are issued in two different types:
Subscription permit: This type of permit includes updates for subsequent 3, 6, 9 or
12 months.
One-Off permit: This type of permit includes only updates up to the issue date of the
permit.
The expiry date of a permit controls the loading of Base charts and their updates to
the chart. The system will warn you when you are installing charts or updates that are
issued less than 30 days before the expiration date of a permit. If a permit has expired,
it is impossible to install a chart or its update that was issued after the expiration date
of the permit. The user has a right to view a chart forever, except C-MAP charts that
have viewing periods which end two months after the expiry date of the license. If the
charts are not updated regularly it will not complete the requirements for having up-todate charts. To view the permit status of a chart, click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar and then click the applicable "chart" tab ([ENC], [ARCS], [C-MAP]
or [C-MAP DL]).
The example below shows the status of ENC charts. The expiration date of each cell
appears in the [Expires] window.
Subscription warnings for RENC

If you have at least one subscription-type permit, the system will automatically warn
you about the expiration date of your subscription license, in the Permanent warning
box.
Note: If you change service provider for some reason, it is recommended that you remove all the charts from the ECDIS before installing new charts of new service provider.
3-17
3.14
How to Display Install/Update History

You can see a history of chart installations and updates. On the InstantAccess bar,
click the [Record] and [Chart Log] buttons followed by the [ENC], [ARCS] or [C-MAP]
button. The example below shows the install/update history for ENC charts.
You can filter the log with [Period Covered (UTC)]. Enter the period to display then
click the [Set Period] button. Click the [Clear Period] button to display all entries. The
[Refresh] button updates the list. [Print Text] prints hard copy of the history.
The [Find] button searches required text string as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.
Input box
Find
Enter text in box and

[Find] button appears.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to search.

3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button.
4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of
the screen.
5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button.
3-18
3.15
Catalog of Chart Cells

A catalog is used to view graphical coverage of the charts stored in your SSD, available in a named "medium". Available charts are displayed using their limits of charts.
Note that sometimes the real coverage of the charts may be considerably less than
the declared limits of it.
To display the catalog, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Manage
Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar. The [Filter] window lets you choose what to
display. Check or uncheck items as appropriate.
Filter
window
Not up-to-date
10
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
1) Chart Type
ENC: Display ENC charts.
ARCS: Display ARCS charts.
C-MAP: Display C-MAP charts.
2) Availability
Display available or unavailable charts.
3-19
3) License
Valid: Cell with valid license.
Missing/Expired: Cell with missing or expired license.
Valid + Missing/Expired: Display cell regardless of license.
Uncheck both: Hide all cells.
4) Dynamic License
Display DL or non-DL C-MAP charts.
5) C-MAP Collections
A collection is a pre-defined dataset, the contents of which can be defined by zone,
individual chart or any of those combinations. Applicable to C-MAP charts also.
6) Official
Display official or unofficial charts.
7) Up-to-date
Display charts which are or are not up to date.
8) Purpose
Display chart according to its purpose - Overview, General, Coastal, AIO,
Approach, Harbor, Berthing.
9) Group
See the next section for how to group charts.
10) Route
Show or hide chart area with route.
11) Chart boundary boxes
Define the area covered by a chart and are color-coded according license and permit status.
12) Line color legend
The line color legend provides information about license validity.
Color
Green
Yellow
Orange
Magenta
Red
Blue
3-20
Message
License ok, chart is up-to-date
DL issued, not reported
License ok, chart is not up-to-date
License available, chart not installed
Not available or expired
Canceled chart
3.15.1
How to group chart cells

You can define groups of like-format chart cells. This means you can collect related
charts, for example, all cells that cover a route from Liverpool to New York or all cells
available from a National Hydrographic Office.
You can make a group and define charts from the [Edit Group] dialog box.
How to make a new group of chart cells

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar.
2. Click the [Edit] button in the [Filter] window to show the [Edit Group] dialog box.
Group Name:
3. Click the [New] button.

4. In the [Outside Group] window, click the box to the left of the chart cell you want
to add to the group to show a checkmark. (A context-sensitive menu with "Select
all" and "Deselect all" functions is available by right-clicking the box to the left of
[Name], in either window.)
5. After you have selected the cells to add to the group, click the << button to move
the names of the selected cells to the [Inside Group] window. If you want to remove a chart from the group, select it then click the >> button.
6. Click the [Save] button.
7. Enter a name for the group, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or software
keyboard, then click the [OK] button.
How to edit a group of chart cells

You can edit a group of chart cells from a group as follows:
InstantAccess bar to show the [Filter] window.
2. Click the [Edit] button.
3. At the item [Group Name], select the name of the group with the pull-down list.
4. In the [Inside Group] window, click the box to the left of the chart cell you want to
remove from the group to show a checkmark. (A context-sensitive menu with "Select all" and "Deselect all" functions is available by right-clicking the box to the left
of [Name].)
5. After you have selected the charts to remove to the group, click the >> button to
remove the selected charts cells from the group.
6. Click the [Save] button to finish.
3-21
How to delete a group of chart cells

You can delete group of chart cells as follows:
InstantAccess bar to show the [Filter] window.
2. Click the [Edit] button.
3. Select the name of the group with the pull-down list at the item [Group Name].
4. Click the [Remove] button.
5. Click the [OK] button.
6. Click the [Close] button.
How to select the group to view

In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar to show the [Filter] window. Check [Group] then select the group to
view from the pull-down list at [Group].
3.15.2
How to view status of chart cells

The [Cell Status] dialog box shows the status of the chart cells stored in the system.
To show this dialog box, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Cell Status] button on the InstantAccess bar.
Type: Type of chart cell, ENC, C-MAP or ARCS.

Chart Name: Chart name
Data Server: The name of the data server where the chart was downloaded from.
Edition/Issued Date: Edition no. and issued date of the chart cell.
Update: Num/Date: No. and date of the update of the chart cell.
Updated: [yes] is shown if the cell is up-to-date, [no] if the cell is not up-to-date.
3-22
3.16
How to Open Charts

In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar to display the dialog box shown below. Select the chart to open
then click the [Open Chart] button.
3.17
How to Print Chart List, Cell Status List
3.17.1
How to print the chart list

InstantAccess bar to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box.
2. Check the charts to print.
3. On the [Filter] window, check the information to print.
4. Click the [Print List] button to print. (If you have selected more than 30 charts, the
message "The number of pages is 1. Do you want to continue?." appears. Click
the [OK] button to continue, or the [Cancel] button to escape.)
3-23
Description of chart list printout

Item
Ship Name
IMO Number
Call Sign
MMSI
Printing Date
Data Location
Filter
Status Summary
3.17.2
Description
Name of ship
Ships IMO number
Ships call sign
Ships MMSI number
Date list printed
Location of charts; normally Internal.
Settings of the items in the [Filter] window.
[yes]: charts with yes status/total number of charts
[no]: charts with no status/total number of charts
How to print the cell status list

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Cell Status] button on the
InstantAccess bar to show the [Cell Status] dialog box.
2. On the [Filter] window, check the information to print.
3. Check the charts to print on the [Cell Status] dialog box.
4. Click the [Print List] button to print. (If you have selected more than 30 charts, the
message "The number of pages is 1 Do you want to continue?." appears. Click
the [OK] button to continue, or the [Cancel] button to escape.)
Description of cell status printout

Item
Ship Name
IMO Number
Call Sign
MMSI
Printing Date
Filter
Status Summary
3-24
Description
Name of ship
Ships IMO number
Ships call sign
Ships MMSI number
Date list printed
Settings of the items in the [Filter] window.
[yes]: charts with yes status/total number of charts
[no]: charts with no status/total number of charts
3.18
How to Delete Charts

Click the [Manage Charts] button to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box. Click the
block to the left of the chart to remove to show a checkmark. A context-sensitive menu
with "Select all" and "Deselect all" functions is available by right-clicking the block to
the left of "Type". Click the [Delete Charts] button to delete the charts selected.
3.19
How to Show Publishers Notes for ENC Charts

You should read the text file associated with each catalog, which you can view when
installing a chart from a medium. Click the [Note] button in the [Manage Charts] dialog
box. You can print a hard copy with the [Print Text] button.
3-25
3.20
How to Find the Chart Type

The electronic chart system can display more than one ENC chart cell at a time. This
feature is called multi-cell display. If one ENC chart cell does not cover the whole display, the system opens more ENC chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the
displayed area are available. The Own ship functions box shows information about
ENC chart cells displayed on the electronic chart display area. When automatic TM
reset is active, the information is displayed with reference to your ship's position. If TM
reset is OFF, the information is displayed with reference to current cursor position.
ENC info
appears here.
Chart type indication

No indication (Official ENC chart)
Non-ENC data (Unofficial ENC chart, indication in yellow)
ENC data available (Currently, RNC chart is in use, but
ENC material is available. Indication shown in yellow.)
3.21
How to Update ENC, C-MAP Charts Manually

Manual update may include deleting an already existing object, modifying a position
or other characteristics of an already existing object or inserting of a new object. In this
system, manual updates are stored in a common database.
Mariners cannot permanently remove any of the official objects from the chart display.
If a mariner needs to make obsolete any of the official objects he deletes them. Then,
in practice, the deleted objects are still visible, but a diagonal line on the object indicates it is a deleted object.
However, a mariner can remove objects that he has inserted himself.
Note that the manual updates have no automatic connection to any automatic update
received later for charts. If a manual update itself became obsolete, because the official chart has been updated to include the update defined as a manual update, the
mariner must himself delete the obsolete manual update in question.
The system records complete usage of manual updates. All deletions, modifications
and insertions are recorded and time stamped. If the mariner wishes to see what kind
of manual updates he had in the past, for example, two weeks ago, he uses Update
History to specify the relevant date range. For information on how to set Display date
and Approved until dates, see section 5.2.3.
Note: Do not manually update charts while charts are being synchronized. Wait until
synchronization is completed.
3-26
3.21.1
How to insert update symbols

An update symbol can be added as shown in the procedure below.
Note 1: If the system freezes when updating the drawing type [area], reset the power.
Note 2: An update symbol that straddles the international date line cannot be edited.
In this case, insert the same symbol on each side of the line.
1. Go to the Voyage navigation mode.
2. Click the [Manual Update] button on the InstantAccess bar to open the [Manual
Update] dialog box.
3. Click the [Planning] tab.
4. Click the [Add] button.

Note: This window can also be shown from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then
select [Manual Update] and [Add New].
5. Use the [Drawing Type] pull-down list to select drawing type: point, line or area.
6. Click desired object.
7. Put the cursor on the location where to insert the symbol then left click. The [Manual Update] dialog box
shows:
- Object
- Drawing type
- Display until date*
* Set as desired; default setting is three months from date of entry.
8. You can add a comment related to a manual update object in the [Description]
box.
3-27
9. To add textual information to an attribute, select the attribute from the [Attributes]
window then add text in the [Edit Attributes Value] window.
10. Click the [Commit] button to add all selected objects to the chart.
Note: A manual update object is displayed until the Display until date entered for it has
passed. If the object remains on the screen after the Display Until date has passed,
do some operation on the screen to refresh the screen to erase the object.
3.21.2
How to delete update symbols

Manually entered update symbols cannot be deleted until the Display Until date arrives or is changed. However, you can mark the symbol to indicate that it can be ignored.
1. Put the cursor on the symbol then right click to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Manual Update] and [Delete].
The symbol is marked with a diagonal line.
Note: A symbol can also be deleted from the [Manual Update] dialog box. Follow
steps 1 and 2 in section 3.21.1, click the [List] tab, select the symbol to delete then
click the [Delete] button.
3.21.3
How to modify existing update symbols

The position, Display until date and description of an update symbol can be modified.
A symbol that is marked as deleted cannot be modified.
1. Follow steps 1-2 in section 3.21.1 to display the [Manual Update] dialog box.
2. Click the [List] tab.
3. Select the object to modify then click the [Modify] button. The [Planning] dialog
box appears.
4. Modify the object referring to steps 8 and 9 in section 3.21.1.
5. Click the [Commit] button.
3-28
3.22
How to Synchronize Chart Data

This section shows you how to synchronize chart data between FMD-3xx0 and FCR2xx9 units, so that all units share the same chart data. Synchronization can be done
automatically or manually (see section 3.22.2), however all units selected for synchronization must be powered to complete the synchronization. Synchronization includes
the following actions:
Synchronize public keys
Synchronize chart permits and licenses
Synchronize chart data
Synchronize manual updates
Note 1: Before synchronizing chart data, confirm that all units selected for synchronization are powered. (Do not turn off a unit during synchronizing.) If a unit is turned off
during the synchronizing, do the following on the unit which contains the medium:
Open the [Sync Status] dialog box then click the [Disable Sync] button to disable
synchronization. Power all units registered for synchronization, then click the [Urge
Sync] button on the [Sync Status] dialog box on the unit containing the media to
forcibly synchronize.
Make a group of all the units currently powered, referring to section 3.22.1, and register the group with [Grouped with This Unit]. Reset the power on all units selected
for synchronization.
Note 2: C-MAP charts are not automatically synchronized. C-MAP charts are only
synchronized immediately after installing or updating the C-MAP database. If the system has several FMDs, make a group of associated units before you install C-MAP
charts.
3.22.1
How to select the units to synchronize

Do as follows to select the units to synchronize.
1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode. On the InstantAccess bar, click [System]
followed by [Sync Config] to show the [Sync Config] dialog box.
[Grouped with This Unit]: This window shows the units currently selected for
synchronization.
[Not Synchronize with This Unit]: This windows shows the units not selected for
synchronization.
3-29
2. To select a unit for synchronization: Put a checkmark next to the units name
in the [Not Synchronize with This Unit] window then click the << button. That units
name is moved to the [Grouped with This Unit] window.
To deselect a unit from synchronization: Put a checkmark next to the units
name in the [Grouped with This Unit] window then click the >> button. That units
name is moved to the [Not Synchronize with This Unit] window.
To deselect all units, click the [Reset All] button.
4. Restart the power on applicable units to apply synchronization configuration
changes.
3.22.2
How to check synchronization status

You can check chart synchronization status on the [Sync Status] dialog box. Chart
synchronization operations also
are available from this dialog
box. Normally, chart synchronization is done automatically, according to the sync settings on
the [Sync Config] dialog box.
Use the [Sync Status] dialog
box to manually synchronize
chart data when there is network failure, for example.
Get into the Chart maintenance mode. On the InstantAccess bar, click [System] followed by [Sync Status] to show the [Sync Status] dialog box.
[Current Status]: Displays current synchronization status. The table below shows all
the synchronization status messages.
Sync status
disabled
must receive
must send
none
Meaning
Synchronization is disabled.
This ECDIS will receive chart data from another FMD-3xx0 or
FCR-2xx9 series.
This ECDIS will send chart data to another FMD-3xx0 or FCR-2xx9
series.
No synchronization task ready.
[Update] button: Click this button to update [Current Status].

[Enable Sync] button: Enables synchronization. You are asked, "Do you want to enable sync?" Click the [OK] button to enable synchronization. Synchronization is always enabled when ECDIS starts. A progress bar indicates progress in
synchronization. The bar is erased within five minutes after completion of synchronization.
[Disable Sync] button: Disables synchronization function temporarily. Use this feature to enable chart administration in case of network failure, for example. You are
asked, "Do you want to disable sync?" Click the [OK] button to temporarily disable synchronization.
3-30
Note 1: In normal operation do not disable synchronization. If you accidentally disable

synchronization, try to synchronize by clicking the [Enable Sync] button. If that does
not work, reset the power of all units selected for synchronization then click the [Urge
Sync] button to synchronize.
Note 2: With synchronization disabled, the message "Synchronization disabled" may
appear twice when installing a license. This does not affect installation of a license.
[Urge Sync] button: Does immediate synchronization. You are asked, "Chart data in
other units will be overwritten by this unit. Do you wish to continue?" Click the [OK]
button to synchronize. If synchronization is not successful, restart applicable units and
try again.
[Reset Status] button: Reset synchronization status to recover from synchronization
status conflict. You are asked, "Do you want to reset sync status? This unit may be
synchronized from the other unit." Click the [OK] button to reset.
3.22.3
Manual updates and synchronization

If you are synchronizing multiple FMD-3xx0 units while manual updating is being done
on one of the units, the message File not found may appear, meaning the manual
update data was deleted. if this occurs, follow the procedure below to synchronize the
FMD-3xx0 units. The procedure uses ECD001 and ECD002 as an example.
1. At the ECD001, get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click [System] and
[Sync Config] on the InstantAccess bar.
2. Add ECD002 to [Grouped with This Unit] then click the [Save] button.
3. Reset the power on the ECD001 and ECD002.
4. At the ECD001, get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [System] and
[Sync Status] buttons on InstantAccess bar to show the [Sync Status] dialog box.
5. Click the [Urge Sync] button to synchronize charts between ECD001 and
ECD002.
6. To confirm synchronization, do as follows:
1) At the ECD001, get into the Voyage navigation mode then click the Manual
Update button on the Instant Access bar.
2) Click the [Planning] tab followed by the [Add] button.
3) Insert an object at the ECD001.
4) At the ECD002, move the cursor or change the chart scale. Confirm that the
chart is updated.
3.23
How to Reconvert All SENC Charts

If you unintentionally installed outdated SENC charts, you can reconvert those charts
to the latest SENC charts. Get into the Chart maintenance mode, click the [System]
and [Reconvert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to reconvert all your SENC charts.
Note: All manual updates are removed in the reconversion.
3-31
3-32
4.
HOW TO CONTROL CHART

OBJECTS
This chapter provides the information necessary for controlling chart features.
4.1
How to Browse Your Charts

You can view your charts using different positions and different scales. The basic tools
for browsing charts are the RANGE key, chart offcenter, and scroll.
RANGE - and RANGE + change the chart scale. (The scrollwheel also can change
the chart scale. Spin to change.) If true motion reset is active, ZOOM IN and ZOOM
OUT keep the relative position of your ship with respect to the display. If true motion
reset is off, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position pointed by the cursor
with respect to the display. The system automatically chooses next larger or smaller
scale. If a chart with larger compilation scale is available at your current viewing position, the message "Larger Scale ENC Available" appears.
The own ship position can be easily relocated to the screen center in the Navigation
voyage and Navigation planning modes. Further, in the Navigation voyage mode, the
own ship position can be put at the cursor position.
To move the own ship mark to the screen center, put the cursor in the chart area
and right click [Ship on center]. To move the own ship mark to a location, right-click
the position on the chart where to put the own ship mark then right click [Ship off center].
([Ship off center] is not available in the Voyage planning mode.)
To scroll your chart, simply drag and drop.
4.2
How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects

The [Chart Display] menu has several pages of chart features that you may show or
hide as appropriate. To display this menu, click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP]
menu on the InstantAccess bar.
4.2.1
How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour
You can set values for Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Deep Contour, on the [Chart Alert] dialog box (sequence: [DISP], [SET], [Chart Alert]). Colors
used for depth presentation on the electronic chart are controlled by setting values for
Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Deep Contour. Soundings on the
electronic chart, which are equal to or less than the value of Safety Depth, are highlighted. See the illustrations on the next page for multi-color presentation and two-color presentation. Selection of multi- and two-color presentations can be done by
selecting from the list box of "Depths" on the [Chart] page of [Basic Setting] menu.
Note: The shallow contour cannot be set higher than the safety contour.
4-1
4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS
MULTI-COLOR presentation
Chart zero
Shallow contour
Safety contour (input value)
Safety contour (exisiting in ENC)
Deep contour
Non-navigable area
Navigable area
In the multi-color presentation four colors are used for depths. If the value entered as
the safety contour does not exist in the electronic chart, the system automatically selects the next available deeper depth contour as the safety contour. For example, the
input value is 8 m, but there is no 8 m depth contour in the electronic chart. Then, the
system automatically selects the next available deeper depth contour (10 m) as the
safety contour. The depth contour value of 10 m is used as the safety contour in the
electronic chart.
The shallow contour shows visual color change inside an unsafe water area. An unsafe water area is all areas shallower than the "safety contour". Set the value for the
shallow contour less than the value of the safety contour.
TWO-COLOR presentation
Chart zero
Shallow contour
Safety contour (input value)
Safety contour (exisiting in ENC)
Deep contour
Non-navigable area
Navigable area
In the two-color presentation, unsafe water is shown in blue and safe water is shown
in white. The safety contour is used to qualify unsafe water (depth shallower than safety contour) and safe water (depths deeper than safety contour).
If the value entered as the safety contour does not exist in the electronic chart, the system automatically selects the next deeper available depth contour as the safety contour, the same as with the multi-color presentation.
4-2
4.2.2
Basic Setting menu

To display this menu, click [DISP], [SET] and [Basic Setting] on the InstantAccess bar.
Symbols: Select how to display chart symbols. The options are [Simplified] and [Paper Chart]. Simplified: The shape of symbols is of modern design and the sea mark
symbols are filled in a color. Paper Chart: The shape of symbols imitates traditional
symbols used in paper charts.
Depths: Set how to display different depth zones on the chart display.
Boundaries: Set how to display boundaries of some chart features. The options are
[Plain] and [Symbolized]. Plain: The line styles are limited to plain solid and dashed
lines. Symbolized: Some of the line styles use symbols to highlight the purpose of a
line.
Paper Chart: The shape of symbols imitates traditional symbols used in paper charts.
Depths: Set how to display different depth zones on the chart display. The choices are
[Two Color] or [Multi Color]. Two Color uses only two colors, deeper than safety contour
and shallower than safety contour. Multi Color uses four different colors for contours:
(1) Deeper than user-chosen deep contour, (2) Between deep contour and user-chosen
safety contour, (3) Between safety contour and user-chosen shallow water contour, and
(4) Between shallow water contour and coastline.
Light Sectors: Set how to display light sectors. The options are [Limited] and[ Full].
Limited: The length of a light sector is fixed at 25 mm independently of the displayed
scale. Full: The length of a light sector represents its nominal range as defined by the
chart producer.
Light Popup: Show or hide light sectors information. [ON] provides light sector information (including length of arc of visibility) when the cursor is put on a light or light sector.
Light sector center
Light house info
Shallow Pattern: Set how to display shallow water area. The options are: [None] and
[Diamond]. None: Shallow water areas are not shown. Diamond: Provided to distinguish
shallow water at night.
4-3
Shallow Hazard: Show or hide the shallow hazard symbols (
).
TM Reset: In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion
reset borderline (set here), and then it jumps back to an opposite position on screen
based on its course. Set the limit for TM reset (in percentage). For example, 80 resets the position when the own ship marker is at a location which is 80% of the range.
4.2.3
Chart Display menu

To access this menu and its pages, click [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] on the
InstantAccess bar then open the [Standard], [Other] or [AIO] page as appropriate.
The [Standard] page contains chart features defined by IMO that comprise a standard
display. You can recall the standard display at any time in a single action; click the
[STD DISP] button on the Status bar to get the standard display.
The [Other] page contains chart features for which you can control visibility and that
are not part of IMO-defined standard display.
The [AIO] page controls what to display on the Admiralty Information Overlay.
AIO
Note: To use the Info request feature, which provides information for cursor-chosen
chart feature, the associated chart feature must be turned on from the [Standard],
[Other] or [AIO] page.
4-4
4.2.4
Display base
A subset of chart features is called the display base. As required by IMO, these features cannot be made invisible. To get the display base, uncheck all items on the
[Standard] and [Other] pages in the [Chart Display] menu.
The display base consists of the following chart features:
Coastline (high water)
Own ship's safety contour, which is chosen by the user
Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour that
lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour
Indication of isolated dangers that lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges, overhead wires, etc., and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation.
Traffic routine systems
Scale, range, orientation and display mode
Units of depth and height
4.3
How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features

Control of symbols and features is divided into five pages in the [Symbol Display]
menu, which you can access by clicking the [DISP], [SET] and [Symb DISP] buttons
on the InstantAccess bar.
[General] page: Controls own ship and target related items.
[Tracking] page: Controls past tracks and some other features.
[Route] page: Controls planned and monitored route.
[Mariner] page: Controls user charts.
[Targets] page: Controls TT and AIS targets.
The user can define settings for chart details that are displayed over the chart area.
4.3.1
General page
Ship, AIS Outlines

Ship Outlines: Select OFF or ON to show minimized or scaled symbol, respectively.
AIS Outlines: Select OFF or ON to show AIS targets in same size or scaled symbol,
respectively.
4-5
True outlines shown if: If the length or width of the own ship mark is greater than 6
mm, the own ship mark is shown with the true scale symbol. Select [Length] or [Width].
The right illustration in the figure below shows own ship mark and AIS targets with
scaled symbols. The left illustrations shows own ship mark and AIS targets with point
symbols. AIS targets are displayed as true scale symbol if the displayed chart scale is
larger than set with "Outlines" limit (length>7.5 mm) on the [General] page in the [Symbol Display] menu and your own ship are displayed as true symbol scale if the size of
the true scale symbol is larger than 6 mm on the chart display.
Velocity Vectors
Ship Vectors: Show or hide own ship vector.
Target Vectors: Show or hide target vectors.
Style: Select the vector style. The [std ECDIS] vector is a speed-referenced vector
symbol. [Conventional] is a simplified symbol.
Time Increments: Check to show ticks of velocity vector. This controls both own ship
and targets ticks. If ticks are too tightly spaced, they will be automatically removed
from the display, until spacing between ticks is sufficient to distinguish them separately. This depends on display scale and speed of vessel and target.
Path Predictor: Check to show the path predictor. The path predictor is a single
dashed line originating at the CCRP and drawn at a length to represent the distance
and path own ship will travel over the ground in the user-selected time interval for own
ship speed vector.
Radar Antenna: Check to mark position of radar antenna (with "x).
4-6
4.3.2
Tracking page
Own ship past tracks

CCRP: Check to plot own ships track with CCRP position as reference.
Primary: Check to plot own ship's track with position fed from sensor with highest priority.
Secondary: Check to plot own ship's track with position fed from sensor with 2nd
highest priority.
Pivot: Check to plot own ship's track with own ships pivot position as reference.
Style: Select time stamp position for past track (indicated by Tick or Point).
Length: Select length of past track.
Labels: Select label interval.
Events
Events marks are based on the [Voyage] log records.
User Events: Display event symbols on the chart. User events are recorded by clicking [Record], [Event Log] and [User Event] on the InstantAccess bar.
Auto Events: Display automatically entered event symbols, where the system has recorded an event based on conditions you have set.
Positions: Display the latitude and longitude of an event, recorded by clicking [Record], [Event Log] and [POSN Event] on the InstantAccess bar.
Note 1: A MOB event is visible always.
Note 2: You can choose the period of time to display events, from the [Show] list box.
[Newer than 12 hours], [Newer than 24 hours], [Newer than 1 week], [Newer than 2
weeks], [Newer than 1 month], [Newer than 3 months], or [All].
4-7
4.3.3
Route page
The [Route] page selects the route parts of the monitored and planned routes to show
on the ECDIS.
Channel Limit: The distance from
the centerline to one side of the nav
lane.
Safety Margin: The distance from
one side of the channel limit to the
safety margin distance.
Leg Mark: Indications of waypoint
no. and range and bearing to next
waypoint. (True: Reference to North;
Relative: Reference to heading)
Wheel Over Line: The location
where the ship turns toward new
course.
WPT1
124.8
0.8NM
Safety
margin
Channel
limit
Wheel over
line
WPT2
87.9
1.2NM
4.3.4
WPT3
Leg mark
Mariner page
User chart
Labels: Check to show labels on user charts.
Lines: Check to show lines on user charts.
Clearing Lines: Check to show clearing lines (for marking dangerous areas) on user
charts.
4-8
Tidals: Check to show tidal symbols and tidal data on user charts.
Areas: Check to show areas on the user charts.
Circles: Check to show circles on user charts.
Density: Set the degree of transparency for the user chart objects. Color fill for the
areas can be chosen as transparent from 0%, 25%, 50% or 75%. Select [0%] to show
only boundary lines.
NAVTEX: Check to put the Navtex symbol ( ) at the position of the ship from which
you have received a Navtex message. (Navtex receiver must be enabled during installation.)
4.3.5
Targets page
Color: Select color of target (TT and AIS, common) from the list box.
TT Size: Select symbol size for tracked targets, Standard or Small.
AIS ROT TAG Limit: Show target turning direction.
TT Label: Show or hide the TT label (target no.).
AIS Label: Show or hide the AIS label (ships name).
TT Pop-up INFO: Show or hide the TT pop-up, which is shown by right-clicking a TT.
AIS Pop-up INFO: Show or hide the AIS pop-up, which is shown by right-clicking an
AIS target.
TT(04)
COG: 235.0T
SOG: 6.1kn
CPA: 0.23NM
TCPA: -10:18
NAME VOYA...
COG: 324.0T
SOG: 8.1kn
CPA: 0.12NM
TCPA: -19:18
TT pop-up info AIS pop-up info
Past position
TT Points: Select the number of TT past position points to display.
AIS Points: Select the number of AIS past position points to display.
Style: Select style of presentation of target's past position.
4-9
4.4
Control of Predefined IMO Chart Display

Settings
There are three sets of predefined chart display settings that can be used to display
charts with certain chart features. The predefined chart display settings are
IMO BASE
IMO STD(STANDARD)
IMO ALL
You can change the chart display setting in use with the [Chart database] button on
the Status bar.
[Chart database] button
4-10
5.
VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

Theoretically a chart can be coded for use on a computer as a vector chart. Vectorcoded charts are coded using a variety of techniques. One technique is called S57ed3
and it has been chosen by IMO as the only alternative for SOLAS compliant electronic
charts. If an S57ed3-coded chart is published by a government-authorized Hydrographic Office, then it is called "ENC". You can read more about ENC and related legal
issues in this chapter. Hereafter, all references to vector chart material are referred to
as "S57 charts" regardless of their source.
Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into
your S57 charts. This is called "manual updates". Also, manual updates are valid for
all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for charts published in different scales
from the same area.
5.1
Introduction to S57 Charts

An ENC chart is encrypted to prevent unauthorized use so the user needs a permit to
view the ENC. This permit could be entered manually from the Control Unit, loaded
from a USB flash memory.
Any new ENC must be loaded into the system. Some parts of the charts may be date
dependent, i.e., they are visible after a set date or they are visible only for a limited
period, etc. In the electronic chart system, you control all date-dependent objects with
Display date and Approved until dates. In the paper chart world, the Preliminary and
Temporary Notices to Mariners represent the date dependency described above for
S57 charts.
An important part of ENCs are the updates. Hydrographic Offices can issue two kinds
of updates:
1. Incremental updates, which are small additions to original base cells.
2. Reissues and new editions, which are complete replacements of previous base
cells and their updates.
All updates are date stamped and they may also contain date-dependent parts. You
control usage of updates in the electronic chart system from Display date and Approved until dates. Using Display date and Approved until dates, you can view your
charts correctly drawn on any date in the past or in the future.
Chart material is stored in media such as DVD ROM, CD ROMs and USB flash memory or electronically through from LAN (Local Area Network) in which it could have arrived in DVD ROMs, CD ROMs or USB memories. Such material can contain only
basic cells, cells and updates or only updates. The electronic chart system contains
as standard the software required to access a medium.
Each S57 chart may contain additional links to textual descriptions or pictures, besides
the chart itself. Typically additional textual descriptions and pictures contain important
sailing directions, tidal tables and other traditional paper chart features that do not
have any other method to be included into the S57 chart. This system copies these
textual descriptions and pictures into its SSD so the user may cursor-pick them for
viewing purposes.
5-1
5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS
5.1.1
5.1.2
Definitions of terms
Cell
A cell is a geographical area containing ENC data and it is the smallest division of ENC data. Each cell has a separate unique name. Hydrographic
Offices divide their responsibility area by the cells that they publish.
S57 chart
A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for

use with this system without any authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Office.
ENC
A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for

use with this system on the authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Offices. The ENC contains all the chart information necessary for
safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to
that contained in the paper chart (e.g., sailing directions) that may be considered necessary for safe navigation. The name of the coding standard for
ENC is S57ed3.
SENC
A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by the system for
appropriate use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and other data
added by the mariner. It is this database that is actually accessed by the
system for display and other navigational functions. The SENC may also
contain information from other sources.
Chart legend for S57 charts

The chart legend provides various data about the chart currently displayed. To find
info for current position, turn on TM reset, then click the [Chart INFO] button on the
InstantAccess bar followed by the [Chart Legend] button, in the Voyage planning
mode or Voyage navigation mode. To find info for a specific location, put the cursor
on the location then right-click and select [Chart Legend]. The figure below shows the
Chart Legend display for a specific location. Click the Close button to close the display.
This system is capable of showing more than one S57 chart at a time. This feature is
called the multi-chart display. If one S57 chart does not cover the whole display, the
system will open more S57 chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed
area are available. The chart legend shows information about S57 charts displayed on
the electronic chart display area.
Name: Name of chart.

Source: Source of chart.
Edition: Edition number of the chart.
Edition Date: Date the edition was published.
Update Number: Update number
5-2
Update Date: Date of update

Compilation Scale: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here.
Projection: Projection of current chart.
Horizontal Datum: Horizontal datum used with current chart.
Sounding Datum: Datum used to create sounding data.
Vertical Datum: Vertical datum used with current chart.
Units of Depth: Unit of depth used with current chart.
Units of Height: Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea
level.
Magnetic Variation: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a
change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly
direction.
Quality Indication: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by
the chart producer.
5.1.3
Permanent warnings for S57 charts

Permanent warnings help you keep the S57 charts up-to-date and these are shown at
the bottom of the screen. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects a condition that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date.
Message
Meaning, Remedy
Display date is not current
Display date is not the current date. Set

Display date and Approved until date to the
current date.
ENC: permits have expired
You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the chart or renew subscription for
the permit.
ENC: Product list not up to date
The product list is not up to date. Appears

30 days after the issued date of the chart.
Get the latest chart.
ENC: AIO product list not up to date
The AIO data is not up to date. Appears 30

days after the issued date of the AIO data.
Get the latest AIO data.
No connection to dongle
The dongle is not inserted or not recognized. Check that the dongle is inserted to
the EC-3000.
Not up to date (SSE 27): XXXXXXXX

(Chart name appears at location of Xs.)
At least one chart is not up to date. Load

updated material.
Permit expired (SSE 25): XXXXXXXX

(Chart name appears at location of Xs.)
the permit.
Note: The system can assist in keeping RENC-received charts up-to-date. For charts
that have been loaded from sources other than an RENC, the system is unable to
know the exact up-to-date situation.
5-3
5.2
Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of

the S57 Chart
5.2.1
Introduction
S57 charts contain date-dependent features. Updating in general, including reissues,
new editions and updates, creates date dependency. In addition to the obvious date
dependency, some features of the S57 charts create additional date dependency.
These features include "Date Start", "Date End", "Seasonal date start" and "Seasonal
date end". Hydrographic Offices use these features to publish Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners, as their paper chart equivalent updates are called. "Seasonal date start" and "Seasonal date end" are used for seasonal chart features such as
summer-only sea marks, seasonal yacht race areas, etc.
You can efficiently use chart viewing date dependency in order to use the valid data
for any given date applicable for your navigation or planning purposes. For example,
you can check for existence of changes and restrictions weeks before they became
valid. Date dependency is a part of the new electronic method to keep your chart upto-date and valid for your intended use. Normally you should set Display date and Approved until once per week to keep your chart up-to-date.
5.2.2
How to approve and highlight S57 chart updates

Before you approve updates, you can display (highlight) updates that are included into
S57 charts. Normally you have selected for automatic after the SENC conversion. In
this case, after all the SENC conversions have been finished, all updates are automatically highlighted and you can view and approve them after viewing. See the next section for how to set Display date and Approved until dates.
If you want to review updates after the initial approval of the updates do the following:
1. Use [Approved until] to set the begin date for the update highlight. See the next
section.
2. Use [Display date] to set the end date for the update highlight. See the next section.
3. Review the changes. Added features are highlighted with orange circles. Removed features are highlighted with orange slashes. Changed features are highlighted with both orange circles and slashes.
4. After reviewing, set [Approved until] and [Display date] back to the current system
date.
5-4
5.2.3
How to set Display date and Approved until dates

Click the [Chart INFO] and [Viewing Dates] button on the InstantAccess bar to show
the [Viewing Date] dialog box. Set desired dates then click the [Close] button.
5.2.4
About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard

How the issue date of updates changes the visibility of the changes
Study the example below to understand the behavior of updates relative to date.
Update 3
Update 2
Update 1
Base cell
Date
The figure above shows how updates are dependent Chart viewing dates set in Display/Approved date settings by user. Actions 1 to 4 areas as follows:
1. Base cell including three updates is converted into SENC. Display date is set as
current date of the system. Approve date has to be set to current date.
2. The date in which update 1 was issued. Display and Approved dates have to be
set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1.
3. The date in which update 2 was issued. Display and Approved dates have to be
set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1 and update 2.
4. The date in which update 3 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set
to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1, update 2 and update 3.
Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current
date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at
least once per week during your voyage.
Note 2: In order to display charts with correct updated situation during route planning,
always use planned date of each waypoint to check your plan.
5-5
5.3
Symbology Used in S57 Charts

You can familiarize yourself with the symbology used by browsing IHO Chart 1, which
is included in this system. Note that it behaves as any S57 chart and it follows your
selections. See section 4.2.
1. Click the [Chart INFO] and [Chart 1] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show to
the [ECDIS Chart 1] menu, shown below.
2. Click a chart feature to show detailed information about the feature. Click [Overview] to show a compilation of all features, shown below.
ECDIS Chart 1 menu
5.3.1
Presentation library used for S57 chart features

The system uses the official IHO presentation library to draw S57 charts.
When this manual was published the official presentation library was "pslb03_4.dai",
known as "Official IHO presentation library for system Ed 3 revision 1, Edition: 3.4".
5.4
How to Find Information about S57 Chart

Objects
The ability to cursor-pick an object to find additional information about the object is an
important function of the system. However, an unprocessed cursor pick, which does
not discriminate or interpret and merely dumps on the interface panel all the information available at that point on the display, will normally result in pages of unsorted and
barely intelligible attribute information.
5-6
1. Get into the Voyage navigation mode or Voyage planning mode then rIght-click an
object to show the context-sensitive menu. (The menu shown below appears in
the Voyage navigation mode.)
Ship off center
Object INFO
Chart Legend
Manual Update
New Divider
2. Click [Object INFO] to show the [Select Object] dialog box.
3. Click the object for which you want to know its details then click the [OK] button.
Note: If another window is active, the preview window may be partially obscured
by that window. Move the window to display the entire preview.
4. To print the chart object information, click the [Print Text] button. Below is a sample chart object printout.
5-7
5.5
Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO)

The Admiralty Information Overlay includes all Admiralty Temporary and Preliminary
Notices to Mariners (T&P NMs) and provides additional navigationally significant information from UKHO's ENC validation programme. The AIO is displayed as a single
layer on top of the basic ENC and is available free of charge as part of the Admiralty
S57 Chart Service and within Admiralty Value Added Resellers' services.
The AIO has been developed to ensure mariners can simply view the information they
need - in addition to the standard chart - to navigate safely and compliantly. By clearly
showing where important Temporary or Preliminary changes may impact a voyage,
the Admiralty Information Overlay will give seafarers the same consistent picture of
the maritime environment on their charts as they have always had.
The AIO license is free of charge for AVCS license holders.
5.5.1
Installation
Installation is the same as that for the ENC chart. See section 3.2.
5.5.2
How to display the AIO

Click the [DISP], [AIO] and [ALL] buttons to show the AIO. To hide the AIO, click the
[DISP], [AIO] and [OFF] buttons.
The area(s) that contain temporary or preliminary changes are marked with a hatched
red rectangle.
5-8
5.5.3
Catalog of AIO cells

A catalog of AIO cells is maintained in the [Manage Charts] dialog box. To show this
box, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Manage Charts] button on
the InstantAccess bar. The AIO cell is GB800001.
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
5-9
5.5.4
How to find AIO chart object information

Do the following to find chart object information contained in the AIO.
1. Right click a red hatched area in the chart area, then select [Object INFO] to show
the [Select Object] dialog box.
2. Click [Preliminary Notice] in the dialog box to show the [Chart object] dialog box.
The [Chart object] dialog box shows the following information:

Cell (name)
Drawing type (Preliminary Notice, Temporary Notice)
Category (AIO)
The preview box provides a scaled-down image of the area selected. Click the image to enlarge it.
The [Attribute] window shows the attributes for the AIO area selected. To find information about an attribute, click it to show its information in the [Description] box.
Information: Description of area (for example, danger area).
Object name: Object name (number)
Pictorial representation: Associated diagram when applicable.
ENC affected: ENC affected by the NM
Textual description: Full text of the Notice to Mariners (NM) appears below [ENC
Affected].
To print the chart object information, click the [Print Text] button.
5-10
5.5.5
How to select the information to display

Select what type of notices to display as follows:
1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar.
2. Click the [AIO] tab.
3. Check or uncheck items as appropriate.

menu.
5-11
5-12
6.
RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS
6.1
ARCS Charts
Approximately 2,700 ARCS charts are available on 11 chart CD-ROMs, covering the
world's major trading routes and ports. Regionally based chart CD-ROMs RC1 to
RC10 contain standard BA navigation charts, while RC11 contains ocean charts at
scales of 1:3,500,000 and smaller. ARCS charts are facsimile copies of BA paper
charts, and as such share a common numbering system. New editions and new charts
for ARCS and BA paper charts are issued simultaneously. They are supplied on each
Weekly Update CD-ROM until incorporated into the chart CD-ROMs at the next issue.
Occasionally, it is necessary to issue new charts in advance of their intended date of
validity, for example a change in regulations commencing on a future date. In such
cases the current chart will co-exist with the new chart until the date of implementation,
the earlier chart having the suffix "X" after the chart number. The system will allow access to both charts for the period of overlap by issue of new chart permits.
Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into
your ARCS charts. In this system this is called Manual Updates. Manual updates are
valid for both ARCS and S57 charts so that you need to define them only once. Further, manual updates are valid for all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for
charts published in different scales from the same area.
6.1.1
Chart legend of ARCS chart

info for current position, turn on RM reset, then click the [Chart INFO] button on the
InstantAccess bar followed by the [Chart Legend] button, in the Voyage planing mode
or Voyage navigation mode. To find info for a specific location, put the cursor on the
location then right-click and select [Chart Legend]. Click the Close button to close the
display.
Chart Legend
Name: Name of the chart.

Title: Title of the chart.
Source: Source of the chart.
Edition Date: Date when the chart was issued.
Update Date: Issue date of Update CD-ROM used to update the system
Latest NM: Date of the latest Notice to Mariners included in the chart.
6-1
6. RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS

WGS 84 Shift: Datum shift between local datum and WGS-84 datum is known (=Defined), unknown, operator defined (=Undefined) or shift is known only some parts of
chart (=Partially defined).
Height Datum: Vertical datum for objects located above sea.
level.
[T&P Notice], [Details] and [Warnings] buttons: See the descriptions below.
T&P notice
T&P Notices are also known as Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners and
they provide chart information that does not warrant permanent chart correction. To
show the T&P Notices, click the [T&P Notice] button on the [Chart Legend] dialog box.
Details
Click the [Details] button on the [Chart Legend] dialog box to show detailed information
about current chart.
Panels: Selects desired inset (Panel) from the combo box. This works in conjunction
with [Notes].
Notes: Select desired Notes from drop-down list then click the [Show Notes] button to
display the Notes.
6-2
Warnings
There could be warnings not included in Notices to Mariners. British Admiralty may release textual warnings for any chart and they are available here. Click the [Warnings]
button to display the [Warnings] window.
How to set preference for inset (panel)

If there are the different insets with the same position, the operator can select preferred inset, which displays your ship's position.
1. In the Voyage navigation mode

or the Voyage planning mode,
put the cursor at the desired location in the chart area, then
right click to select [Chart Legend] to show the [Chart Legend]
dialog box. If the own ship mark
is at the screen center, the Chart Legend dialog box may be displayed by clicking
[Chart INFO] and [Chart Legend] on the InstantAccess bar.
2. Click the [Details] button.
3. Select desired inset from the [Panels] drop-down list.
6-3
How to display notes of ARCS chart

The operator can select a desired item from the combo box in the [ARCS Details] dialog box in order to view notes for that item. Select an item on the [Notes] combo box
then click the [Show Notes] button to show the notes for the selected item.
Source Data Diagram (SDD)

A Source Data Diagram (SDD) consists of two parts: a graphic showing the areas covered by each type of source material from which the chart was compiled, and a tabulation, keyed to a graphic, giving details of source dates and scales. The layout of the
graphic corresponds to the layout of the chart, and the borders of the diagram equate
to the limits of the chart panels. You can show the SDD by selecting [Source] from the
[Notes] drop-down list and clicking the [Show Notes] button.
6-4
6.2
Datum and ARCS Charts

The difference between ARCS chart local datum and WGS 84 datum is known as
WGS 84 shift. This difference is known and the system does the conversion automatically. If the WGS shift for a chart is defined, the amount of shift is indicated. If the WGS
shift is not defined, "Undefined" is displayed. For no WGS shift, the indication 0.00N,
0.00E appears.
To find the WGS shift of the current chart, in the Voyage navigation or Voyage planning mode. right click the desired area on the chart to show the [Chart Legend] dialog
box.
WGS 84 shift indication

(0.00N, 0.00E means no shift)
6.3
Permanent Warnings of ARCS

The system can help you to keep your ARCS charts up-to-date for the charts that you
have received from ARCS. Producers of ARCS charts store up-to-date status on an
ARCS Weekly Update CD-ROM (system files). This information is loaded into the ECDIS when you update, either by permits or by active group. Based on this information,
ARCS permanent messages are displayed to help you keep your ARCS charts up-todate.
Message
Meaning, Remedy
ARCS: permits have expired
the permit.
ARCS: Product list not up to date
The product list is not up to date. Update

the product list.
Dongle not inserted. Insert dongle.
6-5
6.4
ARCS Subscriptions
ARCS customers can subscribe to one of two service levels, ARCS Navigator or
ARCS Skipper.
Note: If you receive an ARCS chart permit on a floppy disk, copy the contents of the
disk to a USB flash memory and then install the permit files.
6.4.1
ARCS Navigator
ARCS Navigator operators receive a comprehensive weekly updating service on a
CD-ROM that mirrors the Admiralty Notices to Mariners (NMs) used to correct Admiralty paper charts. The update information is cumulative, ensuring that only the most
recent Update CD-ROM is necessary. ARCS Navigator license is valid for 12 months.
During this period, weekly updates will be delivered on Weekly Update CD-ROMs.
ARCS Navigator is intended for SOLAS class operators who require that their charts
are up-to-date.
Content of ARCS Navigator pack:
One (1) or more Chart CD-ROMs (RC1-RC11) containing ARCS charts
One (1) Update CD-ROM containing the latest ARCS chart corrections
6.4.2
ARCS license information

Licensee information, which is transferred between participants, is as shown below.
Manufacturer
Dongle+User permit+PIN (Personal Identification No.)
Chart Permit+Chart CD+Update CD
User
Chart
agent
User Permit+PIN+List of Charts
6-6
7.
C-MAP CHARTS
The descriptions in this chapter apply to the CM-93/3 charts. (This system does not
support CM-93/2 charts.)
7.1
C-MAP Cartographic Service

Your chart system has the capability of using and displaying the latest C-MAP worldwide vector chart database. These charts are fully compliant with the latest IHO S-57
3.1 specifications.
In order to prepare the system for use with the C-MAP database, there are a number
of things that must be done.
7.2
How to Register the System at C-MAP Norway

Your system has the capability to use the C-MAP database. To do so an Aladdin eToken (supplied by C-MAP) must be connected to the system. The eToken provides the
system with a unique System ID that enables C-MAP to issue correct licenses. The
actual System ID can be found on the eToken itself, on the installation medium or on
a sticker placed on the equipment. This ID must be provided on all chart orders, by email ([email protected]).
7.3
How to Order Charts

A chart order may be sent together with system registration as described above. It is
essential that the required information be sent to C-MAP when ordering charts for a
system. C-MAP issues order forms specifying the information that is required, and
contains vital information that will allows C-MAP to monitor and maintain your licenses
throughout the lifetime of the system. Charts can be ordered by Zone, Area or Cell and
these can be seen on the C-MAP web site or by downloading the Chart Product catalog also available on the web site. Price quotations can be obtained via your chart
dealer or direct from your local C-MAP office. Once the license order has been prepared it should be emailed to [email protected].
7.4
How to Apply for Licenses

Once the order has been received at C-MAP, a license will be generated and transmitted back to the operator. This may be in the form of a single alphanumerical string
(16 characters), or in the form of a file called PASSWORD.USR. Once this license has
been received it should be input using the License Administrator software designed
and supplied by the chart manufacturer. There are two types of licenses, purchase
and subscription. Purchase licenses are valid indefinitely while subscription licenses
need to be renewed every 12 months from the start of the subscription. Failure to renew a subscription will result in the charts becoming unavailable.
7-1
7. C-MAP CHARTS
7.5
Troubleshooting
If you are having problems installing your software or charts please check the following before contacting C-MAP:
Check that the charts are available, with the chart management function.
Check that the license is correctly installed, with the license function
Contact Information: For information or help please call you're nearest C-MAP Office
(details can be found on the reverse side of the C-MAP chart CO box) or contact CMAP Norway. E-mail: [email protected]
7.6
Chart Subscription Services
7.6.1
C-MAP Dynamic Licensing (DL) service

The C-MAP DL service is an ENC service available on DVD or online, in C-MAP SENC
format. The C-MAP DL ensures immediate access to ENC licenses whenever they are
needed. ENC licenses available in seconds automatically via online C-MAP service
providers. Cost is controlled via pre-set budgets and spending limits, giving shipowners a true "pay-as-you-go" service. For further details about C-MAP DL, contact a CMAP provider.
Note 1: CM-ENC is available. If you change CD-ROM service to DVD service, you
need to also have a new license for the DVD service. Contact your chart agent or CMAP for details.
Note 2: PC and internet connection with e-mail are required. Further it is necessary to
access Jeppesen approx. once every two weeks.
7.6.2
What is ENC delivery?

ENCs can be distributed as ENC delivery or SENC delivery. Both deliveries can be
used in this system.
In ENC delivery, charts are distributed directly from source like PRIMAR, IC-ENC,
JHA, etc. They are delivered onboard in ENC format (using S-57 and S-63) then the
charts are installed into the system.
In SENC delivery, charts are converted from ENC to SENC before delivery to onboard
and then installed into the system. A CM-ENC delivery is SENC delivery.
Important notices
If you are using both services (ENC and SENC deliveries) having the same chart
name installed into the system through both deliveries, priority of displaying the
chart is in ENC delivery.
Chart updates for ENC delivery are only for charts of ENC delivery and chart updates for SENC delivery is only for charts of SENC delivery. You have to keep
charts up-to-date separately.
If you change from ENC delivery to SENC delivery, remove old charts from the system before installing charts from new delivery.
7-2
7. C-MAP CHARTS
7.7
Chart Display
7.7.1
Introduction
C-MAP charts are S57 charts displayed together with ENC (S57) and CM93/3 charts.
These charts have the priority order shown below.
1. CM- ENC
2. C-MAP 93/3 Prof and C-MAP 93/3 Prof+
If the same navigational purpose charts are available over an area, priority is as shown
above. Areas where ENC is not available CM-ENC charts are shown. Where C-MAP
Prof or CM93 Prof+ are available, CM 93/3 charts are displayed.
info for current position, click the [TM/CU Reset] button then click the [Chart INFO] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [Chart Legend] button. To find info for a
specific location, put the cursor on the location then right-click and select [Chart Legend]. Click the Close button to close the display.
This system is capable of showing more than one chart at a time. This feature is called
the multi-chart display. If one chart does not cover the whole display, the system will
open more chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The chart legend shows information about charts displayed on the electronic
chart display area.
Chart Legend
Name: Name of chart.

Source: Source of chart.
Edition: Edition number of the chart.
Edition Date: Date the edition was published.
Update Number: Update number
Update Date: Date of update
Vertical Datum: Vertical datum used with current chart.
level.
7-3
7. C-MAP CHARTS
Magnetic Variation: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a

change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly
direction.
Quality Indication: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by
the chart producer.
7.8
Permanent Warnings
Permanent warnings help you keep the C-MAP up-to-date and these are shown at the
bottom of the screen. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects a condition
that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date.
Message
CMAP: Database not up to date
Meaning, Remedy
Database is not up to date. Update the
data base.
CMAP: Dynamic license reporting overdue The time for the Next Report Date has
passed. This occurs once every 12 hours if
the condition continues. Get into the Chart
maintenance mode then click the [License]
button. Click the [C-MAP] tab then the [Order Update File] button.
7-4
CMAP: Dynamic licensing credit limit
You have exceeded the allotted credit limit.

Raise credit limit.
CMAP: No connection to eToken
eToken is not connected (inside the Processor Unit).
CMAP: permits have expired
the permit.
The dongle is not inserted or not recognized. Check that the dongle is inserted to
the EC-3000.
Permit expired (SSE 25): XXXXXXXX

(Chart name replaces Xs.)
the permit.
8.
CHART ALERTS
The ECDIS can detect areas where the depth is less than the safety contour or detect
an area where a specified condition exists. If prediction of own ship movement goes
across a safety contour or an area where a specified condition exists, the system does
the following:
Highlights in red alarms and chart objects specified as alarm or warning category
(planned route, navigation route).
Shows alarms and chart objects specified as alarm, warning or caution category in
the [Alert] box (route navigation).
Sounds an aural alarm for alarms and chart objects specified as alarm or warning
category (route navigation).
Chart object set for Alarm or Warning
category is highlighted in red.
For this function, the ECDIS utilizes the chart database (S57 charts) stored on the
SSD in SENC format. Note that the ECDIS calculates dangerous areas using the
largest scale chart available, which may not be the visualized chart.
You can choose objects that are included for calculation of danger area (for example,
restricted areas). A dialog box lists the various areas that activate danger warnings.
You can also define your own safe area by creating a user chart area. The system can
utilize these areas when calculating chart alerts.
The ECDIS can check the following for you:
Predicted movement area of own ship
Planned route with an easy to use locator function to find dangerous areas
The ECDIS will highlight the following for you
Dangerous areas inside predicted movement area of the own ship
Dangerous areas inside your monitored route
Dangerous areas inside your planned route
8-1
8. CHART ALERTS
8.1
Chart Alerts
Official S57 chart material contains depth contours that can be used for calculation of
chart alerts. A chart database also includes different types of objects that the operator
can use for chart alerts. The procedure for setting chart alerts is outlined below.
1. Choose suitable safety contour for your own ship. See the next section for how to
set the safety contour.
2. In the Voyage planning mode, define a new route or choose an existing one. Make
a chart alert calculation of the route if there are indications of danger areas in the
route. Modify your route if necessary and do the chart alert calculation again. To
modify an existing route see section 9.4.
3. Choose route as monitored route.
4. Set check area for your own ship.
The system is now ready for chart alert calculation of monitored route and estimated
own ship position.
8.1.1
How to set safety contour

Select safety contour suitable for the own ship.
1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show
the [Chart Alert] page.
2. Enter desired depth at [Safety Contour] then click the [Save] button.
A depth contour is created on the chart according to the safety contour value entered.
Note: If the chart does not contain chosen depth contour, the system will automatically
choose next deeper contour.
8-2
8. CHART ALERTS
8.1.2
How to select objects used in chart alerts

You can also include calculation areas that have to be noted when sailing (for example, restricted areas). To include these areas in chart alerts, do the following:
1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show
the [Chart Alert] page.
2. Click a circle to select the type of alert to receive for the given chart object. [Safety
Contours] is fixed to red.
Orange: Visual and aural alerts
Yellow: Visual alert only
In the example above, [Safety Contour] provides an [Alarm], [Areas to be Avoided]
provides a [Caution] and all other items are set for [Warning].
Note: C-MAP Pro+ charts may take several minutes to identify danger areas.
List of areas
There are the areas that the ECDIS detects and provides the audible alert and/or visual alert if estimated own ship position or planned or monitored route crosses the
area defined on the [Chart Alert] page. You can choose from the following areas:
Safety Contour
Areas to be Avoided
User Chart Danger
Traffic Separation Zone
Inshore Traffic Zone
Restricted Area
Caution Area
Offshore Production Area
Military Practice Area
Seaplane Landing Area
Submarine Transit Lane
Anchorage Area
Marine Farm/Aqua Culture

PSSA Area
Non-official ENC
No Vector Chart
Not Up-to-date
Permit Expired
UKC Limit
8-3
8. CHART ALERTS
8.2
How to Activate Own Ship Check

Calculation of own ship predicted movement area is
done using a check area about own ship position. Set
the check area as follows:
1. Select the [Check Area] page from the [Overlay/
NAV Tools] box.
Note: The [ON] button may not be shown depending on installation setting.
2. Set the ahead time or distance and ahead width, referring to the figure below. Also, set the "Around" figures: port, starboard, bow and stern check distance. The
reference point is the conning position (CCRP).
Width
Ahead
Distance
Bow
Stern
Port
Starboard
3. To select the objects to use in chart alerts, click the [Chart Alert] button and see
section 8.1.2.
4. To show or hide the chart alert area figure, click the [Chart Alert] button to show
[ON] or [OFF]. Any Alarm or Warning chart object in the chart area is highlighted
in red. Chart objects assigned Alarm status additionally give the aural alarm.
5. Click the [Apply] button to affect changes.
Note: When the button to the right of the [Chart Alert] button is not displayed, this
means that the own ship check is active always.
When an object having a Warning setting enters the Check Area, the object is highlighted in red and the aural alarm sounds.
8-4
8. CHART ALERTS
Object selected
for Chart Alert
Highlight (red)
8.3
Chart alert
area
Route Planning
The system will calculate chart alerts using user-defined channel limit for routes. Danger areas are shown highlighted if safety contour or user-chosen chart alert areas are
crossed by the planned route. For more information on route planning, see chapter 9.
Note: If your voyage is going to take a long time or you are planning it much earlier
than it is to take place, use the Display date and Approved until dates corresponding
to the dates you are going to sail.
8.3.1
Chart alerts for route planning

You can generate a list of chart alerts that cross by the planned route. This can be
done as follows:
1. Enter safety contour you want to use.
2. Plan a route; define waypoints and other necessary information. See chapter 9 for
route planning.
3. Choose dangerous objects to be monitored during route monitoring, on the [Alert
Parameters] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box, shown below.
a) Click the [PLAN], [Planning] and [Route] buttons.
b) Click the [Alert Parameters] tab.
c) Click the alert to process. Show an orange circle for visual and aural alerts, or
yellow circle for only the visual alert. Note that the safety contour is always
shown in red.
8-5
8. CHART ALERTS
Route Bank
4. Click the [Check Route] button to generate a list of chart alerts. The results appear
on the [Check Results] page.
Route Bank
The figure above shows the alerts to be monitored. If there are alerts included in
the planned route, check alerts leg by leg, or check alerts by using category of
alert.
8-6
8. CHART ALERTS
8.4
Route Monitoring
When the ship enters a check area, a visual alert (caution level) is generated. Neither objects or routes are highlighted.
When the ship enters a check area, a visual alert (alarm, warning level) is generated. Objects and routes in the area are highlighted.
A red box indicates an area having several highlighted objects.
The system has a route monitor that facilitates safe use of routes. You can check your
route plan for safe water and you can attach a user chart and Notes that you intend to
use together with a route plan. To show the [Route Information] dialog box, get into
the Voyage navigation mode, then click the [Route] and [Route Information] buttons.
Click the [Waypoints] tab.
8-7
8. CHART ALERTS
8-8
9.
ROUTES
9.1
Route Planning Overview

A route plan defines the navigation plan from starting point to the final destination. The
plan includes:
Route name
Name, latitude and longitude of each waypoint
Radius of turn circle at each waypoint
Safe channel limits
Chart alarm calculation based on channel limits against chart database and user chart
danger
UKC calculation
Deadband width, nominal deadband width used for operating modes with moderate
accuracy and economical sailing behavior
Minimum and maximum speed for each leg
The navigation method (rhumb line, great circle)
Fuel saving
ETD for the first waypoint
ETA for the last waypoint
Ship and environmental condition affecting the ship speed calculation
Name of the user chart to use during route navigation together with the planned route
Name of the Notes to use during route navigation together with this planned route, in
the user chart dialog box.
Using the above-mentioned data, the system calculates speed, course and length for
each leg, ETAs for each waypoint, fuel consumption and WOP. It also calculates safe
water areas based on user-defined channel limits. The calculated data is displayed in
tabular form, which can be printed as a documented route plan and also stored in a
file for later use.
Main functions of route planning are:
Define waypoints
Define turnings for each waypoint
Define channel limits for each leg (a leg is the line connected between two waypoints).
The channel limits are used to detect chart alerts when you are planning or monitoring
your route.
Define the speed for each leg
Calculation for ETD and ETA
Calculation for most economical sailing
Note 1: Limitation of displayed route

If you have small scale chart(s) on display having the whole eastern/western
(0-180E/0-180W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display, there
is a limitation to display a route. To avoid this, set chart center so that the whole eastern/western hemisphere is not on the display. A maximum of five routes can be edited
simultaneously.
Note 2: If a planned route's Safety Margin or Channel Limit contains excessive land
masses, the ECDIS may freeze during a route check.When this happens, reset the
ECDIS, then adjust the Channel Limit and Safety Margin settings in the Route Plan
dialog box's Waypoints so that land mass is not included in the route.
9-1
9. ROUTES
9.2
Main Menu for Route Planning

The main parameters for the route planning are:
Latitude and longitude of the waypoint
Channel limits to the waypoint
Turning radius of the waypoint
Maximum speed limit and planned speed for each leg
There are two phases for a route: Route Plan and Route Monitor. Route plan is used
for planning the route and route monitor is used to control a route for monitoring.
To complete route planning, do the following.
1. Create a new route or choose an existing one. See section 9.3.
2. Modify your route if necessary. See section 9.4.
3. Make chart alert (safe water) calculation. See section 9.3.5.
4. Optimize your route. See section 9.7.
9.3
How to Create a New Route

To make a complete route for a voyage, do the following:
1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to activate the Voyage planning mode.
2. On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Planning] button followed by the [Route] button to open the [Route Plan] dialog box.

4. Use the cursor to select a position for the first waypoint then push the left mouse
button. A waypoint mark appears on the position selected, and the latitude and
longitude of the position, etc. are entered into the [Route Plan] dialog box. After
entering a waypoint, edit Name, Steering mode, Radius, Channel limit, Plan SPD,
SPD Max and Margin as appropriate in the [Route Plan] dialog box, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or software keyboard.
To change the settings of items other than L/L position: Put the cursor on an
item to show up and down arrows then click required arrow.
To change L/L position: Put the cursor on the digit to change and roll the scrollwheel.
9-2
9. ROUTES
Note: A guide box that shows the range and bearing between waypoints as you
drag the cursor is available. You can show or hide the box with the [Guide Box]
button on the InstantAccess bar. Click the button to show its background color in
light-blue to display the guide box.
Guide box
5. Repeat step 4 to enter other waypoints.

6. After you enter the final waypoint, right-click the display area to show the contextsensitive menu then select [Finish].
7. Click the [Save] button. Enter a name (max. 63 characters) for the route, using the
keyboard on the Control Unit or software keyboard. Click the [OK] button to finish.
8. Use the [Alert Parameters] page to define the safety contour and other specified
conditions for checking the route. Click a "block" under a check item to select a
red circle or yellow circle. Also, input value for [Draught/m]. A parameter for
[Draught/m] can also be assigned globally to all legs from the context-sensitive
menu. See section 9.3.4 for how to use the [Alert Parameters] page.
9. Use the [Check Route] button on the [Alert Parameters] page to detect areas
where the depth is less than the safety contour or where specified conditions exist.
The results appear on the [Check Results] page. This system can examine chart
database against planned route to make a list of alerts where a route crosses a
safety contour or specified areas used in chart alerts.
10. Use the [User Chart] page to link, de-link a user chart(s) with the route.See
section 9.3.2.
11. Use the [Optimize] page to enter parameters for route optimization.See
section 9.3.3.
9-3
9. ROUTES
How to use the Undo feature

The Undo feature, available when creating a route and a user chart, can be accessed
from the [Undo] button on the InstantAccess bar. In route creation the feature is used
with waypoint and text input as follows:
Waypoint input: Delete last-entered waypoint.
Text input: Erase last-entered character or character string.
9.3.1
How to use the Waypoints page
The following fields and boxes can be found in the [Waypoints] page. Scroll the list
rightward to see hidden items.
WPT: Each waypoint has a number.
Name: You can name each waypoint.
Latitude: WPTs latitude coordinate is displayed in WGS-84 datum.
Longitude: WPTs longitude coordinate is
displayed in WGS-84 datum.
Leg/: Bearing of leg
Leg/NM: Length of leg (nm).
Str Mode: Define steering mode for each
leg - rhumb line or great circle. Click to select
[Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle].
RAD/NM: Define turning radius for each
waypoint. To change a radius, put the cursor
in this column to show up and down arrows.
Click the arrows to set the radius.
Ch Limit/m: Define channel limit for each

leg.
Plan SPD: Define planned speed to use with
a leg.
SPD Max: Define maximum speed to use
with a leg.
Margin/m: Define extension for channel limits to be checked against chart alerts.
PL 1/m, PL 2/m: One or two sets of parallel
lines, colored orange, can be drawn on a
route. Set the distance (in meters) to offset
the lines from the route, from -99999 to
99999. Parallel lines allow the navigator to
maintain a given distance away from hazards. See the illustration below.
WPT1
WPT2
Parallel Line for

Leg 1
Parallel Line for

Leg 2
9-4
WPT3
9. ROUTES
Note: You can select the route information data to display

on the [Waypoints] page with the context-sensitive menu.
Right click the Edit Columns to show the context-sensitive
menu. Check or uncheck items as appropriate then click the
[OK] button.
9.3.2
How to use the User Chart page

The [User Chart] page lets you link user charts to routes. To link a user chart, click the
box to the left of the user chart name in the [Stored User Chart] list to show a checkmark. Click the << button to copy that name to the [Linked User Chart] list. To de-link
a user chart, click the box to the left of the user chart name in the [Linked User Chart]
list then click the >> button to erase the name. The contents of each user chart are
shown in the [Contents] window.
Route Bank
Linked User Chart: List of user charts linked with selected route.
Stored User Chart: List of stored user charts.
<< button: Link a stored user chart. Check the chart in the [Stored user chart] list then
click this button. The user chart name is then copied to the [Linked User Chart] list.
>> button: Click to remove selected (checkmarked) user chart from the [Linked User
Chart] list.
Contents: Lists the objects saved to the user chart selected.
9-5
9. ROUTES
9.3.3
How to use the Optimize page

After all waypoints are inserted and you have made safe water calculation, you can
optimize your route, on the [Optimize] page. If not chosen, then optimization will be
done automatically with max. speed. If you want do optimization with a specific strategy, see section 9.7 for how to optimize a route.
Type: Select optimization strategy: maximum speed, time table, maximum profit, or
minimum cost.
Set ETD: Set date, time and waypoint to start from.
Parameters: Set the parameters for optimization, speed limit and income (max profit).
Edit Cost Parameters button: Enter fuel consumption figures. See section 21.3.
Set ETA: For the type [Time table], set the date and time that you want to arrive at the
waypoint selected.
Optimized Speed/ETA: The optimized speed for the date and time entered at [Set
ETA] appears here, after clicking the [Calculate] button.
Clear All: Clear all ETD dates entered at [Set ETD].
Calculate button: Click to calculate optimization.
9-6
9. ROUTES
9.3.4
How to use the Alert Parameters page

The [Alert Parameters] page sets the alert conditions to use when checking a route.
Put an orange circle for an item to highlight on the chart. ([Safety Contour] is fixed to
red.) If you do not require the highlight display for an item, put a yellow circle for that
object. The relevant alerts (red, orange, yellow) are shown in the [Check Results]
page.
You can select the safety contour and chart alerts used to check the safety of the
route. This allows you to check the safety with conditions different from those chosen
for system use. This is useful when making a route for different loading or sailing conditions.
Click each box to show one of the following:
- Orange circle (Item highlighted in red on chart)
- Yellow circle (No highlight)
Route Bank
Radio buttons, input boxes

Item
Description
Check type Check how to apply the alerts,
to every leg or individual leg.
(Only [Draught] can be applied
to every leg.)
Safety
Set the safety contour (in meContour
ters).
UKC Limit
Under keel clearance limit.
Date (UTC)
[Copy from
Default
Alert] button
[Copy to
Default
Alert] button
[Check
Route]
button
Leg
A chart may have date-dependent features. Enter the actual

data of embarkation to know
date-dependent features.
Copy the default alert settings
to this route.
Copy the alert settings for this
route as default alert settings.
Click to check route for safe
navigation. The results appear
on the [Check Results] page.
Leg number
Item
Draught/m
Alert items
Description
Ships draught
Safety Contour
Safety contour
Areas to be
Avoided
User Chart
Danger
Areas to be avoided
Traffic
Separation
Zone
Inshore Traffic
Zone
Traffic separation zone
Restricted Area
Restricted area
Caution Area
Caution area
Offshore production area
User chart danger area
Inshore traffic zone
9-7
9. ROUTES
Radio buttons, input boxes

Item
Description
Item
Military Practice
Area
Anchorage Area
MarineFarm
Aquaculture
PSSA Area
Non-official ENC
No Vector Chart
Not Up-to-date
Permit Expired
UKC Limit
Alert items
Description
Military practice area
Seaplane landing area
Submarine transit lane
Anchorage area
Marine farm aquaculture
Particularly Sensitive Sea Area
No official ENC data
No vector chart for area.
Chart not up to date.
Permit for chart has expired.
Under keel clearance limit
Context sensitive menus

A context-sensitive menu for setting the
Set ALL setting to all legs
draught is available on the [Alert ParameClear setting
ters] page. Right-click [Draught] to show the
menu. [Set ALL setting to all legs] applies
the draught value of [Check type: All Legs] to all legs. [Clear setting] restores default
settings for each leg.
9.3.5
How to use the Check Results page

The [Check Results] page allows you to make safe water calculation for your route.
Click the [Check Route] button to do the check. After the button is operated, the alert
type and latitude and longitude position of the alert appear for applicable legs on the
route.
Route Bank
Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current
date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at
least once per week during your voyage.
Note 2: A route check can take longer with C-Map or CM-ENC charts. Wait until the
completion of the check.
9-8
9. ROUTES
9.4
How to Modify an Existing Route
9.4.1
How to change waypoint position

To change position of a waypoint you have the following choices:
Enter latitude and longitude on the [Waypoints] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box.
Drag and drop waypoint using the left button.
How to drag and drop waypoint to new position

1. Put the cursor on the route waypoint to move then push the right button to show
the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Edit].
3. Press and hold down the left button while rolling the trackball to move the cursor
to a desired position. Release the button when the cursor is at the desired position. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then select
[Finish].
How to change latitude and longitude from the Waypoints page

1. Show the [Waypoints] page.
2. Put the cursor on the digit to change in the Latitude or Longitude field.
3. Enter position from the Control Units keyboard, or spin the scrollwheel.
9.4.2
How to change other waypoint data

Other data of a waypoint, such as name, steering mode, turning radius, min/max
speed, can be edited from the [Waypoints] page. Select the route to edit and open the
[Waypoints] page. Put the cursor on a desired field and spin the scrollwheel to change
data. (Push the left button to change steering mode.)
9.4.3
How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route

How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route from the electronic chart
area
1. Put the cursor on the current last waypoint of the route.
2. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Edit].
3. Put the cursor on the new location for the last waypoint then push the left button.
4. Right click, then click [Finish].
How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route from the Waypoints page
Open the [Waypoints] page, right-click [WPT] then select [Add WPT].
A waypoint is added at the end of the list. Edit the Latitude, Longitude, etc. as necessary.
9-9
9. ROUTES
9.4.4
How insert a waypoint

How to insert a waypoint between waypoints from the electronic chart area
1. Put the cursor anywhere on the route where you want to insert a waypoint.
2. Right-click to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Edit].
3. Put the cursor on the leg where you want to insert a waypoint.
4. Right click then click [Insert WPT].
5. Right click then click [Finish].
How to insert a waypoint from the Waypoints page

Open the [Waypoints] page then right-click the waypoint to process. Select [Insert after] or [Insert before] as appropriate. A waypoint is added after or before the waypoint
selected. Edit the Latitude, Longitude, etc. as necessary.
9.4.5
How to delete a waypoint

How to delete a waypoint from the electronic chart area
Put the cursor on the waypoint to delete. Push the right button to show the contextsensitive menu then select [Edit] followed by [Delete WPT].
How to delete a waypoint from the Waypoints page

Open the [Waypoints] page. Right-click the waypoint you want to delete then select
[Delete WPT].
9.4.6
Geometry check of route

When you add a new waypoint, modify a waypoint or change other waypoint data, the
message "Impossible turn at WPT" may appear (in red). It means that the geometry
of route makes it impossible for the ship to sail along a certain leg. Typically it is
enough if you do the following, on the [Waypoints] page.
Decrease the radius of turn of the waypoint or one of its neighbors.
Increase the radius of turn of the waypoint or one of its neighbors.
Change lat/lon position of the waypoint or one of its neighbors.
Note: If the above-mentioned remedies do not remove the "Impossible turn at WPT
"indication, try changing the planned speed.
9-10
9. ROUTES
9.5
SAR Operations
The SAR feature facilitates search and rescue and MOB operations.
To use the SAR feature, get into the Voyage planning mode then do the following:
1. Click the [Planning] and [Route] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the
[Route Plan] dialog box then click the [SAR] button.
2. Enter your start point. To enter current position, click

the [Ship Position] button. (The start point can also
be entered directly on the screen. Put the cursor on
the start point, right-click the chart to show the context-sensitive menu shown below then click [Set start point].)
3. Enter your ship's speed and turn radius, current UTC date and time.
4. At [Search Point], enter the estimated position of the object to search. (The search
point can also be entered directly on the screen. Put the cursor on the search
point, right-click the chart to show the context-sensitive menu shown at step 2
then click [Set search point].
5. Enter drift speed, drift direction, and the UTC date and time of the estimated position.
6. At the [Search Setting] window, choose and set the search type, referring to the
table on the next page.
9-11
9. ROUTES
Search
type
Options
Sample pattern
Expanding
square
WPT7
90.00
Start Leg
Length
WPT3
90
Direction: Set the direction to start

the search, Clockwise or Anticlockwise.
Search Pattern Heading: See the
right figure.
Start Leg Length: Enter the start leg
length.
Number of Legs: Enter the number
of legs to use.
Starting at the probable location of
the target, the search vessels expand
outward in concentric squares.
WPT6
WPT4
WPT8
90.00WPT2
90.00
Search
Pattern
Heading
WPT5
WPT1 Start Point
Parallel
tracks
Direction: Select the direction to

start the search, Clockwise or Anticlockwise.
right figure.
Start Leg Length: Enter the start leg
length.
Track Space: Enter the length of the
short legs in the route.
Number of Legs: Enter the number
of legs to use.
The parallel tracks pattern is usually
the first pattern used in undertaking a
search operation, since it assumes
that the search object is in the vicinity
of the track.
9-12
Search
Pattern
Heading
(North ref.)
S
Letart L
ng eg
th
Start Point
Track space
9. ROUTES
Search
type
Options
Sector
search
Sample pattern
Search Pattern Heading
WPT3
S
radearch
ius
WPT6
Sector #1
60
Sector #2
Direction: Select the direction to

start the search, Clockwise or Anticlockwise.
right figure.
Search Radius: Enter the search radius (in NM).
Number of Sectors: Enter the number of sectors to use.
The sector search is used when the
position of the body is known accurately and the search has to be done
over a small area. It is normally carried out in the area, where the casualty or the object has been sighted.
WPT9
WPT5
WPT2
WPT8
WPT4
Sector #3
WPT7
WPT1
Start Point
7. Click the [OK] button. The [Route Plan] dialog box appears and the system draws
the search and rescue route on the screen according to the search and rescue
settings.
8. To follow the route, click the [Exchange to MONIT] button.
Note: To monitor the route the following conditions must be met:
The route must have at least two waypoints.
The route must have no impossible turns.
The route must have been checked.
9. To save the route, click the [Save] button and enter a name for the route, using
the keyboard on the Control Unit or the software keyboard.
If necessary you can drag waypoints to new position, like with an ordinary route.
9-13
9. ROUTES
9.6
Route Bank
The route bank stores all the routes you have created. To show the route bank in the
Voyage planning mode, select [Route], [Route Bank] in [Route Plan] dialog box:
Route name
Date created or
modified
Route ID
Total no. of waypoints
Total distance of route
Position of start waypoint
Position of final waypoint
In the Voyage planning mode, the waypoints of a route can be inserted into the route
currently selected.
1. Show the dialog box shown above.
2. Select the route for which you want to copy its waypoint(s) in the active route. For
example, select Route2. Click the [Open] button.
Route1
Route2
3. At [Insert Position], select where you want to insert waypoints into the active route,
[Before] or [After] the waypoint selected in the next step. The [Reset] button restores the route to the original condition.
4. In the left-hand column set the cursor on the waypoint where to insert waypoints
from the inactive route.
5. At the right-hand column, select the waypoint(s) to add to the active route. A context-sensitive menu is available by right-clicking [WPT] in the inactive route. The
options available are [Select All], [Deselect All] and [Reverse] (reverse the order
of the waypoints in the inactive route).
9-14
9. ROUTES
6. Click the << button to insert the waypoint(s) from the inactive route to the active
route. In the example below, WPT1 of the inactive route is inserted at the end of
the active route, becoming its waypoint 5.
Route1
Route2
9.7
Route Optimization
9.7.1
Available route optimization strategies

After all waypoints are inserted, the route is optimized from the [Optimize] page in the
[Route Plan] dialog box. If no optimization strategy is chosen, the optimization is done
with "max. speed," defined in ship parameters. Optimization calculates all parameters
for route steering (course and distance between two waypoints, maneuvering start
point, WOP, etc.). There are four methods for optimization:
Max speed: This calculation uses the maximum speed defined in the ship parameters
and multiplies by all reduction factors (weather, ice, fouling, etc.) together with speed
limits given for each waypoint to generate ETA. ETA may be entered, however it is
calculated with user-entered ETD and speed limit.
Time table: Calculates the speed required in order to arrive at destination at required
ETA. Maximum speed is never exceeded. The user enters ETD and ETA to calculate
speed to use. If, the user-entered ETA is earlier than that found with the Max. Speed
calculation, the Max. speed-calculated ETA will be indicated below the Time Table
ETA calculation figure. The calculated speed is shown on the [Route Information] box
as [Plan Speed].
Max. profit: Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the
fixed cost of the ship and calculates the most profitable speed (highest profit per time
unit).
Min. cost: Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed
cost of the ship and calculates the speed that gives the minimum total cost. You need
to set Cost parameters beforehand to use this feature.
9-15
9. ROUTES
9.7.2
How to optimize a route

You can define Estimated Time of Departure (ETD), desired number of waypoints and
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) on the [Optimize] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box
to optimize your route.
1. Click the [Optimize] tab to open the [Optimize] page.
Route Bank
2. At [Type], click the drop-down list to select desired optimization strategy, referring
to section 9.7.1 Available route optimization strategies.
3. Do the following:
1) At the [Set ETD] window, enter starting WPT and
date and time of departure. For entry of the date,
the [Set date] window, shown right, appears.
Click the applicable date in the calendar if you
are going to depart during the current month, or
click the applicable arrow on the month/year button to select a different date. Click the [OK] button to save the ETD and close the window.
2) At the [Waypoints] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box, enter the maximum speed to use. For
the Type [MAX profit], enter [Income] value.
If necessary, click the [Edit Cost Parameters] button to enter fuel consumption
values.
9-16
9. ROUTES
3) For [Time table], the [Set ETA] window appears. Set the ETA to use for each
waypoint. To enter the Time and Date, click the [Date] window to show the [Set
date] window. Click the appropriate date. The date entered appears in the [Set
ETA] window.
4. Click the [Calculate] button to calculate optimal route. The [Optimized Speed/ETA]
dialog box shows the results of the calculation.
5. To apply the ETA results to the route, click the [Apply to Route] button.
6. To save all optimization settings, click the [Save] button.
Note that the ETA used in route reports is the first-entered ETA.
9.7.3
How to plan a speed profile

A speed profile is defined by general max. speed and optimization types. These values are given while planning a route. You can define speed limit and optimize type in
the [Optimize] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box and in the [Waypoints] page you
can give planned and max. speed for each leg. The table below demonstrate how different optimize types and speed limits influence speed.
WPT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
min. cost
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
6.0
6.0
4.8
4.8
6.0
4.8
max. profit
10.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
8.0
timetable
10.0
15.0
16.2
16.2
15.0
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.2
8.0
Max speed
10
15
20
20
15
20
20
20
17
8
9-17
9. ROUTES
9.8
How to Import Routes
9.8.1
How to import FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 route data

You can import a route created on another FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9.
1. Set the USB flash memory that contains the route data to import in the USB port
on the Control Unit.
2. Click the [
] button on the Status bar and select [Settings]. Click the [OK] button then select [Settings].
3. Click the [File Import] tab.
Import file: 201310011155939.zip

Select data to import:
Setting data
Route/User chart
Playback data
4. Click the [Select file to import] button to select the file to import.
5. Check the data to import, at [Select data to import].
6. Click the [Import] button.
9.8.2
How to import FEA-2x07 route data

Routes created at an ECDIS FEA-2x07 can easily be imported to this ECDIS. Copy
the routes to a folder in a USB flash memory then follow this procedure. Note that FEA2x05-created routes cannot be imported.
1. Set the USB flash memory to the
2. Activate the Voyage planning mode.
3. Click the [Manage Data], [Data Import] and [Route] buttons to show the
[SELECT DIRECTORY] dialog box.
4. Select the folder that contains the
route(s) to be imported then click the
[OK] button.
5. Check the route(s) to import then
click the [Import] button.
9-18
9. ROUTES
9.8.3
How to import csv, ASCII format route data

1. Set the USB flash memory to the
Route Data Management
2. Activate the Voyage planning

mode.
3. On the InstantAccess bar, click the
[Manage Data] and [Route] buttons
to show the [Route Data Management] dialog box.
4. At the drop-down list, select the import format. The choices are
[CSV Position]: waypoint position
data, CSV format
[ASCII WPT Name Position]: waypoint name, position order, ASCII
format
[ASCII Full]: all route data, ASCII format
[CSV Route Sheet]: route data, CSV format
[RTE Format]: route data, RTE format
Note: FEA-2x07 route data can also be imported through this procedure.
5. Click the [Import] button.
6. Select the file to import then click the [Open] button.
9.9
How to Export Route Data
9.9.1
How to export FMD-3xx0 route data

You can export route data to share the data with other FMD-3xx0 units.
1. Set a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Click the [
] button on the Status bar and select [Settings]. Click the [OK] button then select [Settings].
3. Click the [File Export] tab.
Playback data
4. At [Select data to export], check only [Route/User chart].

5. Click the [Export] button to save the data to the USB flash memory.
9-19
9. ROUTES
9.9.2
How to export route data in FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII format

1. Activate the Voyage planning mode then set a USB flash memory to the USB port
on the Control Unit.
2. On the InstantAccess bar, click the
[Route], [Route] and [Route Data
Management] buttons to show the
[Route Data Management] dialog
box.
3. At the drop-down list, select the import format. The choices are
[CSV Position]: waypoint position
data, CSV format
[ASCII WPT Name Position]: waypoint name, position order, ASCII
format
[ASCII Full]: all route data, ASCII
format
[CSV Route Sheet]: route data, CSV
format
[RTE Format]: route data, RTE format
4. Check the route(s) to export then click the [Export] button.
5. Click the [OK] button.
9.10
How to Delete Routes

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Planning navigation mode.
2. Click the [Manage Data] button on
the InstantAccess bar followed by
the [Route] button.
3. Put a checkmark in the check box to
the left of the route name.
4. Click the [Delete] button.
5. Click the [OK] button to delete the
route(s) selected.
9-20
9. ROUTES
9.11
Reports
This ECDIS generates reports for waypoints in the selected route. If connected to a
printer, reports can be printed by clicking the [Print Text] button. Text in reports can be
searched with the [Find] button.
To generate a report, do the following:
1. Click the [PLAN] button to go to the Voyage planning mode.
2. Click the [Report] button followed by the [Route] button. Click applicable report
button - [WPT], [Full WPT] or [Passage].
The following dialog box appears.
3. Select the appropriate route then click the [Open] button to show the selected report. See the next several pages for examples.
9-21
9. ROUTES
WPT report
The WPT report contains the following information for each waypoint in the route selected.
Route name
Date of report
Waypoint no.
Position in latitude and longitude
Length of waypoint
Distance remaining in route
Planned courses and steering methods (RL (RhumbLine), GC (GreatCircle))
Turning radius
Planned speeds
Estimated times of arrival (ETA)
ETD from waypoint 1 (start point)
ETA to waypoint x (final waypoint)
Total length of route
Estimated time required to run route using planned speeds and courses
9-22
9. ROUTES
Full WPT report

You can generate a full waypoint report for the route selected. The report includes the
following for each waypoint
Route name
Date of report
Waypoint no.
Planned radius
Channel limit
Planned speed
Planned course
ETA
Steering mode (rhumb line or great circle) to each waypoint
ROT
Margin for channel limit
Speed Max
Leg length
Time used
9-23
9. ROUTES
Passage plan report

The passage plan report generates waypoint information for each waypoint in the
route selected.
Route name
Date of report
Waypoint no.
Length
Cumulative length
Planned course
Steering method (RL or GC)
Name of waypoint
9-24
10. USER CHARTS

10.1
Introduction
User charts are overlays that the user creates to indicate safety-related objects and
areas. They can be displayed on both the radar overlay and the electronic chart.
These charts are intended for pointing out safety-related items like position of important navigation marks, safe area for the ship, etc. User charts areas can be used to activate alerts and indications based on user-defined danger symbols, lines and areas.
When route or own ship estimated position is going to cross a user chart symbol, line
or area that is defined as a dangerous one, an alert or indication is generated by the
system. See the chapter on chart alerts.
A user chart consists of various objects (points, lines, text, symbols, etc.). The maximum number of objects per user chart is 200. A route may have up to five user charts,
for a max. of 1,000 user chart objects per route.
The user chart is displayed on the radar overlay and its position and shape is based
on the ship's actual position. When own ship is moving in the area covered by the user
chart, the elements of the user chart are superimposed on the radar, with a maximum
of 80 of the nearest elements displayed.
10.1.1
Objects of user charts

Below is a description of the objects used in a user chart.
Tidal: There are two types of tidals, current and predicted.
Line: You can define four different types of lines. Lines can be used in chart alert
calculation and/or display on the radar:
Navigation lines: Displayed on both the radar overlay and the ECDIS display.
Navigation lines are reference lines for coast line.
Coast line: Displayed on both the ECDIS and radar overlays. Coastal line is usually a well-defined (by chart digitizer) multi-segment line showing the coastline.
The user is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart available over desired area in S57 format.
Depth contour: Displayed on both the ECDIS and radar overlay. Depth line
shows the chosen depth levels. The user is able to create this type of line in case
there is no suitable chart available over desired area in S57 format.
Route line: Displayed on both the radar overlay and the ECDIS display. Route
lines are zones for anchoring, traffic separation lines, etc.
Clearing line: A clearing line is used to define a line which a vessel can sail to avoid
navigational hazards. A clearing line can be of the NMT (Not More Than) or NLT
(Not Less Than) type. Displayed on the ECDIS display only.
Area: The operator can define closed areas with a polygon. If route or estimated
ship position is going to cross the area, the system generates a warning to the user.
These areas can be used to specify safe areas as defined by the master or by the
policy of the ship's owner. They are always available regardless of the type of chart
material used.
10-1
10. USER CHARTS
Circle: The operator can define an area with a circle, which can define a location to
avoid. If route or estimated ship position is going to cross the area, the system generates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to specify safe areas as defined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always available
regardless of the type of chart material used.
Labels: There are two types of labels: point and label. A "point" (i) is mainly used to
denote position of objects, such as buoys, light houses, fixed targets, wrecks, etc.
Points can be used in chart alert calculation. A "label" provides user-entered text to
show on the display.
10.2
How to Create a User Chart

You can create and modify a user chart in the Voyage planning mode.
To make a complete user chart, do the following:
1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to go to the Voyage planning mode.
2. Click the [Planning] and [User Chart] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the
user chart palette and the [User Chart] dialog box.
3. Click the [New] button on the [User Chart] dialog box to create a new chart
Tidal
Area
Line
Circle
Clearing
line
Label
4. Click the desired object (button) on the palette. The [Tidal], [Line], [Clearing line]
and [Label] buttons have multiple choices. Right-click the respective button to
show a context sensitive menu. The choices available for each object are shown
below.
Tidal: Current, Predicted
Line: Coast, Nav, Route, Depth
Clearing line: NMT (Not More Than), NLT (Not Less Than)
Label: Point, Label
5. Put the cursor on the location to insert the object then push the left button. See
the figure below for how to construct lines, areas and circles. For the "Tidal" ob-
10-2
10. USER CHARTS
ject, you can set Orientation, Strength and Time from the dialog box. With the "Label" object you can enter text and show that text on the screen.
Note: An object can also be put at the center of the screen. Do step 1-4 in this
procedure. On the [User Chart] dialog box, right click the box to the left of [Object]
then select [Add Object] from the pop-up menu.
(3) Click
(1) Click
(2) Click
(4) Right-click;
select Finish.
(2) Drag cursor;
double-click
to set.
(1) Click
1) Put cursor where to locate center of circle

then click.
2) Drag cursor to set radius; double-click to set.
How to create a circle
How to create a line
(1) Click
(2) Click
(4) Right-click;
select Finish.
(3) Click
How to create an area
6. When you insert an object, the following is done in the [User Chart] dialog box:
- Name of the object button appears in the [Object] window
- Latitude and longitude position of the object is displayed
- Total object count is updated
7. To enter a name for the object, click the appropriate location in the [Name] window
then use the software keyboard or the Control Unit to enter a name.
8. To show the object on the radar overlay, click the corresponding box in the [Radar]
window to show a checkmark in the box.
For the label, line, clearing line, area and circle, click the corresponding box in
the [Danger] window to use or don't use the object in chart alert calculation. Show
a red checkmark to use the object in chart alert calculation.
For an area, circle, line, you can add Notes as shown below. See the description
and figure below for a description of Notes.
1) Enter the text for the Notes in the [Description] box.
2) Click the box in the [Notes] window of the [User Chart] dialog box to show a
checkmark.
3) At the [Range of notes] input box, enter the distance from the line position at
which to display the Notes. This is effective for lines only.
Note: You cannot select both Danger and Notes for these symbols; select either Danger or Notes.
10-3
10. USER CHARTS
What are Notes?

"Notes" provides messages for the operator relative to your vessels position
in the Voyage navigation mode. The ECDIS compares Notes position and
when own ship is x miles from the Notes it generates a message.
Position of own ship
when Notes will
disappear
Your
vessels
track
Location of
Notes
Notes range
setting
Position of own ship
when Notes will be
activated
9. To continue entering the same symbol, click a new location on the screen and do
step 5. To enter a different symbol, do steps 4 and 5.
10. After you have entered all necessary objects, click the [Save] button.
Note: If the [Save] button is not shown, update the user chart to show the button.
11. The [Save as user chart window] appears. Enter a name for the user chart then
click the [Save] button.
The figure on the next page shows a user chart and the corresponding entries in the
[User Chart] dialog box.
10-4
10. USER CHARTS
The Line with the name "Coast" is a coastline.

The Circle has the Notes "Arrival No.1," which means the message "Arrival No.1" will
be shown on the screen when the ship is 1 NM from the position of the center of the
circle.
The Tidal marks line marks a tidal (current).
The Area has Radar and Danger checked. This means the area is shown on the radar
overlay and is used in chart alert calculation.
The Label with the name "Point No. 1" is a point label and is also shown on the radar
overlay.
The Label with the name "Wreck" is a common label and has Danger checked; it is
used in chart alert calculation.
CIRCLE
LI
NE
TIDAL
(C
oa
st
LABEL (Point)
LABEL (Label)
AREA
Note: The following combinations of object and display are not allowed:
Tidal object with Radar, Danger, Notes
Clearing line with Radar, Notes
Label with Notes
How to use the Undo feature

The Undo feature, available when creating a route and a user chart, can be accessed
from the [Undo] button on the InstantAccess bar, use double-click, or the context-sensitive menu. In user chart creation the feature is used with object and text input as follows:
Tidal, Circle, Current, Label: Delete last-entered object.
Area, Line: Erase last-entered point. For [Area], the area must have at least four
points. And for a [Line], there must be at least three points.
Text input: Erase last-entered character or character string.
10-5
10. USER CHARTS
10.3
How to Import a User Chart Created with ECDIS

FEA-2x07
User charts created at the ECDIS FEA-2x07 can easily be imported to this ECDIS.
Copy the user charts to a folder (see chapter 17 in the operators manual of the FEA2x07) in a USB flash memory then do as follows. Note that FEA-2x05 created user
charts cannot be imported.
1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Activate the Voyage planning mode.
3. Click the [Manage Data], [Data Import] and [User Chart] buttons to show the [SELECT DIRECTORY] dialog box.
USB Flash
04.04.2012 19:23
4. Select the folder that contains the user chart(s) to be imported then click the [OK]
button.
User Chart Data Import from legacy ECDIS
5. Check the user chart(s) to import then click the [Import] button.
10-6
10. USER CHARTS
10.4
How to Edit Objects on a User Chart

Do steps 1 and 2 in section 10.2 to show the [User Chart] dialog box then click the [Select] button. Select the user chart to edit then click the [Open] button. Follow the appropriate instructions below.
10.4.1
How to edit objects on the chart area

How to move objects
Drag and drop the object.
How to change corner points in lines and areas
Drag point to
new location;
double-click
Drag point to
new location;
double-click
How to change corner point on a line
How to change corner point in an area
How to insert a corner point on a line or area

Put the cursor on the location where to insert a corner point, right-click the display area
to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Insert].
10.4.2
How to edit objects from the User Chart dialog box

The latitude and longitude position, object name and description of an object can be
edited from the [User Chart] dialog box. Open the user chart as described in this section. Double click the item to edit and use the scrollwheel to edit.
10-7
10. USER CHARTS
10.5
How to Delete Objects from a User Chart

How to delete an object
Right-click the object to show the context-sensitive menu and select [Delete].
How to delete a point on a line

Put the cursor on the point to delete then right click to show the context-sensitive
menu. Select [Delete Point]. The line is redrawn.
10.6
How to Select the User Chart Objects to Display

User charts can be displayed on the electronic chart. Open the [Mariner] page in the
[Symbol Display] menu and check the user chart items to display. Choose the degree
of transparency for the objects with [Density].
Note: Alpha blending technology is used for transparency effects.
10-8
10. USER CHARTS
10.7
How to Delete User Charts

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Planning navigation
mode.
2. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [User
Chart] button.
UserChart1
UserChart2
3. Check the user chart(s) to delete.

4. Click the [Delete] button then click the [OK] button.
10.8
User Chart Reports

1. Click the [Plan] button to go to the Voyage planning mode.
2. Click the [Report] button followed by the [User Chart] button to show the [Select
User Chart] dialog box.
3. Select the appropriate user chart then click the [OK] button to show the selected
report. See the next several pages for examples of reports.
10-9
10. USER CHARTS
Full report
The full report contains information about each tidal, line, clearing line, label, area and
circle in the user chart selected. Check or uncheck the boxes at the top of the display
to select the report(s) to display.
Check the report(s) to display.
Tidal report
The tidal report provides
10-10
Position of the tidal

Type of tidal (current or predicted)
Speed and direction of the tidal
Time of the tidal
10. USER CHARTS
Line report
The Line report provides line name and latitude and longitude of each point on the line.
Clearing line
The Clearing line report shows the name and position of clearing lines entered on the
user chart selected.
10-11
10. USER CHARTS
Area report
The area report provides
Area no. and area name
The latitude and longitude position of
each point of the area
The description of the area

"On radar" is shown if the area is shown
on the radar overlay.
Circle report
The Circle report provides the position and radius of circles drawn on a user chart.
Label report
The Label report provides the latitude and longitude position of each label, the name
of each label. On radar is shown if the label is shown on the radar overlay.
10-12
11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

Route monitor is a means for permanent monitoring of the ship's behavior relative to
the monitored route. The [Route Information] box displays the data on the ship's position relative to the monitored route. The monitored route consists of the following information, displayed in the electronic chart area:
The route is displayed with red dots.
The limits of channels of each leg are displayed with solid red lines. These limits are
used to detect chart alerts when you are monitoring the route. See chapter 8 for how
set those limits.
Each leg has information about planned speed, shown in the Route box.
Each leg has information about planned course to steer.
Note: In order to display charts with correctly updated situation, always use current
date as Approved until and Display date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more
than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage. See
section 5.2 for how to set those dates.
11.1
How to Start Route Monitoring

Method 1: InstantAccess bar
In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] and [Select] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Click a route then click the [Open] button.
11-1
Method 2: Selection from the Route information box

Right-click the route name location in the [Route Information] box then select [Select
Route] to show the [Select Route] dialog box. Select a route then click the [Open] button.
TC:
MANUAL
Red box indicates

detailed information
available in larger scale.
Chart alert area

(alarm, warning)
Waypoint
11-2
About monitoring routes

When you choose a route for monitoring, the messages shown below appear, on the
[Select Route] dialog box or in a message window, when a route cannot be opened
for monitoring.
"Impossible turn at waypoint XX" (XX=waypoint no.). Geometry of the route makes
it impossible for the ship to accomplish a turn. Modify the route to make the turn
possible.
"Unchecked / Check condition differs". The route has not been checked. Check
the route, on the [Alert Parameters] page.
"Monitored in the NAVI mode". The route is currently being monitored.
"More than one WPT needed". The route has only one waypoint. Add more waypoints to the route.
"Route monitoring cannot be started. Please check ships position and conditions."
Click the [OK] button to close the message. Check ships position and conditions
of the route.
The route check which occurs after selecting a route can take longer with C-Map or
CM-ENC charts. Wait until the completion of the check.
If you have small-scale chart(s) on display that have the whole eastern/western (0180E/0-180W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display, there is
a limitation to display a route. To avoid this, set chart center so that the whole eastern/western hemisphere is not on the screen.
Route monitoring is temporarily stopped (route is greyed out) and an alert appears
when position, speed or heading is lost. To restore route monitoring, change the sensor system from System to Local (from the Sensor Information box), manually enter
the lost data, check [Set Drift], then switch to the DR mode.
Route data is sent to the radar (ex. FAR-2xx7 series) at the start of route monitoring
or when the ship transits a waypoint. If a route is not displayed on the radar, stop then
restart monitoring at the ECDIS. A route is erased from the radar when route monitoring is stopped or the ECDIS is restarted. To redisplay the route, stop then restart
monitoring at the ECDIS.
11.2
How to Stop Monitoring a Route (Manual, Automatic)

In the Voyage navigation mode, route monitoring can be stopped by clicking the
[Route] and [Unselect] buttons. When alert 691, 692 or 693 occurs, route monitoring
is automatically stopped. See route monitoring is stopped in the Troubleshooting table
in section 24.5 for details.
11.3
How to Select What Parts of a Route to Display

You can specify what parts
of the monitored route to
display. Click the [DISP],
[SET] and [Symbol DISP]
buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Click the [Route]
tab.
11-3
11.4
How to View Waypoint Information

Click the [Route] and [Route INFO] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the
[Route Information] dialog box. Click the [Waypoints] tab to show waypoint information.
* Scroll list horizontally to view below items.
No.
1
11-4
Item
To WPT, GO
button
Distance
Departure
Actual Average
SPD
Waypoint list
Description
The system chooses a next waypoint automatically. Check that the To waypoint is the desired one. The system will automatically advance to a next
waypoint when you pass the To waypoint. The default To WPT is WPT2. If
you desire a different one, select it here and the click the [GO] button.
Distance from current position to selected waypoint.
The time the route was selected for monitoring.
Actual speed
The waypoint list provides for each waypoint WPT no., name, latitude and
longitude position, ETA, plan speed, bearing and distance to leg, steering
mode (rhumb line or great circle), radius, channel limit, speed max, and
margin.
Check ETA win- Parameters for checking ETA. The arrow to the left of [Check ETA] collapse
dow
or display the [Waypoints] and [User Chart] tabs.
WPT, Distance
Select a WPT to find the distance to that waypoint from current position.
Plan
The planned ETA to the selected waypoint.
Actual
The actual ETA to the selected waypoint.
Off Plan
The time difference between planned ETA and calculated ETA to final
WPT, when different. The indication is prefixed with "-" if earlier than
planned; "+" if later than planned.
SPD CalculaEnter ETA (time and date) to find the speed to use to arrive by the ETA.
tion
Suggested SPD The system calculates suggested speed so that ETA to the WPT selected
would be same as planned ETA if type of optimization was "Time table".
Start Calculate Click to start calculation. The button label changes to [Stop Calculate].
Total WPTs
The total number of waypoints in the route.
Total Distance
The total distance of the route.
11.5
How to View User Chart Information

In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] and [Select] buttons on the
InstantAccess bar, select a route, click the [Open] button, then click the [User Chart]
tab.
The [Linked User Chart] list shows all the user charts linked with the monitored route
and their contents. Click a user chart name to show the contents of the chart in the
[Contents] window. Items with a checkmark are activated. For the [Check ETA] window, see the preceding page.
11.6
How to Change Monitored Route to Planned

Route
The monitored route can be transferred to the Voyage planning mode. This is useful
when you don't need the route for monitoring but want to edit it. To transfer the monitored route, click the [Route] and [Move to Plan] buttons on the InstantAccess bar.
Up to five planned routes can be shown on the display. If you try to display another
route, the route list appears. Deselect a route in order to transfer the monitored route
to the Voyage planning mode.
Note: When the monitored route is changed to a planned route, using the [Move to
Plan] function, the operating mode changes from the Navigation voyage mode to the
Voyage planning mode. If this operation is tried directly after the ECDIS starts and the
change does not occur, click the [NAVI] button on the Status bar then try again.
11-5
11.7
How to Use Instant Track to Return to or Deviate

from Monitored Route
The instant track feature provides a temporary track, consisting of four waypoints, to
return to or deviate from the monitored route. Correct data from navigation sensors is
essential to this function.
There are two instant track modes: [Safe Off Track] and [Back to Track].
[Safe Off Track]: This mode provides a track from the monitored route to a safe location to avoid collision or the like.
[Back to Track]. This mode creates a track to follow to return to the monitored route
when the vessel goes outside the channel limits.
The mode is automatically selected according to whether a monitored route is active
or not and the amount of off course. Further, if a monitored route is active while following the instant track route, the instant track mode can be changed manually.
Condition
Mode
Neither monitored route nor instant track route active.*

Safe Off Track
Both monitored route and instant track route are active.* Safe Off Track
The absolute value of off track is within the channel limit
setting.
Both monitored route and instant track route active.*
Back to Track
The absolute value of off track is outside the channel
limit setting.
Manual mode
switching
No
Yes
Yes
* An additional instant track route can be joined to the instant track route related to a
monitored route.
The parameters for the instant track (channel limit, turn radius, etc.) can be set on the
[Instant Track] page. See section 21.4.
11.7.1
Safe off track mode

If it becomes necessary to deviate from the
monitored route; for example, to avoid
collision, use the [Safe Off Track] mode to
create an instant track to a safe location.
Click here to show drop

down list to select mode.
1. With a monitored route active, click the

[Instant Track] button on the
InstantAccess bar to the show the
[Instant Track] dialog box. The message
"Please click a destination." appears on
When monitored route is active
the [Planning] page.
Note 1: If a monitored route is active, the [Back to Track] mode can also be selected.
Note 2: If a monitored instant track route is already active, an instant track mode
different from the currently active one can be selected.
2. Click a destination. The location is marked with an orange circle and arrow. The
message "Please click a point to decide an angle." appears in the [Instant Track]
dialog box. The location must be within 50 NM of current position.
11-6
3. Roll the trackball to select the angle of approach to the destination then click.
Current position
Monitored route
T2
WPT2
WPT2
Instant track
waypoints
(orange)
Destination
Click destination point . A circle and

arrow appear.
T3
T4
T1
Instant track
(orange)
Click a location to set desired angle of

approach. Instant track is drawn.
The system uses ship position, speed, angle of approach to create an instant track
route. The track is also checked for hazardous objects and the like against the chart
alerts.
During the calculation, the [Instant Track] dialog box window shows "Checking" in the
[Status] field. If, after completion of the calculation, the track is suitable, the message
"OK" replaces "Checking". The track and its waypoints, labeled [T1] - [T4], are colored
orange. The track is saved to the database as "Instant Track_XXX" (XXX=001 - 400).
If there is a problem with the track, an error message appears and the track is erased
from the screen. See section 11.7.3 for all the instant track messages and their meanings.
To return to the monitored route, click a waypoint on a leg of the route to create an
instant track route to use to return to the monitored route.
11.7.2
Back to track mode

When the vessel goes off track, the alert
"172 Off Track Alarm" appears in the [Alert]
box. To create an instant track to return to
the monitored route, use the [Back to Track]
mode as follows:
Click here to show drop

down list to select mode.
1. With a monitored route active, click the

[Instant Track] button on the
InstantAccess bar. The message
"Please click a WPT on Leg." appears
on the [Planning] page.
When monitored route is active
Note 1: If a monitored route is active,
the [Safe Off Track] mode can also be
selected.
Note 2: If a monitored instant track route is already active, an instant track mode
different from the currently active one can be selected. Further, a completely new
instant track route to the original monitored route can be created.
11-7
2. Click a leg or a waypoint on the monitored route. The location must be within
50 NM of current position.
Monitored route
Current position
T1
WPT2
WPT2
T2
T3

Click a leg on monitored route.
Instant track
(orange)
Point of return to route

Instant track
waypoints
(orange)
The system uses ship position, speed and final waypoint to create a track. The track
is also checked for hazardous objects and the like against the chart alerts.
During the calculation, the [Instant Track] dialog box shows "Checking" in the [Status]
field. If, after completion of the calculation, the track is suitable, the message "OK" replaces "Checking". The track and its waypoints, labeled [T1] - [T3], are colored orange. The track is saved to the database as "Instant Track_XXX" (XXX=001 - 400).
If there is a problem with the track, an error message appears and the track is erased
from the screen. See section 11.7.3 for all the instant track messages and their meanings.
11-8
11.7.3
Instant track messages

The table below shows all the instant track messages and their meanings.
Message
(1) Instant Track mode
"Back to Track"
"Safe Off Track"
(2) Check result, error message
"Could not create the Track."
"Too far destination from own
ship."
"Checking"
"OK"
"NG"
"Check error"
"Instant track is expired."
"Too many WPTs in monitoring
route."
(3) User operation message
"Please click a destination."
"Please click a point to decide an
angle."
"Please click a WPT on leg."
(4) Name of instant track route
InstantTrack_XXX
(XXX: 0001 - 400)
Meaning
Color
Back to track mode

Safe off track mode
White
White
The track could not be created.

Selected destination is 50 NM or more from current position.
Checking route.
Instant track checked and is suitable to follow.
Route check failed.
Route check error.
Route monitor timeout.
More than 190 waypoints are in the monitored
route. (Instant track cannot be created.)
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Green
Red
Red
Red
Red
Select a destination in the [Safe Off Track] mode.

Set the angle of approach in the [Safe Off Track]
mode.
Click a waypoint on a leg in the [Back to Track]
mode.
White
White
Name of monitored instant track route
White
White
11-9
11.7.4
Instant track details

You can see the location and alert type found in an instant track by clicking the [Details] button on the [Instant Track] dialog box.
Note: If the Status is not [OK], an alert (alarm or warning priority, depending on setting) appears in the Alert box.
11.7.5
How to monitor, stop monitoring an instant track route

How to monitor an instant track route
If the route check results is "OK", click the [Monitor] button on the [Planning] page in
the [Instant Track] dialog box to start monitoring the instant track route. Click the button before the time remaining counts to zero, otherwise the instant track will be cancelled, followed by the message "Instant track is expiration." After the [Monitor] button
is clicked the [Monitoring] page is opened. The [Monitoring] page shows the name of
the instant track and the instant track mode.
Click [Monitor]
button
The vessel follows the instant track route in the same method as a monitored route,
which is greyed out to indicate it is inactive. For the instant track route connected to a
monitored route, the previous instant track route is also greyed out to show it is inactive. Any additional instant track routes are erased.
11-10
To close the [Instant Track] dialog box, click the [Close] button. (The system continues
monitoring the instant track route.)
The following occurs when sensor data is lost while using the instant track function.
Monitoring condition
Result
Instant track route monitoring.
An instant track route under creation is deleted. No

route can be created.
The [Stop] button is pushed or the instant track route
is followed until its completion.
After the instant track route is completed, an error
message appears and the [Instant Track] dialog box
closes.
No monitored route
An instant track route under creation is deleted.
Monitored route active
After the route is completed, an error message appears

and the [Instant Track] dialog box closes.
How to stop monitoring an instant track route

Click the [Stop] button on the [Monitoring] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box to stop
monitoring the instant track route. The system returns to monitoring the monitored
route and the [Planning] page of the [Instant Track] dialog box opens.
For the [Back to Track] mode, the instant track mode is canceled when the vessel returns to the monitored route. The instant track is greyed out to show that it is inactive.
11-11
11.7.6
How to return to a monitored route when following an instant

track route (safe off track mode only)
Do the following to return to a monitored route while following an instant track route.
1. While monitoring an instant track route, click the [Original Route] dialog box and
its [Monitoring] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box to show the [Select Route]
dialog box. Check [Planned Route] to show a list of planned routes, or check [Instant Track] to show a list of instant track routes.
2. Select the route to use. The original route or the instant track route currently in use
cannot be selected.
3. Click the [Open] button to close the dialog box. The vessel starts following the
newly selected route.
When an instant track route is completed, the vessel starts following the route selected
at step 2.
11-12
11.7.7
Button label and equipment state

The label on the button at the position circled in the figure below changes according
to the state of the instant track.
Instant track
state
Creating
Monitoring
Return to original
route after back to
track mode
TCS state
Button label
OFF
Monitoring
ON
Execute (same function as Monitoring)
OFF
Stop
ON*
Stop
OFF
Reset (Instant track is deleted; another instant track

maybe created)
ON
Reset
* Button inoperative.
11-13
11.8
How to Share Route During Route Monitoring

With multiple FMD-3x00 units the backup setting works as follows:
Backup ON: When route monitoring begins from the master unit (determined at installation), the backup units (other FMD-3xx0) display the route and monitor it.
Backup OFF: When route monitoring begins from the master unit, the backup units
display route information in the Route Information box.
Follow the procedure below to set master and backup units.
1. On the menu, select [Monitoring] from the [Shared] menu to show the [Setting] dialog box.
ECD001
ECD002
2. Right click the equipment ID of the unit to set to show the pop-up menu. Select
[MASTER] or [BACKUP].
Only one unit can be a master unit. All other units are backup. One unit must be
as master unit.
Note 1: To turn off the sharing the feature for a unit, select [CLEAR] from the popup menu.
Note 2: To restore the original setting for a unit, click the Status column, then select [Reset].
3. Click the [Save] button to save settings, then click the [Close] button to finish.
11-14
12. NAVIGATION TOOLS

This chapter presents the various navigation tools available with the system. With the
exception of the divider, the tools listed below are in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] Box.
TT/AIS (see chapters 13 and 14)
Echo (see chapter 16)
Check area
Range rings
Predictor
Anchor watch
Under keel clearance
Divider
12.1
How to Access the Nav Tools in the Overlay/NAV

Tools Box
The [Overlay/NAV Tools] box is located at bottom-right position on the screen. Use the
page selection buttons to select desired page.
Page name
Minimize button
Page
selection
buttons
Overlay/NAV Tools box (Check Area page)
12-1
12.2
Parallel Index (PI) Lines

The parallel index lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship
and a coastline or a partner ship when navigating. There are six sets of PI lines (PIP6) and you can turn them on or off individually. Select the PI line to process with the
[Display] pull-down list then click the [ON] or [OFF] button as appropriate. One, two,
three or six lines can be shown - the actual number of lines shown depends on the line
interval.
The bearing can be set two ways: with the scrollwheel or dragging the PI line on the
screen.
12.2.1
How to activate, deactivate PI lines

Select the PI line set to activate or deactivate, with the [Display] drop-down list. Activate or deactivate the set selected with the [ON/OFF] button. A maximum of six sets
can be shown.
12.2.2
PI line bearing reference

PI line bearing reference may be relative to own ships heading (Relative) or referenced to North (True). Select [True] or [REL] as applicable.
12.2.3
Number of PI lines to display

The maximum number of PI lines to display may be selected from 1, 2, 3 or 6 lines as
below. The actual number of lines visible may be less depending on line interval. Select the number of lines to display at [Index Lines].
12.2.4
PI line mode
The PI line mode can be set for parallel (0-degrees) or perpendicular (90-degrees).
Select [Parallel] or [Perpendicular] at [Mode].
12-2
12.2.5
How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval

There are two ways to adjust PI line orientation and PI line interval: through the menu
and on the screen.
How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval from the menu

1. Set the orientation with [Bearing].
2. Set the line interval with [Distance].
How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval on the screen
Adjust orientation:
Put cursor on PI line
bisecting own ship
marker then drag cursor.
Adjust interval:
Put cursor on any PI
line other than the one
bisecting own ship
marker then drag cursor.
How to adjust orientation and interval, multiple PI lines
Adjust orientation:
Put cursor anywhere
on PI line (other than
own ship marker) then
drag cursor.
Adjust interval:
Put cursor on own
ship mark then
drag cursor.
How to adjust orientation and interval, single PI line
12.2.6
How to reset the PI lines

You can automatically return PI lines to default orientation, 0-degrees for parallel orientation, 90-degrees for perpendicular orientation. This is faster than doing it manually. Click the [Reset PI Lines] button to reset the parallel lines.
12-3
12.2.7
How to adjust PI line length

You can adjust the forward and backward lengths of a PI line when [Index Lines] is set
to 1.
1. Open the main menu and select [NAV Tools], [PI Lines] and [Truncate].
2. If not already displayed, click the ON/OFF button to display the PI line whose
length you want to adjust.
3. Click the value in [Forward] and [Backward] columns to adjust their lengths, referring to the illustration below.
PI line
Adjust the
forward length.
Adjust the
backward length.
12-4
12.3
Check Area
Check area sets the area ahead and around own ship for which to check for safe navigation. See section 8.2 for how to activate own ship check.
12.4
Ring
The range rings are the concentric set of rings on the ECDIS display. They provide an
estimation of the range to an object. You can turn them on or off from the [Ring] page.
Range
ring
The interval between rings changes with the chart scale, as shown in the table below.
Chart scale
1:1,000
1:2,000
1:5,000
1:10,000
1:20,000
1:50,000
Ring interval (nm)

0.025
0.05
0.10
0.25
0.5
1.0
Chart scale
1:100,000
1:200,000
1:500,000
1:1,000,000
1:2,000,000
Ring interval (nm)

2.0
4.0
8.0
16.0
20.0
12-5
12.5
Predictor
The predictor is a tool for estimating your ship's future positions and behavior. The onscreen predictor graphic consists of three pieces of your ship, drawn in true scale to
successive future positions. The position of the third symbol will be your approximate
position at the end of the time interval selected. The predictor is calculated using current speed and rate of turn. Docking speed components (transversal bow speed,
transversal stern speed, transversal center speed and rate of turn) are assumed to be
stable during the prediction period. The predictor can be used in every steering-state,
including manual steering.
To activate and set the Predictor, show the [Predictor] page. Turn the display on or off
with [Display]. Set the time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 seconds), with [Time].
Movement of
predictor
(three pieces)
The Predictor is updated every three seconds internally and the status of the predictor
is shown with [Status] as shown in the table below.
Indication
Status
OK
Speed is suitable (0.5 kn or higher).
Not Enough Speed
Speed is too low (under 0.5 kn) to use

the Predictor.
Not Available. Reset Filter May Restore.
Predictor is not being received.
Note: The ship speed must be 0.5 kn or higher. The predictor may not be displayed
or may not work properly if the speed is lower than that value.
12-6
12.6
Anchor Watch
The anchor watch feature checks to see if your ship is drifting when it should be at rest.
Alarm
setting
Conning position
: Alarm triggered
To set the anchor watch:

1. Select the [Anchor Watch] page.
2. Set the alarm radius (in nautical miles) with [Drag Circle].
3. Drop the anchor then click the [Drop Anchor] button.
4. Click the [Start Anchor Watch] button to start the anchor watch.
If your vessel travels from the CCRP more than the distance set here, the corresponding caution is generated.
To continue to use the anchor watch, click the [Clear Anchor] button to set the alarm
about your conning position. To stop the anchor watch, click the [Stop Anchor Watch]
button. The caution is not generated even if your ship drifts more than the distance set
with [Drag Circle].
If your ship drifts more than the anchor watch setting, the Alert 495 Anchor Watch
Setting appears.
12-7
12.7
UKC (Under Keel Clearance)
12.7.1
UKC overview
The UKC is the distance between the deepest point of the vessel's hull and the seabed. The UKC feature continuously checks ship's draught setting (UKC), and actual
depth. When the depth gets shallower than the UKC, the Alert 634 UKC Limit is generated. And if the current depth is less than the echo alarm setting the echo alarm also
is generated. Depth data is required to use the UKC function.
Sea surface
Draught
Under keel clearance (UKC)
Distance from keel

to seabed
Echo alarm setting

Seabed
Note: The sensor value shown is the depth to the transducer. Convert the value to the
distance to the keel.
12.7.2
How to set UKC

1. Select the [UKC] page from the [Overlay/NAV
Tools] box.
2. Use [Echo Alarm Limit] to set the distance for
the echo alarm. To activate the alarm, click the
[ON/OFF] button to show [ON].
3. At [UKC Limit], set ship's UKC limit. To activate
the UKC feature, click the [ON/OFF] button to
show [ON].
4. Use [Current Draught] to set your ship's draft.
Be sure to change the setting whenever the
draft changes.
5. Use [Type] to set how to show the seabed in the
[UKC] window, [V-shape] or [Concave]. See the figure on the next page.
6. Click the [Apply] button to affect the changes.
12-8
12.7.3
UKC window
The UKC window provides a visual graphic of the relationship between UKC, draft and
current depth. The window can be shown or hidden as desired and located anywhere
within the electronic chart area. To show the window, click [Show UKC] on the [UKC]
page. To move the window, drag and drop.
100.2m
100.2m
UKC Limit:
V-shape seabed presentation
UKC Limit:
Concave seabed presentation
12-9
12.8
Divider
The divider, available in the Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes with
rhumb line navigation, measures the range, bearing and TTG (Time To Go) between
points, like using a dividers on a paper chart.
Only one divider can be displayed. The divider is neither saved nor shared among
ECDIS units.
12.8.1
How to use the divider

Do as shown below to get the range, bearing and TTG between points.
Right click
starting point
Select New
Divider
Divider appears.
Ship off center

Object INFO
Chart Legend
Manual Update
New Divider
00.00
00.00
Drag circle to
next point
00:07
00:07
5.9NM
051.2
00:00
00:00
00.00
00.00
2.6NM
055.1
TTG between
points
Range and bearing
between points
You can also drag from an intermediate point to make another point.
2.75NM
358.6
2.75NM
087.9
2.75NM
087.9
Drag here
2.83NM
043.8
2.83NM
043.8

12-10
12.8.2
Usage characteristics, limitations

The distance between points is shown to the hundredths decimal place up to 100
NM and to the tenths decimal place thereafter.
A maximum of 50 points can be inserted, and the maximum measurable distance
between two points is 240.0 NM.
The TTG value is rounded to the nearest decimal place. Therefore, the displayed
total TTG may not equal the sum of all the TTGs.
The TTG is measurable to 99:00. If the TTG is higher, the TTG indication is
">99:00".
The ships speed must be at least 0.5 kn to calculate TTG.
The divider cannot be used in latitude higher than 85.
In the split screen display, the divider is viewable on both the main and sub views,
but is operable only on the main view.
12.8.3
How to deactivate and erase the divider

Get into the Voyage navigation or Voyage planning mode then
right-click the screen to show the context-sensitive menu. Select
[Clear Divider].
Ship off center

Object INFO
Chart Legend
Manual Update
Clear Divider
12-11
12-12
13. TRACKED TARGET (TT)

FUNCTIONS
With connection to a radar, the movement of a maximum of 100 radar-tracked targets
can be shown on the chart.
The data of received TT must have reference to ground. If the data does not meet that
criteria, target vectors are not shown and the indications COG and SOG in the TT info
data box show [missing].
13.1
How to Show, Hide TT

Do the following to show or hide the TT.
1. Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box.
2. Click the indication circled in the figure below to show [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate.
Note: The TT display, together with the AIS and radar displays, can also be hidden
from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then select [Clear RADAR Info].
Ship off center
Clear RADAR Info
Object INFO
Chart Legend
Manual Update
Clear Divider
13-1
13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS
13.2
TT Symbols and TT Attributes
13.2.1
TT symbols
The symbols used in this equipment comply with IEC 62288.
Symbol
Default color
Green
Name
Past position point
Description
Marks a past position of a TT.
Green
Target under
manual acquisition
A target acquired manually is initially indicated

with a dashed circle.
Green
Acquired
target
Red
Dangerous
target
Green
Reference
target
Red
Lost target
Thick solid circle with vector indicating steady

state tracking (within three minutes after acquisition).
Dangerous TT (thick solid circle). The ECDIS has
its own definition for dangerous target limits, thus
a radar may show a target as dangerous while
ECDIS shows it as safe and vice versa.
Used to calculate own ship's over-the-ground
speed (echo-referenced speed) for ground stabilization.
Mark a lost TT.
Green
Target selected
TT selected to show its data.
01
13.2.2
TT symbol color and size

The color and size of the TT symbol can be changed to your liking. Note that the color
of the AIS symbol is also changed.
1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to
show the [Symbol Display] menu.
2. Click the [Targets] tab.
3. Select the color among, green, blue, black, magenta and brown, with the [Color]
pull-down list.
4. Select the size from standard or small, with the [TT Size] pull-down list.
13-2
13.3
TT CPA/TCPA Alarm
A dangerous TT is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA and
TCPA limits set on the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools box]. A dangerous TT
is displayed as a blinking target symbol in red until you acknowledge the "TT CPA/TCPA" alert. Then the target symbol is displayed in red color.
When a TT whose CPA or TCPA is within the limits set here the buzzer sounds and
the Alert 526 "TT CPA/TCPA" appears in the [Alert] box.
13.3.1
How to set the CPA and TCPA limits, enable, disable the alarm
2. If the CPA and TCPA alarm is disabled,
click [CPA/TCPA] to activate it.
CPA/TCPA
alarm ON/OFF
3. Put the cursor on the CPA indication then

use the scrollwheel or left button to set the
CPA.
CPA setting
TCPA setting
4. Put the cursor on the TCPA indication

then use the scrollwheel or left button to
set the TCPA.
5. Click the [CPA/TCPA] alarm indication to
enable or disable the alarm. The alarm is
disabled when the CPA and TCPA indications are greyed out.
13.4
0.5NM 3min
AUTO ACT ALL
Lost TT Alarm
A lost TT is displayed on the ECDIS as a blinking target symbol in red. You can set
how the lost TT alarm sounds against lost targets as shown below.
13.4.1
How to enable, disable the lost TT alarm

1. Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV
Tools] box.
2. Put the cursor on the Lost TGT indication then push
the left button to display [OFF], [FILT], or [ALL].
OFF: Disable lost target alarm
FILT: Alarm sounds against TT meeting a specific
criteria.
ALL: Alarms sounds against all lost TT.
When a lost TT is within the limits set here the buzzer
sounds and the Alert 527 "TT Lost" appears in the [Alert]
box.
13-3
13.4.2
How to set the lost TT alarm filter

If you are in a congested area the lost TT alarm may sound against many TT. In this
case, you can prevent the alarm from sounding against TT that are under a certain
range and/or speed.
1. Right-click the setting of [Lost TGT] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV
Tools] box, select [Setting] and open the [Setting.2] page.
(The [Setting.2] page can also be opened from the menu (MENU[TT/
AIS][Setting.1][Setting.2].)
2. In the [TT Lost Target Filter] window, set the maximum range to track a target and
the minimum ship speed to track.
MAX Range: The maximum range at which to track a lost target. A TT not within
this range is not tracked.
MIN Ship Speed: A TT whose speed is slower than set here does not trigger the
lost target alarm.
3. Click the [ON/OFF] button to show ON or OFF as appropriate.
13.5
How to Set Vector Length and Vector Motion

Ground stabilization and sea stabilization
Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized in the True Motion mode. To
select speed over the ground or speed through the water data, open the [SPD] page
from the [System Sensor Settings] or [Local System Settings] menu. Select [Bottom]
for ground stabilization or [Water] for sea stabilization. The Vector mode indication
shows the stabilization mode in the true motion as [True-G] or [True-S]
Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea
using a compass heading and single-axis log water speed inputs in the true motion
mode. Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced
to the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems unsatisfactory, enter set and drift corrections.
True vector
In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships
at anchor remain stationary on the radar overlay with vector length zero. But in the
presence of wind and/or current, the vectors appear on fixed targets representing the
reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly
entered.
13-4
In) the true vector mode, there are two types of stabilization: ground stabilization
(True-G) and sea stabilization (True-S). The stabilization mode is automatically selected according to speed selection, as shown in the table below.
Speed selection
True vector mode
LOG(WT)
True-S
LOG(BT)
True-G
POSN
True-G
REF
True-G
MAN
True-S
MAN w/set & drift
True-G
Relative vector
Relative vectors on targets that are not moving over the ground such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own ship's ground
track. A target whose vector passes through own ship is on a collision course. (Dotted
lines in the figure are for explanation only.)
Buoy
Buoy
Target on
collision
course
Own ship
True vectors in
head-up mode
Target on
collision
course
Own ship
Relative vectors in
head-up mode
To set the vector, click the vector time and vector reference indications in the [TT/AIS]
page to set them.
Vector time
Vector
reference
13-5
13.6
How to Display TT Data
13.6.1
How to display target data for individual TT

By Control Unit
Put the cursor on a TT then push the TARGET DATA key.
By trackball
Click the target for which you want to show its data.
TT data
To erase TT data from a data box, click the appropriate close data button.
The basic TT data display shows the following information:
Target's number. The same number as the matching target on the radar. When a
target is erased the number will not be reused until the power is re-set or more than
100 targets are acquired.
Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship
True speed (SOG) and true course (COG) of the target
CPA and TCPA. A negative TCPA value means that you have already passed the
closest point and the TT is going away from own ship.
Bow Closest Range (BCR) and Bow Closest Time (BCT)
Title bar
TT No.
Bearing
Range
Course over ground
Speed over ground
CPA
TCPA
Bow crossing range
Bow crossing time
13-6
13.7
Displaying Past Positions of TT

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of
TT. A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the preset number is reached. If
a TT changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes course, its plotted
course will not be a straight line.
You can set the plot interval and the presentation mode on the [TT/AIS] page in the
[Overlay/NAV Tools] box, at the locations circled in the illustration below.
13.7.1
How to enable/disable the past position display, select past

position reference
Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. Click the indications circled in the figure below to set the plot interval (or disable the display) and the past position reference (true or relative).
Plot interval, past position
display ON/OFF
Past position
reference
13.7.2
Past position point attributes

You can define past position point attributes for TT by points and style.
1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to
show the [Symbol Display] menu.
2. Click the [Targets] tab.
3. At [TT Points], select the number of points to show.

4. At [Style], select the style for the past position points. The choices are [Points] and
[Points and Dots].
13-7
13.8
TT Source
The TT source can be either a radar antenna or the TTM sentence. Normally, select
the radar antenna chosen to display radar echoes as the TT source.
To automatically select the radar currently displaying radar echoes as the TT source,
check the [SYNC. ANT] box on the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box.

The TT source is either

antenna or TTM data
CCRP
button
With SYNC. ANT checked, the

antenna chosen to display radar
echoes is automatically selected
as the TT source.
TT source and usage characteristics

Antenna (RAS001 to RAS010) or other sensor (OTR001 to OTR010) whose SFID
(Service Flow ID) starts with [RA].
Antenna example: RAS001 is shown as [ANT_1], RAS002 is shown as [ANT_2].
Other sensor example: The SFID set at installation; for example, RA0201.
With [SYNC. ANT] checked, the antenna selected on the [Echo] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box is marked with an asterisk.
With [SYNC. ANT] checked, the checkmark is removed when a selection is made
the drop-down box.
SYNC. ANT is inoperative if no antenna is registered.
The reference position for the TTM sentence is the antenna position.
The [CCRP/ANT] button in the TT/AIS page of the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box selects
the reference position to use in the TTM sentence, either CCRP or antenna.
Note: When the radar picture from the FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0 series radar (IEC
623388 Ed. 2 compliant) is fed via LAN, there may be a difference between the radar
picture and the TT position. If this occurs, set the reference position as CCRP with the
[CCRP/ANT] button in the TT/AIS page of the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box.
13-8
14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS

14.1
Introduction
An AIS transponder can be connected to the ECDIS to display AIS targets received
from an AIS transponder. The ECDIS can store up to 2,000 AIS targets in its storage
buffer. When this buffer becomes full of AIS targets, Alert 533 AIS Target Capacity
100% is generated to alert you that the storage buffer is full. The storage buffer contains automatic dead reckoning for all AIS targets, which is based on reported Speed
Over Ground (SOG), Course Over Ground (COG), Rate Of Turn (ROT) and heading.
The storage buffer also contains calculation of range, bearing, CPA, TCPA, etc. The
CPA and TCPA limits set for dangerous targets are common for TT and AIS targets.
This radar can activate 500 AIS targets. The Alert 535 AIS Target Activate 100% appears when 500 AIS targets are activated.
The frequency for update of AIS transponder-sent data depends on speed and course
of tracked AIS target. The table below shows the IMO standardized reporting rates for
the AIS transponder. Based on the table below, the ECDIS defines which AIS targets
are in tracking or lost. When you acknowledge the lost target alert, the AIS symbol is
removed from the ECDIS display.
Type of Ship
Class A: Navigation status is anchor or not under

command or moored or aground, and SOG < 3 kn
Class A: Navigation status is anchor or not under
command or moored or aground, and SOG 3kn
Class A: 0kn SOG < 14kn
Class A: 14kn SOG 23kn
Class A: SOG > 23kn
Class B: CS SOG < 2kn
Class B: CS SOG 2kn
Class B: SO 0 kn SOG < 2kn
Class B: SO 2 kn SOG < 14kn
Class B: SO 14 kn SOG 23kn
Class B: SO SOG > 23kn
Class A and Class B: no SOG available
AIS SAR aircraft
AIS aid to navigation
AIS base station
AIS search and rescue transponder
IMO
nominal reporting
interval
3 min
Lost target
indication reporting
interval
10 min
10 s
50 s
10 s
6s
2s
3 min
30 s
3 min
30 s
15 s
5s
N/A
10 s
3 min
10 s
N/A
50 s
30 s
10 s
10 min
150 s
10 min
150 s
75 s
25 s
10 min
50 s
10 min
50 s
10 min
An AIS transponder "sees" all ships fitted with an AIS transponder belonging to either
Class A or Class B.
Additionally the AIS transponder receives messages other than messages from ships:
AIS Base station
AIS on airborne SAR craft
AIS on ATON (AIS aid to navigation)
14-1
There can be several hundreds or several thousands AIS targets, and of those only a
few will be significant for your ship. To remove unnecessary AIS targets from the ECDIS display, the feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is available. Initially any new
AIS target received by an AIS transponder is not-active (="sleeping"). Such non-active
targets are shown with a small triangle. The operator can pick any AIS target and
change it from non-active to active. Active AIS targets are shown with a large triangle
with speed vector, headline, rot indicator, etc. Further, the operator can pick active AIS
targets and change their status to non-active.
An indication of AIS target display capacity limit is given well before it is reached.
When 95% of the operator-set limit is reached for displayed AIS targets, the Alert 530
"AIS Target Display 95%" appears. When the operator-set limit is reached, the Alert
531 "AIS Target Display 100%" appears.
An indication of AIS target processing capacity limit is given well before it is reached.
The Alert 532 "AIS Target Capacity 95%" is given when 95 percent of 2,000 targets
are in the storage buffer and the Alert 533 "AIS Target Capacity 100%" is given when
2,000 targets or more are in the storage buffer. The system releases the AIS Alerts
"536 CPA/TCPA" and 537 "AIS Lost". Only active AIS targets generate alerts. The operator can enable or disable AIS target alerts as desired. The feature "active and
sleeping AIS targets" is very effective for focusing on only those AIS targets which
need supervision. The ECDIS further eases the task of the operator by automatically
changing non-active targets to active targets, if they meet the dangerous target limits
set by CPA and TCPA.
14.2
AIS Symbols
Then the AIS is turned on, AIS targets are marked with appropriate AIS symbol as below.
Symbol
Default
color
Green
Name
Green
AIS tracked target past

position point
Sleeping AIS target
Green
Activated AIS target
Green
Activated target, true

scale symbol
Red
Dangerous AIS target
ABC
14-2
Description
Marks a past position of an AIS target.
Denote sleeping AIS symbol. (Lines are
thinner than Active AIS symbol.)
Denote active AIS target, with vector.
Lines are thicker than sleeping AIS symbol. Vessel name is shown (default setting).
Active AIS target with symbol shown in
true scale.
Target's CPA and TCPA are within the

CPA and TCPA settings. Vector shown.
Symbol
Default
color
Green
No heading/COG target
Green
Heading-turn indicator
AIS symbols are shown in a broken lines

in the following cases:
No water or ground tracking speed of
your ship, or there is no speed data. All
AIS symbols are shown in broken lines.
No speed data from AIS target. The
symbol of the corresponding AIS target
is shown in broken lines. A target with
neither a reported heading nor COG is
oriented toward the top of the operational display area.
Shows target's direction of turning.
Green
AIS ATON
Aids to navigation
Green
Virtual AIS ATON
Denote virtual AIS
Green
SAR-AIRCRAFT
Green
AIS base station
Green
AIS SART
Green
AIS select symbol
Target selected to display its data.
Red
AIS lost symbol
X is superimposed on the AIS target symbol and is flashing.
Name
Description
ABC
ABC
Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is
switched off. When the AIS is again turned on, symbols are immediately displayed.
Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when the
heading is changed from the Head-up mode.
Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the Alert 380 "AIS COM Error" appears in the
[Alert] box. Check the AIS transponder.
Note 4: A target is declared a lost target if it is not detected in five consecutive reporting periods.
Note 5: The color of the AIS symbols can be changed. See section 13.2.2.
14-3
14.3
Voyage Data
Before you embark on a voyage, set your navigation status, ETA, destination, draught
and crew, on the [Voyage Data] page in the [NAV Status] menu. The data entered
here is reflected to the AIS transponder.
Note: [Persons], the total number of persons onboard, should be set at the AIS transponder. Some AIS transponders may not accept this input from the ECDIS.
1. Open the MENU then click both [NAV Status] in the [TT/AIS] menu and the [Voyage Data] tab.
2. Click the [Navigational Status] drop-down list then select your navigational status,
from the list below.
Underway using engine

At anchor
Not under command
Restricted maneuverability
Constrained by her draught
Moored
Aground
Engaged in fishing
Under way sailing
Reserved for high speed craft
Reserved for wing in ground
Reserved for future use (x3)
AIS-SART (active)
Not defined
3. Enter ship's draught (0.0 - 25.5 (m)) at [MAX Draught].

4. Enter your ETA at [ETA], in UTC.
Day: two digits
Month: Three-character abbreviation
Year: Four digits
5. Enter your destination at [Destination], using a maximum of 20 characters.
6. Click the [Save] button to register the settings. The settings are sent to the AIS
transponder.
14-4
14.4
How to Show, Hide AIS Targets

Targets that are being tracked by an AIS transponder can also be displayed on the
ECDIS display. To show or hide AIS target, select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/
NAV Tools] box. Click the indication circled in the figure below to display [DISP OFF],
[DISP FILT], [DISP ALL] or [FUNC OFF].
DISP OFF: Turns off the AIS display. (Tracking continues internally.)
DISP FILT: Targets are shown according to the AIS DISP filter settings, on the [TT/
AIS] menu.
DISP ALL: Shows all AIS targets within the range set.
FUNC OFF: Deactivates the AIS function.
The maximum number of AIS targets on the ECDIS display is 1000. The number of
AIS targets on display can be limited by filtering AIS targets (option DISP FIL), then
the max. number of AIS target on display is user defined. See section 14.5.
Note: The TT display, together with the AIS and radar displays, can also be hidden
from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then select [Clear RADAR Info].
Ship off center
Clear RADAR Info
Object INFO
Chart Legend
Manual Update
Clear Divider
14-5
14.5
How to Filter AIS Targets

1. Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools box], select [Setting] and open the [Setting.1] page.
(The [Setting.1] page can also be opened from the menu (MENU[TT/
AIS][Setting][Setting.1].)
2. In the [AIS DISP Filter] window, set each item referring to the descriptions below.
Click the button of [Class A], [Class B] and [Base Station] to show [OFF] or [ON]
to hide or show those targets.
Set the maximum range with [Max Range]. Any target beyond the range set
here will not be displayed.
Set the ship speed for AIS targets, with [Min Ship Speed]. Any AIS target whose
speed is lower than that set here will not be displayed.
3. Click the [Save] button to save settings. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog
box.
Note: AIS and tracked target viewing limitations are as follows:
AIS and tracked targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,000,001 for S57
charts.
AIS and tracked targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,900,001 for ARCS
charts. This allows display of AIS and tracked targets on top of the largest scale
ocean charts (original scale 1:3,500,000) when they are zoomed to "overscale".
14.6
AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm

A dangerous AIS target is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA
and TCPA limits set in the information area. A dangerous AIS target is displayed as a
blinking target symbol in red as long as you acknowledge the "AIS CPA/TCPA" alert.
Then the target symbol is displayed in red color.
When a target whose CPA or TCPA is within the limits set here the buzzer sounds and
the Alert 536 "AIS CPA/TCPA" appears in the [Alert] box.
14-6

CPA setting
DISP ALL
CPA/TCPA
Alarm ON/OFF
0.5NM 4min
AUTO ACT FILT
TCPA setting
2. If the CPA and TCPA values are blank, click [CPA/TCPA] to show them.
3. Put the cursor on the CPA indication then use the scrollwheel or left button to set
the CPA.
4. Put the cursor on the TCPA indication then use the scrollwheel or left button to set
the TCPA.
5. Click the [CPA/TCPA] alarm indication to enable or disable the alarm. The alarm
is disabled when the CPA and TCPA indications are greyed out.
14-7
14.7
Automatic Activation of Sleeping Targets
14.7.1
Enabling, disabling automatic activation of sleeping targets

Enable or disable the automatic activation of sleeping targets from the [TT/AIS] page
of the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. Click the indication below to enable or disable automatic activation. The CPA/TCPA alarm must be active to get automatic activation of
AIS targets.
DISP ALL
0.5NM 4min
AUTO ACT FILT
ON/OFF for automatic

activation of sleeping
targets
OFF: Turn off automatic activation.

AUTO ACT FILT: Activate the sleeping targets that meet the criteria set in
section 14.7.2.
AUTO ACT ALL: Activate all sleeping targets.
14.7.2
Conditions for automatic activation of sleeping targets

You can get automatic activation of sleeping AIS targets. Open the [TT/AIS] menu, select [Setting] then click the [Setting.1] tab.
Max Range: Set the max. range at which to get automatic activation.
Min Ship Speed: Set the minimum ship speed to get automatic activation.
Except Class B: Exclude class B AIS targets from automatic activation.
Be sure the label of the [OFF/ON] button shows [ON] for the items to use automatic
activation.
14-8
14.8
How to Sleep All Activated Targets

You can sleep all activated targets. Open the [TT/AIS] menu, select [Setting] and then
click the [Setting.1] tab. Click the [Sleep All Targets] button to sleep all activated targets.
14.9
AIS Lost Target Alarm

If AIS data is not received from a vessel within a certain interval, the corresponding
target becomes a lost target. The target is marked with the lost target symbol, which
is red and flashing. The buzzer sounds and the Alert 537 "AIS Lost" appears in the
Alert box. After the target is acknowledged, the lost target is erased from the screen.
If Alert 537 is not acknowledged, lost AIS target symbol will be automatically removed
from display. In case of a sleeping AIS target, the buzzer does not sound.
14.9.1
How to enable, disable the AIS lost target alarm

DISP ALL
0.5NM 4min
AUTO ACT FILT
2. Put the cursor on the Lost TGT indication then push the left button to display
[OFF], [FILT], or [ALL].
OFF: Disable lost target alarm
FILT: Alarm sounds against targets meeting a specific criteria.
ALL: Alarms sounds against all lost targets.
14-9
14.9.2
How to set the AIS lost target alarm filter

You can select what AIS targets to exclude from the lost target alarm, on the [Setting.
2] page in the [TT/AIS] menu.
Max Range: Set the max. range at which a target must be to be declared a lost target.
Min Ship Speed: Set the minimum ship speed a target must obtain to be declared a
lost target.
Except Class B: Exclude class B AIS targets from the AIS lost target alarm.
14.10 Vector Length, Vector Stabilization in True

Motion Mode
Ground stabilization and sea stabilization
Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized in the True Motion mode. To
select speed over the ground or speed through the water data, open the [SPD] page
from the [System Sensor Settings] or [Local System Settings] menu. Select [Bottom]
for ground stabilization or [Water] for sea stabilization. The Vector mode indication
shows the stabilization mode in the true motion as [True-G] or [True-S].
Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea
using a compass heading and single-axis log water speed inputs in the true motion
mode. Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced
to the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems unsatisfactory, enter set and drift corrections..
True vector
In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships
at anchor remain stationary on the radar overlay with vector length zero. But in the
presence of wind and/or current, the vectors appear on fixed targets representing the
reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly
entered.
In the true vector mode, there are two types of stabilization: ground stabilization (TrueG) and sea stabilization (True-S). The stabilization mode is automatically selected according to speed selection, as shown in the table on the next page. Manual selection
is available with [Stabilization Mode] in the [SPD] page: [Bottom], [True-G], [Water],
[True-S].
14-10
Speed selection
LOG (WT)
LOG (BT)
POSN
REF
MAN
MAN w/set & drift
True vector mode

True-S
True-G
True-G
True-G
True-S
True-G
Relative vector
Relative vectors on targets that are not
moving over the ground such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor will
represent the reciprocal of own ship's
ground track. A target whose vector passes through own ship is on a collision
course.
Vector time and vector reference can be
set from the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/
NAV Tools] box. Click the vector length
and vector reference indications to set
them.
Vector time
Vector reference
DISP ALL
0.5NM 4min
AUTO ACT FILT
14.11 How to Display AIS Target Data

Standard data
Put the cursor on a desired AIS target then push the left button.
Title bar
MMSI
Vessel name
Bearing
Range
Course over ground
Speed over ground
CPA
Normal/Expand
button
Scroll buttons
Close button
Heading
Rate of turn
TCPA
Bow cross range
Bow cross time
Position
Navigation status
14-11
Expanded data
Put the cursor on a desired AIS target then push the left button. Click the [Expand] button on the [AIS Info] box to show expanded AIS data.
Title bar
MMSI
Vessel name
Bearing
Range
Course over ground
Speed over ground
CPA
Normal/Expand
button
Scroll buttons
Close button
Heading
Rate of turn
TCPA
Bow cross range
Bow cross time
Position
Navigation status
Position sensor
Position sensor accuracy
(HIGH, LOW)
Call sign
IMO No.
Length
Width
Draught
Destination
ETA
AIS version no.
Ship & Cargo type
14-12
14.12 How to Display AIS Target Past Positions

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of
activated AIS targets. A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the preset number is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes
course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.
Past Positions (or the length of trace) and presentation mode can be set on the information area, as shown in the next section.
a) Ship turning
b) Ship running c) Ship reduced d) Ship increased

straight
speed
speed
14.12.1 How to enable/disable the past

position display, set past position reference
Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. Click the indications
circled in the figure at right to set the plot
interval (or disable the display) and the
past position bearing reference (true or relative).
Plot interval,
display ON/OFF
Past position
bearing reference
DISP ALL
0.5NM 4min
AUTO ACT FILT
Note: The number of past position points

and points style can be selected on the
[Targets] page. See section 13.7.2.
14.13 How to Display Own Ship Data

You can see own ship's data on the [Own Ship] page in the [NAV Status] menu. Open
the menu then click both [NAV Status] in the [TT/AIS] menu and the [Own Ship] tab.
MMSI:
457804356
Name:
FURUNO Voyager
Call Sign:
JZ5890312
Type:
Description:
All ships of this type
Length(LOA):
223.2 m
Width:
31.8 m
Ref Bow:
3.3 m
Ref Port:
2.8 m
14-13
14-14
15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX

MESSAGES
15.1
AIS Safety Messages

You can send and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified destination
(MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships within communication range of your ship. Messages
can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine
messages are also permitted. Short safety-related messages are only an additional
means to broadcast safety information. They do not remove the requirements of the
GMDSS.
15.1.1
How to send an AIS safety message

Note: If you are using the Trackball Control Unit RCU-026, display the software keyboard ([DISP] button, [
cedure.
], [ON] on the InstantAccess bar) before starting this pro-
15-1
15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES
1. In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [MSG] and [Safety MSG] buttons on the
InstantAccess bar to show the [Message] dialog box.
MMSI of receiver
(MMSI or Broadcast)
MMSI of
sender
Type of message
(Binary, Safety)
Date
received
Status of message
(Read, Unread)

3. At [Send to], select where to send the message. Select [Broadcast] to send the message to all AISequipped ships within communication range, or select [MMSI] and enter the MMSI of the ship where to
send the message.
4. At [Type], select the type of message, [Safety] or
[Binary] (routine).
5. At [Channel], select the channel to use to send the
message.
6. At [Description], enter the text of your message. The
no. of characters available depends on the type of
message.
Safety message broadcast: 161 characters
Binary message broadcast: 156 characters
Safety message addressed to MMSI: 156 characters
Binary message addressed to MMSI: 151characters
7. Click the [Send] button to send the message.
15.1.2
How to manage received and sent AIS safety messages

When an AIS message is received, the alert 539 AIS Message Received appears.
Do the following to view the message.
15-2
How to display the Message dialog box, view a message

Click the [MSG] and [Safety MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Click the [Receive Box] or [Send Box] button as appropriate. Click a message to view its contents.
How to delete a received or sent message

1. Click the [Receive Box] or [Send Box] as appropriate.
2. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark. (All messages can be
checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the
left of [Date] then select [Select All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.)
Note: A large amount of messages may take some time to delete.
How to delete received, sent messages permanently

1. Click the [Trash Box] button.
2. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark. (All messages can be
checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the
left of [Date] then select [Select All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.)
15.2
Navtex Messages
Navtex (Navigational Telex) is an international automated medium frequency directprinting service for delivery of navigational and meteorological warnings and forecasts, as well as urgent marine safety information to ships.
Navtex messages can be received and read in the Voyage navigation mode.
15-3
15.2.1
How to receive Navtex messages

Do the following to display a NAVTEX message:
1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar.
23:59 12 Apr 2012

13:51 11 Apr 2012
12:12 11 Apr 2012
10:33 11 Apr 2012
10:11 11 Apr 2012
181740 UTC JUL 10

JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1555/2011
HOKKAIDO, S. COAST NW OF ERIMA
GUNNERY EXERCISE 2300Z to 0830Z
2. Click the message to view. The text of the message appears in the [Description]
box.
15-4
15.2.2
How to manage received Navtex messages

How to delete received Navtex messages
2. Click the [Trash Box] button.
3. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark in the box. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the
box to the left of [Date] then select [Select All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.)
Note: A large amount of messages may take some time to delete.
How to deleted received Navtex messages permanently

2. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark in the box. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the
box to the left of [Date] then select [Select All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.)
15-5
15-6
16. RADAR OVERLAY

16.1
Introduction
The radar overlay has the radar echo image overlaid on the ECDIS chart display, in
the Voyage navigation mode. The radar overlay video is received over LAN from the
FAR-2xx7 or FCR-2xx9 series radar.
Radar
echo
This ECDIS has many features to support exact match in scale and orientation of the
chart and radar echo image. Exact match of the radar echo image and chart is an essential security feature. If the radar echo image and the chart display match, then the
mariner can rely on what he sees and the mariner also gets a very good confirmation
that his navigation sensors (such as gyro and position receivers) operate properly and
accurately. However, if the mariner is unable to achieve exact match, it is a very strong
indication that something is wrong and he should not rely on what he sees.
If a radar echo and a chart object occupy the same geographical position, the one selected as having priority (with [Priority] on the [Echo] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools]
box) is displayed.
Selected scale of displayed chart also defines scale of radar overlay. When you
change the chart scale, the scale of the radar overlay is automatically changed. The
table below shows the standard scale and equivalent radar range.
Radar
range (nm)
Standard
scale
Radar
range (nm)
Standard
scale
0.25
1:4,000
1:90,000
0.5
1:8,000
12
1:180,000
0.75
1:12,000
24
1:350,000
1.5
1:22,000
48
1:700,000
1:45,000
96
1:1,500,000
16-1
16. RADAR OVERLAY
16.2
How to Setup the Radar Overlay

Radar echoes can be output to the ECDIS and shown on its display. Like details on
S57 charts, the radar overlay can be displayed or removed from the chart display. The
transparency of the echo display can be set from the [Echo] page in the [Overlay/NAV
Tools] box. To activate and setup the radar overlay, do the following:
1. Select the [Echo] page from the [Overlay/NAV
Tools] box.
2. Click the [ON/OFF] button at [Display] to show
[ON] (radar overlay ON) to activate the overlay.
"Status: OK" appears under [Antenna] if the radar signal is being received. "Status: No Data"
is displayed if there is no radar signal.
Note: The TT display, together with the AIS
and radar displays, can also be hidden from
the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then select [Clear RADAR Info].
Status:
OK
Ship off center

Clear RADAR Info
Object INFO
Chart Legend
Manual Update
Clear Divider
3. [Echo Level] adjusts the sensitivity of the radar picture. To adjust, put the cursor
on the slider bar and roll the scrollwheel.
4. [Density] controls the "see through" behavior of the radar overlay. [100%] overlays
the radar echo on the chart without modification. "25%" displays radar echoes
somewhat faintly, and "75%" displays radar echoes very faintly. It is recommended to use 25% or 50% when navigating narrow channels, so as not to conceal
landmasses.
5. [Priority] sets the priority between chart object and radar echo when an object and
an echo share the same position. Select the one that is to have priority.
6. Click the [Antenna] drop-down list to select the radar that is to feed radar echoes.
16-2
16. RADAR OVERLAY
16.3
Error Between Radar Echo Image and Chart

There are several reasons why the radar echo image and chart display do not match
exactly. The mismatch is a combination of several reasons and removing one reason
doesn't solve the mismatch perfectly. There is a fundamental difference between the
radar echo image and corresponding chart feature. The radar echo is a reflection from
the real life target and the actual position of the real life target is the front edge of the
radar echo. Therefore, the radar echo should start from the chart feature and exist as
far as the radar pulse length goes.
How to compensate for bearing error

Bearing error occurs in the following instances:
Gyro error
Inaccurate chart
Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset)
How to compensate for position error

Position is caused by the following:
Inaccurate position
Position offset
Inaccurate chart
Improper installation parameters (conning position offset, position receiver antenna
offset, radar overlay range offset)
16-3
16. RADAR OVERLAY
16.4
Error Sources for Radar Echo Image and TT

Mismatch
There are several reasons why the radar echo image and tracked target symbols do
not match exactly.
1. Different gyro value at radar overlay and at ECDIS.
2. Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset, radar overlay
range offset, conning position offset).
The example below shows how different gyro value set at radar overlay and at ECDIS
affect the display of the ECDIS.
Different gyro value at

radar and ECDIS
16-4
Equal gyro value at

radar and ECDIS
17. WEATHER OVERLAY

17.1
What is the Weather Overlay?

The weather overlay, available in the Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes,
provides an animated display of weather information over time for the area selected.
The information may include wave, ocean current, wind, temperature, cloud coverage,
and precipitation rate. Spot weather information, which provides cursor-picked weather reports, is also provided.
The weather overlay is driven by GRIB (Gridded Information in Binary) data files. (This
equipment supports GRB2 (2nd edition) files.) GRIB is the format used by the worlds
meteorological institutes to transport and process global weather data. (GRB2 files
are output direct from Numerical Weather Prediction programs, which is usually the
US GFS (General Forecast System). Other models are used, however no one model
is more reliable or accurate than another.
GRIB files are sent without review, thus there is no assurance that the data are accurate or correct. They are intended as an aid to weather forecasting - use them in conjunction with other weather data such as GMDSS forecasts and Navtex broadcasts.
GRIB forecasts are useful for short term planning. The US GFS mathematical model,
for example, is run four times a day, and produces forecasts for up to 16 days in advance, but with decreasing reliability over time. The model calculates on a 3-D grid
with horizontal spacing of approx. 27 km on a 1/2 degree grid - namely approx. 30 mile
spacing.
Global forecasts (GRIB files) are available through a wide variety of sources; for example, e-mail, FTP, and web browser, and most are free to the user.
17.2
How to Activate, Deactivate the Weather Overlay

To activate the weather overlay, get into the Voyage navigation mode then click the Weather overlay button on the
InstantAccess bar. The overlay is active when the background color of the button is light blue.
Note: The weather overlay and manual update mode (If
active) are activated or deactivated reciprocally.
Weather
overlay
button
17-1
17. WEATHER OVERLAY
When the weather overlay is made active, two weather overlay dialog boxes appear,
[Weather Overlay Control] and [Weather Overlay]. The [Weather Overlay Control] dialog box selects and plays back weather data files. The [Weather Overlay] dialog box
controls what weather information to display and how to display it.
Weather Overlay Control dialog box
Weather Overlay dialog box
To deactivate the weather overlay, click the [Clear] button on the [Weather Overlay
Control] dialog box to remove the weather overlay display then click the Weather overlay button on the InstantAccess bar.
17.3
How to Select, Playback a Weather Data File

1. Copy the weather data file (.grb extension) to a USB flash memory and insert the
drive into a USB port on the PCU.
2. Activate the weather overlay then click the [Open] button on the [Weather Overlay
Control] dialog box to show the [OPEN FILE] window. Click the [Volume select]
drop-down list to select the USB flash memory.
17-2
17. WEATHER OVERLAY
3. Select the weather data file then click the [Open] button.
The message "Now Preparing... "appears while the file is being read, and "Now
unmounting the media" appears when the reading is completed. The [Weather
Overlay Control] dialog box shows the start and end times of the file. If the file is
too large, the message "An error occurred. The file size is too large." appears. Select a smaller file - the maximum file size is 100 MB. If there is a problem with the
file, the message "An error occurred while reading weather data file." appears.
Select another file.
Open selected file
Start and end time

of GRIB file
Clear current file
Count up time
Slider bar
(Select playback
start point.)
Time-step selection
Close the weather
overlay dialog boxes
Play button
4. To select a specific start time, drag the slider bar to show that time on the Count
up time indication. (The time and date can also be entered manually. Use the software keyboard to enter the time. Click the date to show the [Set date] dialog box
to select the date.)
5. Use the [Step] drop-down list to select the time step interval, which defines how
often to refresh (non-real time) the weather display. The choices are 30 minutes,
1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, and 6 hours.
6. To play or pause the playback, click the Play () button.
7. To close both weather overlay dialog boxes, click the [Close] button. (The weather
overlay remains active.) To redisplay them, click the Weather overlay button.
17.4
How to Set up the Weather Overlay

The weather overlay is set
up from the [Weather
Overlay] dialog box, in the
Voyage planning mode or
the Navigation planning
mode (overlay must be
active).
1. Select a display from
the [Overlay Informa-
Overlay information
drop-down list
Overlay type attributes
ON/OFF
Color legend (changes
with overlay type)
Isobar display
ON/OFF
Information density
adjustment
Hide weather
overlay temporarily
17-3
17. WEATHER OVERLAY
tion] drop-down list. The choices are [Wind], [Temperature], [Cloud Coverage],
[Precipitation Rate], [Wave], and [Ocean Current].
(The weather data file must contain the data selected in order to display it.)
2. The [Color] checkbox, when checked, provides a color presentation of the weather item selected. (Unchecking the checkbox erases the color presentation.)
3. The [Wind], [Wave] and [Ocean Current] displays can show windbarbs (wind) or arrows
(waves, ocean currents) to indicate the direction of respective item. Check [Arrow] to show
the windbarbs or arrows.
4. For any display, show or hide the isobar with
[Isobar]. The isobar is the black curved line in
the right figure and it connects points of equal
atmospheric pressure. H appears in the case
of high atmospheric pressure; L for low atmospheric pressure.
5. Set the information density with the [Information Density] bar. Drag the bar to required setting. The figure below shows several information density settings and
the resulting displays.
Full dense
Medium
Full sparse
6. To hide the weather overlay temporarily, click and hold down the [Hide Weather]
button. Release the button to redisplay the overlay.
17-4
17. WEATHER OVERLAY
17.5
Weather Overlay Examples
17.5.1
Wind display
The wind display provides wind speed and direction. Windbarbs show both wind
speed and direction. The relative wind speed is shown in colors, from blue (low) to magenta (high).
How to read the windbarbs

Windbarbs represent both wind speed and direction. The windbarbs point in the direction from which the wind is blowing. Lines and filled pennants on the windbarbs indicate speed.
A half line represents speed from 1.49 to 4.08 kn
A full line represents speed from 4.09 to 6.68 kn
A filled pennant represents speed from 24.69 to 27.28 kn
22.09 to 24.69 kn wind at

100 east-east southeast
Wind from south

at 24.69 to 27.28 kn
Wind from southeast

at 29.97 to 32.0 kn
Example windbarbs
17-5
17. WEATHER OVERLAY
17.5.2
Temperature display
The temperature display provides air temperature information, in colors from blue
(low) to red (high). The entire area in the figure below has moderately high temperatures.
17.5.3
Cloud coverage display

The cloud coverage display shows areas obscured by clouds, in transparent (low) to
light gray (high). In the figure below, clouds are covering the landmass and body of
water at the top left corner.
17.5.4
Precipitation rate display

The precipitation rate display shows accumulated precipitation over an hour, in colors
from blue (low precipitation) to red (high precipitation). In the figure below light-toheavy rain is present at the top left corner.
17-6
17. WEATHER OVERLAY
17.5.5
Waves display
The waves display shows the average height of the highest waves, in colors from
green (low) to red (high). The length of an arrow indicates wave height. The arrow
points in the direction of the main swell.
Arrow length and wave height (m)
Less than 1
Less than 3
Less than 5
Less than 9
Higher than 9
(No
arrow)
Less than 7
17.5.6
Ocean current display

The ocean current display provides ocean current direction and speed information.
The arrows show both direction and speed. Speed is also shown with colors, from
transparent (low) to red (high). The color of the currents in the figure below indicate
that their speed is low.
Arrow length and current speed (kn)
Less than 0.06 Less than 0.25
Less than 0.97
Less than 1.45
Less than 2.91
Less than 3.4
More than 4.37
(No
arrow)
17-7
17. WEATHER OVERLAY
17.6
Weather Spot Information

You can get various weather information for any area with the weather spot information feature, in the Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes. The weather overlay must be active and position data available.
1. Right-click the location for which you want to know its weather
to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Click [Weather INFO] to show the [Weather Spot Information]
window. The window shows [N/A] where there is no data for the
corresponding weather item.
Item
06 Dec 2013
0.1kn 327.8
Time
POSN
Wind
Temperature
Cloud
Coverage
Precipitation
Rate
Wave
Ocean Current
Pressure
Ship off center

Object INFO
Chart Legend
Manual Update
New Divider
Weather INFO
Description
Time and date of weather forecast.
L/L position of weather forecast.
Wind speed (kn) and direction (degree).
Temperature, in C.
The fraction of the sky obscured by clouds,
expressed in percentage.
The amount of precipitation (rain, snow, etc.)
in millimeters to fall in one hour.
Wave height, in meters.
Current velocity (kn) and direction (degree).
Atmospheric pressure, expressed in hPa.
3. To erase the window, click the Close button at the top right corner of the window.
17.7
Summary of Weather Overlay Viewability,

Operability and Operating Mode
The table below summarizes the operability and viewability of the weather overlay according to the operating mode.
Item
Activate weather overlay

View weather overlay
Select weather data file
Operate weather overlay related dialog boxes
Deactivate weather overlay
Restore weather overlay when switching from chart mode
or playback mode
Weather spot information window
*Weather display previously active
17-8
Operating mode
NAVI
PLAN
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*
Yes*
Yes
Yes
18. NAVIGATION SENSORS

18.1
CCRS
This ECDIS employs a Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) for the acquisition, processing, storage and distribution of sensor information. The CCRS ensures
that all parts of the system uses the same source and values, e.g., speed through water, heading, etc. The illustration below shows the CCRS diagram.
Processor Unit
Processor Unit
CCRS
CCRS
CCRS
SENSOR
ADAPTER
Sensors
The CCRS processes IEC 61162-1 and IEC 61162-2 data sentences. No other types
of data (video signals, etc.) are processed.
Check for validity, legitimacy

The system checks received sentences for validity and legitimacy.
Validity check: A sentencess checksum, status (A/V), Mode indicator and setting
values are checked. (If checksum error is found, the sentence is dis-affirmed.)
Legitimacy check: The range and accuracy of a sentence is checked.
If the check for both is OK a valid flag results. If either is invalid, the invalid flag is given.
Types of CCRS
There are two types of CCRS: System and Local. The System CCRS integrates all
navigation devices. In the Local CCRS each navigation device operates independently.
Representative sensors
If the system has multiple like sensors, the CCRS selects the representative sensor.
Generally, the system uses common representative sensors; however, independent
representative sensors (local representative sensors) can also be used.
18-1
18.2
How to Select Navigation Sensors

The operator can choose navigation sensors to use for navigation and view their current values on the applicable page in the [System Sensor Settings] and [Local Sensor
Settings] menus. To access these menus, right-click the [Sensor information] box then
click [Open MENU].
18.2.1
Sensors menu description

HDG page
GYRO2
Passed
GYO0001
GYO0002
GYRO2
2.1
Passed
Local sensor HDG page
Sensors: Select the heading sensor to use.

Analog Gyro: No use.
Manual: Set heading manually when there is no heading sensor available.
Gyro Correction: Check to enable gyro correction. Enter correction value in box. Not
shown in system sensor [HDG] page. Valid for sensor activated on database.
SPD page
SPD:
Integrity: Passed
Local sensor SPD page
Stabilization Mode: Select the water stabilization mode: Select [Bottom] for ground
stabilization, or select [Water] for sea stabilization.
Sensor Type: Select [GPS] in case of a GPS navigator, or [LOG] for speed log.
Data Source: Check [Sensors] to use a sensor in the [Sensors] list, or click [Manual]
to enter speed manually. Use [Manual] when no speed source is available.
18-2
Reference SPD: If checked, radar is used as the source for speed and course. Checkmark is valid when the speed measurement method is ground. Not available with
system sensor.
Set and drift: Check the [Set Drift] checkbox to manually set speed and course of drift.
Note that you can select manual drift only if you deactivate the AIS function. Checkmark is valid when the speed measurement method is water. Not available with system sensor.
Angle = Difference between heading and COG
Spd = Speed component of the drift vector
Cse = Course component of the drift vector
Vector defined by (SOG and COG) is equal to vector sum of vectors defined by (SPD
and HDG) and (set and drift).
North
cse
SOG
COG
HDG
spd
SPD
an
gle
SPD:
HDG
SOG:
COG:
spd:
cse:
angle:
water speed
heading of ship
speed over ground
course over ground
speed of drift
course of drift
difference between HDG and COG
POSN (Position) page
FILT
LAT:
3515.743N
LON:
13950.064E
Integrity: Passed
DGPS
LAT:
3515.743N
LON:
13950.064E
Integrity: Passed
The sensor label (here GPS001) indicates the name of the sensor. A status indication,
Prim or Second, denotes the priority of the sensor. Latitude and longitude values will
appear in red for position sensor error. Position sensors have priority, which is indicated as Prim or Second Only one sensor can be primary while the others can be secondary or off. If a position sensor is changed from secondary to primary state and
another position sensor was chosen as primary, then that sensor previously selected
to primary state is then automatically selected to secondary state. When the position
source is changed based on priorities and signal validity to another position source,
then you get the Alert 472 "Position Source Change".
18-3
COG/SOG page
Select the source (GPS receiver) for speed over the ground and course over the
ground.
FILT
Not Available
Other sensors page

To show the [Other Sensors] page, open the menu and select [Other Sensor Settings].
1.9
12.1
123.1m
123.2m
123.2m
22.7C
37.3
3.2kn
Wind: Wind speed (kn or m/s) and direction ([Apparent], [North] (True wind, reference
to North), or [Theoretical] (True wind, reference to heading)) are displayed. See
section 18.9. Data source can be selected among, True, Relative, Theoretical, and
Theoretical (T) and Relative.
Depth Below Trans: Depth from hull at bow and aft to bottom. A depth alert value may
be entered to alert you when the depth is within the value set.
Temperature: Water surface temperature.
Water Current: Tide at own ships position.
18-4
18.3
Source of Position
The figure below shows how source for position is chosen. The position sensors have
either primary or secondary as input for their calculation. DGPS position sensors are
considered more accurate than other position sensors.
The latitude and longitude position is shown at the top-right position on the chart display, and in the example below the position source is DGPS. Other indications that
may be displayed in the position area are as follows:
DR: Shown in yellow when position source is dead reckoning.
DGPS, GPS: Name of position source.
Position sensor
selected as
high priority
Valid data exists
No valid data exists
Position sensor
selected as
low priority
Position
used by
this system
Valid data exists
Selected
Backup
dead
reckoning
If the system changes the source of position because of lost sensor data, the system
immediately generates the Alert 472 "Position Source Change".
18-5
18.4
CCRP, Primary, Secondary and Pivot Positions

of Own Ship
This system displays position in one of four methods
CCRP position: CCRP
Primary position: Position generated by position source chosen as highest priority.
Secondary position: Position generated by position source chosen as 2nd highest
priority.
Pivot position: Ships pivot point position.
The position source for primary position of own ship is chosen as Primary on the
[POSN] page of the [Sensor] menu.
The position source for secondary position of own ship is chosen as Secondary on the
[POSN] page of the [Sensor] menu. Secondary position of own ship is not available as
latitude/longitude value for the user.
Position sensor
selected as
Secondary
No valid data
Valid data exists
Position sensor
selected as priority
lower than
Secondary
No valid data
Valid data exists
Secondary position
of own ship
is is not valid
Past ships track can be plotted on the chart with reference to CCRP, Primary, Secondary or Pivot position.
You can control their visibility of the tracks, etc. from
the [Tracking] page of the [Symbol Display] menu,
shown in the right figure. In this example, past tracks
are plotted using the primary position-fixing equipment.
18-6
Secondary
position of
own ship
used by
this system
18.5
Source of Navigation Data

The figure below shows how various sources of navigation data are chosen. "SOG,
COG" is speed over the ground and course over the ground, respectively. "SPD" is
speed through the water. Drift is the difference between speed through the water and
speed over ground.
Heading used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart display. In
the example shown below, heading is received from a gyrocompass and it is shown
without additional text, meaning the value is referenced to true North. Additional gyrorelated text that may appear is "(GYRO-A)" if the value is referenced to magnetic
North.
Heading sensor
selected as high
priority
No valid
data exists
GPS1
Valid data exists
Heading sensor
selected as low
priority
No valid
data exists
Valid data exists
Heading
used by
this system
Alert 450
Heading
Sensor Not
Available
SOG/COG used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart display.
In the example below, COG and SOG are from chosen position sensors and this is
indicated with the text "GPS*" or "LOG*" (* is the number of sensors).
Valid data exists
COG/SOG from
position sensor
No valid
data exists
COG/SOG
calculated from
speed log
Valid data exists
SOG/COG
used by
this system
18-7
Speed used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart display.The
figure below shows the source of water speed is used for drift calculation.
Water Stabilization
Mode Selected
Manual
speed
Selected and
Manual set drift exists
Manual speed
+
Manual set drift
Selected and no manual set

drift exists
Not selected
LOG
(Water speed)
Selected and
Manual set drift
exists
Speed
used
by
this
system
Manual speed
+
Manual set drift
Selected and No manual set

drift exists
LOG
(Ground speed)
Selected
GPS
Selected
Not selected
Bottom Stabilization
Mode Selected
Reference SPD
(local only)
Selected
Alert related to SOG, COG, speed and heading components

It is possible that the operator has not chosen any speed or heading sensors, or that
the chosen sensors do not have any valid values. This kind of a situation is critical for
the system, because it cannot even perform dead reckoning.
When no heading source is available, the system generates the Alert 450 "Heading
Sensor Not Available."
When no speed source is available, the system generates the Alert 453 "SDME Sensor Not Available."
When no COG/SOG data is available, the system generates the Alert 279 "COG/SOG
Not Available."
18-8
18.6
Switching of Sensor and Indication

When a sensor cannot be used because of some problem, the system automatically
switches the sensor. When this occurs the name of the newly selected sensor appears
in yellow.
LOG
BT
Speed sensor
changed
18.7
Filter Status
The ECDIS incorporates a filter that receives raw sensor data, checks sensor integrity
and processes multiple sensor data to produce a continuous estimate of ships position and motion.
By default, the filtering uses data from all available sensors for filtering and integrity
monitoring. The exception is heading data; only the selected heading device affects
the filter output, but other heading sensors (including magnetic compasses) are used
for integrity monitoring.
Sensors may be excluded manually or automatically. An excluded sensor participates
in neither integrity monitoring or filtering. The filter automatically excludes a sensor
from use if the sensor fails the first level of integrity check (for example, if a sudden
jump is detected). If the actual integrity check fails for some reason and the filter is able
to identify the faulty sensor, the faulty sensor is automatically excluded.
Sensor integrity is determined by: (1) monitoring the
statistical accuracy of each sensor independently
and analyzing the input values and using the information of the type of sensor, and (2) monitoring the difference between pairs of sensors. The system
checks heading, rate of turn, position, COG/SOG and
CTW/STW data for integrity, in accordance with INS
regulations (IEC-61924-2). The result is either
[Passed], [Failed] or [Doubtful]. The integrity check
result appears in the following locations:
GYRO1
Integrity
check
result
Passed
GYRO2
2.1
Passed
[Local Sensor Setting] and [System Sensor Setting] menus. The right figure shows the result for
the heading sensor GYRO1.
[Filter Status] page in the [Other Sensor Setting] menu. See the next page.
18-9
For heading data, If there is only one gyro, the judgement is "Doubtful" when the ship
is stopped because there is no COG for comparison. When the ship begins to move,
the judgement is changed to "Passed" because there is COG for comparison.
The methods of integrity monitoring are outlined in the table below.
Sensor
Comparison
Position
Comparison with other position sensors.

Comparison with dead reckoning position.
Heading
Comparison with other heading sensors.

Comparison with a COG sensor (used only if other heading sensors are not available and if COG is high enough).
Speed over the

ground
Comparison with other SOG sensors.

Comparison with water speed sensors is a secondary option (used
only if other SOG sensors are not available).
Speed through
the water
Comparison with other STW sensors.

Comparison with SOG sensors is a secondary option (used only if
other STW sensors are not available).
Rate of turn
Comparison with other rate of turn sensors.
The status and integrity of all sensors can be monitored from the [Filter Status] page
in the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. Sensors can also be unselected and the filter reset from this page.
The [Status] column indicates sensor status as follows:

[Selected] (sensor selected for use in filter)
[Unselected] (sensor not used in filter)
[Not Available] (no sensor information)
[Excluded] (automatically excluded sensor)
The [Integrity] column indicates sensor integrity as either [Passed] (green characters)
or [Failed] (red characters). The integrity evaluation is [Doubtful] (yellow characters)
when there are no other sensors to compare with.
The [Comparisons] column shows the sensors compared and the integrity evaluation
of compared sensors in parentheses. Using the illustration above as an example,
SOG/COG data fed from GP0002 is compared with the sensors GP0001 and VD0001.
The integrity evaluation for the compared sensors is [Passed].
18-10
To unselect a sensor manually, select the sensor from the drop-down list at the bottom left corner of the page, click the [Unselect] button then click the [Save] button. [Unselected] appears in the [Status] column. To reselect an unselected sensor, select the
sensor from the drop-down list, click the [Select] button. [Selected] appears in the [Status] column.
The [Reset Filter] button functions to recover from sensor failure. When the button is
operated:
Automatically excluded sensors are re-included.

All data history is erased.
Output values are re-estimated using new data.
Integrity monitoring is restarted using new data.
Note: The filter can also be reset from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click anywhere in the [Own ship information] box then click [Sensor Information], [Reset Filter],
[Filter Reset].
18.8
Position Alignment
The position alignment feature functions to fine tune ship's position by using radar, radar echo target and ECDIS chart material.
If position alignment is in use, the Alert 640 "Chart Align: Over 30 Min." is generated
every 30 minutes to remind the user to align position. The alert is automatically erased
in 10 seconds.
Note: This feature is effective with the ECDIS unit whose data source for FILT is assigned the highest priority.
18.8.1
How to align position

If the radar echo targets' symbols are not positioned correctly on the chart, there is either position error or gyro error or some combination of these errors.
Position may be aligned on the ECDIS display by moving own ship position or by moving radar target position. To align position, get into the Voyage navigation mode, click
the [Offset] button at the top-right position on the screen, put the cursor on the correct
position then click. The amount of offset, in bearing and range, appears to the right the
[Offset] button. The maximum offset in distance is 10.0 NM.
332.5 10.0NM
The latitude and longitude position indication is shown in yellow characters when the
position align feature is active.
18.8.2
How to cancel position alignment

Click the [Offset] button to cancel the position offset.
18-11
18.9
Wind Sensor
ECDIS can display and output wind data in the following three formats:
Apparent: Windmeter-measured wind speed and direction.
Wind angle reference: Heading
North: True wind angle, true wind speed, referenced to North
Wind angle reference: True North
Theoretical: True wind angle, true wind speed, referenced to heading
Wind angle reference: Heading
The illustration below shows wind speed and direction with given ship data.
The wind values are as shown below.
Ship information:
COG: 60
SOG: 8.7 kn
Heading: 45
Wind angle
Wind speed
Apparent
345
10 kn
North (true wind, referenced to North)
330
5 kn
Theoretical (true wind, referenced to heading)
285
5 kn
North
Wind from NNW (330)
Wind Angle
(Apparent: 345)
Wind speed
(Apparent: 10 kn)
Apparent Wind
Heading
True Wind
Ship's Speed
(SOG: 8.7 kn)
Wind Speed
(North/Theoretical: 5.0 kn)
Angle (reference North)
Wind Angle
(Theoretical: 285)
Wind Angle
(North: 330)
18-12
Apparent, North (true wind referenced to North), Theoretical (true wind referenced to
heading) may be selected from the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. If the wind indication is not accurate; for example, the wind is blowing from the North but the wind direction displays otherwise, check if the format is Theoretical. If it is, switch to another
format.
130.7m
Mid:
130.8m
Aft:
130.8m
18.10 Depth Sensor

The depth output from a depth sensor (for example, echo sounder) is shown on the
[Other Sensor] page in the [Other Sensor Settings] menu.
The content of the [Other Sensor] page depends on sensors connected.
In this example there are three transducers (bow, mid and aft) installed.
130.7m
Mid:
130.8m
Aft:
130.8m
The system displays depth value as depth below the transducer. If required, you can
get an alert when the measured depth is less than the "Echo Alarm Limit" setting at
the [UKC] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. The system generates the Alert 485
"Depth Limit".
18-13
18-14
19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS

The ECDIS records various items during a voyage, like movement and position of your
ship and dangerous radar targets (from the radar). These items are recorded in the
following logs:
Event log:
NAV log:
Target log:
Alert log:
Chart log:
Records user events and position events.

Records entire voyage (i.e., a sailing of a route from first point to the last,
also MOB data), details (position, speed and course every minute), chart
usage (information on charts used for display).
Records dangerous TT, AIS.
Records alerts generated by the system.
Records the install and update history for the ENC, ARCS and C-MAP
charts.
19.1
How to Record User, Position Events
19.1.1
User events
A user event is a comment about an
event (weather, etc.). You can show user
events on the chart area. Open the
[Tracking] page of the [Symbol Display]
menu show or hide the events.
To record a user event:
1. Get into the Voyage planning mode
then click the [Record], [Event Log]
and [User Event] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Record
User Event] window.
2. Enter a comment. Click the [OK] button to finish and close the text box.
An event marker (
the [Voyage] log.
) (orange) appears at your position and the event is recorded to
To view the comment entered for

an event, put the cursor on the
event then left click to show the
[Event Information] window. The
window shows the name of the
event ([UserEvent]), time and
date of entry, latitude and longitude position of the event and
comment. Note that the comment
can be edited from this window.
Edit the comment then click the [OK] button to save.
19-1
19.1.2
Position events
The purpose of a position event is to record current position data to the [Voyage] log.
Position events can be shown in the chart area by checking [Positions] on the [Tracking] page of the [Symbol Display] menu. Do as shown below to record position events.
How to record position events

1. Get into the Voyage planning mode.
2. Click the [Record], [Event Log] and [POSN Event] buttons on the InstantAccess
bar to show the [Position Event] dialog box.
3. At the list box at the top of the dialog box, select position type.
[LOP]: Latitude and longitude position of a fixed object at ship's position.
[Position]: Ships position fed from navigator selected.
[Manual]: Manual entry of position.
4. If you selected [Position] at step 3, click the [Record] button.
Position from
sensor
DGPS1
The [Position Event] window shows the position at

the moment the [Record] button is clicked. The position is recorded to the [Voyage] log.
Name of sensor used
1044
Time of
entry
DGPS1
Name of sensor
Position Event mark
19-2
5. If you selected [Manual] at step 3, enter latitude and longitude position and comment (optional), then click the [Record] button.
Manually
entered
position
The [Position Event] window shows the position at

the moment the [Record] button is clicked. The position is recorded to the [Voyage] log.
Enter comment
here.
1044
Time of
entry
MAN
Position event
6. For [LOP], see the description below.
mark
A plotted line on which a vessel is located, determined by observation or measurement of the range
or bearing to an aid to navigation or other charted element. Two or more simultaneous observations can be combined to produce an estimate of the ship's current
position. If the position is based on only two observations, it is an "estimated position" (EP); otherwise it is called a fix. A maximum of 6 observations can be entered to obtain a fix.
Basic operation: Coordinates of the aid to navigation can be entered into dialog
boxes or they can be selected graphically on the chart:
S57: Click on a charted object (beacon, light, buoy etc.) or any location. Description of the object appears above coordinate boxes.
ARCS: Click anywhere in the chart.
Default values for bearing and range are approximated from ship's current position information. The time of observation is stopped when the object is selected
(or when the [Add] button is clicked). Click the [Add] box to include the observation
in the fix computation. The counter shows "new/1", at the input of the second observation. The word "new" indicates that the observation currently displayed is not
yet included in the fix computation, and it appears as a dashed line or ring on the
chart. The added observations can be edited or deleted after selecting them at the
counter. When at least two measurements are entered, the EP or fix is computed
and the coordinates are shown in the top part of the dialog. To show a position
symbol on the chart, click the [Record] button. In the case of an EP, the letters EP
are shown on the right side of the coordinates. If a valid position estimate cannot
be obtained, a message is displayed under the coordinates. This may happen, for
example, if the lines / circles have multiple crossings that are far apart, or if two
lines are nearly parallel or don't intersect at all. The accuracy limit (estimated standard error) is 1.0 NM. If the estimate is valid, the [Record] box can be clicked to
record the current position estimate in the [Voyage] log. Discrepancy between
LOP result and ship position is also recorded in the log (this information may be
viewed by Info query on the position event symbol on the chart - which is displayed
if position event display is on in chart display settings).
Time transfer: If the observations are not simultaneous, they should be transferred to a common time. Transferring is based on dead reckoning of ship movement. If a position line (or ring) is transferred, the letters TPL are shown beside its
19-3
timestamp on the chart. The method of transfer may be selected in the bottom of
the dialog. Transfer to latest transfers the measurements as if they were all
made at the time of the newest measurement. Continuous transfer transfers all
measurements to real time. Transfer off can be used to check where the measurement origins are. The position estimate and the record function follow the
same logic, which means that Transfer off shows a position that has no relevance
and Transfer to latest sends an old position to the [Voyage] log (timestamp in the
log does not match the position).
If you are satisfied with the position shown in the latitude and longitude fields, then
click the [Record] button to save the position observation to the Voyage log. If you
wish you can also enter latitude and longitude values manually.
Timeouts: The observations cannot be used long after they were made because
dead reckoning is inaccurate.
Click the [Record] button to put a position event at the LOP-calculated position.
The position is recorded to the [Voyage] log.
Time of entry
1044
Accuracy of position
EP: Low accuracy
DR: High accuracy
EP
LOP
Position event
mark
How to find position event information

You can find information about a position event by putting the cursor on the event
mark then left click. The [Event Position] window shows event type (position event),
time of entry, event position, name of sensor ([Position] only), comment (automatic for
[LOP] and [Position]; user-entered comment* for [Manual]), and position line data
([LOP] only). *Comment cannot be changed from this window.
Position event: Position
Position event: Manual
19-4
Position event: LOP
19.2
Details Log
The [Details] log contains various voyage information, recorded once per minute.
Date of entry
Time of entry
Source: No. of unit which generated log
Type: Type of position data
Auto: Automatic input of position
Latitude, Longitude: Position as output by selected sensor
Align/NM, Align/T: Range, bearing offset, if used
SOG/kn: Speed over the ground
COG/T: Course over the ground
HDG/T: Heading
CORR/T: Gyro correction value, if used.
How to view the Details log

To open the [Details] log, lick the [Record], [NAV Log] and [Detail] buttons on the InstantAccess bar.
Export File
To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Covered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display
all logs.
To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
To search the log, do as follows:
Input box
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find
text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to
search.
3) Select the search direction with the up or
down radio button.
Find
4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching
text is highlighted in yellow at the top of
Input text in box and
the screen.
[Find] button appears.
5) To continue the search click the [Find]
button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select printing format then click the [Print] button. [Spread Portrait]
prints two pages of data on one page.
To show track for the period selected, click the [Show
Track] button. Use the [Hide Track] button to erase the
track.
To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file
is named
DetailsLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.
19-5
19.3
Voyage Log
The [Voyage] log records all voyage-related data of the past three months. Recorded
events are:
Date: Date of entry
Time: Time of entry
Type: Log entry types
Auto: Automatic entry of ship position, in 1 to 4 hr intervals, set by operator.
Ship: Logged if the amount of change in speed or course equals or is greater than
the set values.
MOB: MOB position, entered with [MOB] button.
User: Operator-entered position. The information entered in the [Description] box
is logged.
Posdev: Record user-entered position event. The[ Description] window shows automatically entered data (Position, LOP) or manually entered comment (Manual).
Automatically entered data (Position: data source, LOP: see below.
The latitude and longitude position and bearing (or distance) of a maximum of
three objects are automatically recorded to each log entry. An object whose position accuracy is low is not recorded. If an object has both a bearing and distance,
separate entries are made.
Dead reckoning position
L/L position, bearing of object (no.1)
19-6
Latitude and Longitude: Latitude and longitude position

SOG/kn, COG/T, HDG/T: Speed over the ground, course over the ground, heading.
CORR/T: Offset bearing, if used
Wind/kn Wind/T: Wind speed and angle
Dist/NM: Navigation distance
Depth/m: Depth in meters
Description: Show recorded contents, for [User], [PosDev] above.
If desired items other than [Posdev] can be edited. Click an item to show the [Edit
Description] box. Edit the description as required then click the [OK] button.
How to view the Voyage log

Click the [Record], [NAV Log] and [Voyage] buttons on the InstantAccess bar.
Export File
all logs.
the screen.
and [Spread Landscape] print two pages of data on one
page.
To show track for the period selected, click the [Show
Track] button. Use the [Hide Track] button to erase the
track.
To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is named VoyageLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.
19.3.1
How to set conditions for voyage logging

The operator can set the conditions for automatic voyage logging. When your speed
or course equals the amount set here, an entry is made in the [Voyage] log.
Define the amount of course and speed change which creates a log entry.
Set the interval of logging, regardless of speed and course change.
To set the conditions of logging, do as follows:
1. Open the menu and select
the [Voyage] menu from
the [NAVI Log] menu.
2. Set desired limits for
speed and course, and log
interval.
Speed: 1 - 10 kn, 1 kn increment
Course: 0 - 30, 0.1 increment
Log Interval: 1 - 4 hr, 1 hr
interval
19-7
19.4
Chart Usage Log

The [Chart Usage] log stores which charts were used on the ECDIS display. To open
the log, click [Record], [NAV Log] and [Chart Usage] on the InstantAccess bar. The
following information is recorded in the chart usage log:
Date and time chart was displayed

Chart ID
Center position of display (Lat, Lon)
Chart source
Chart edition
Display scale
Compilation scale
The latest update included to chart
Chart base
all logs.
the screen.
5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
To print the log, click the [Print Text] button.
19-8
19.5
Danger Targets Log

The [Danger Targets] log stores information about dangerous targets that are received from a radar (TTs) and/or targets that are received from an AIS transponder
(AIS targets).
If a TT or AIS target is within the set CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time
to CPA), information of all TTs (including non-dangerous targets) are recorded into the
danger target log. This data is as follows:
Date: Date of entry

Time: Time of entry
Source: Unit which generated log
Type: Type of dangerous target
Latitude and Longitude: Latitude and longitude position of dangerous target
SPD/kn: Speed of dangerous target
CRS/T: Course of dangerous target
HDG/T: Heading of dangerous target
CPA/NM, TCPA/min: CPA and TCPA of dangerous target
Index: Radar target no. (TT), MMSI (AIS)
How to view the danger targets log

To open the [Danger Targets] log, click the [Record], [Target Log] and [Danger Target]
buttons on the InstantAccess bar.
2013-05-08
2013-05-08
13:55:59
13:53:42
ECD001
ECD001
TT 3538.164N
TT 3557.770N
13949.842E
13949.732E
15.1
12.1
193.3
200.6
N/A
N/A
1.3
1.1
0.7
0.2
all logs.
4) Click the [Find] button. Matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the
screen.
prints two pages of data on one page.
To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is
named DangerTargetLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.
19-9
19.5.1
How to set the conditions for logging danger targets

The operator may set Closest Point of Approach (CPA), Time to CPA (TCPA) and Log
interval for viewing dangerous TT and AIS targets on the ECDIS display.
1. Open the menu and select the [Danger Targets] page from the [Danger Target]
menu.
2. Set how often to record dangerous TTs and AIS target with [Log interval]. The setting range is 1 to 100 (min.).
19-10
19.6
How to Playback the Log

The log can be played back to check ships movements within a given time frame. If
an AMS is connected, deactivate it to enable playback.
1. On the Status bar, click the [OTHERS] and [Playback] buttons. The message "If
you use playback function, you cannot use other function before ECDIS restarts."
appears. Click the [OK] button to proceed. The window shown below appears.
Click to playback data

of current day.
2. Select the date to playback. Log data is stored by the day. To play back data in
the current month, click a day in the calendar. For other dates, click the [] or []
button to select the month and then click a day in the calendar. To playback the
current day, click the button at the top of the screen.
3. Click the [OK] button, and the dialog box shown on the next page appears. This
box has controls for
Start and End times
Time elapsed
Slider bar (drag the bar to change start time)
Playback speed list box (change the playback speed). The choices are x1, x2,
x4, x10 and x60.
19-11
The [Select] button selects a file. Playback is stopped and a message asks if
you are sure to select a different file.
14:46 05 Mar 2014

14:54 05 Mar 2014
Time
elapsed
Slider
bar
Pause/playback
button
Select button
(Select different
file to playback.)
05 Mar 2014
Playback
speed
Pause
:
Playback :
All your ship's movements and chart-related operations during the time period selected are plotted on the screen and the screen shows the message "PLAYBACK". To
stop playback and return to the normal display, click the [Exit] button. The message
"Please Restart ECDIS for using other functions without playback." appears. Click the
[Restart] button to restart ECDIS.
19-12
20. ALERTS
20.1
What is an Alert?
"Alert" is a generic name for a notice to any unusual or potentially dangerous situation
generated within the system.
Alerts are classified according to priority and category.
Alert priority
There are four alert priorities: emergency*, alarm, warning and caution.
* Generated when this ECDIS is connected to an AMS.
Emergency: Immediate danger to human life or to the ship and its machinery exists
and that immediate action must be taken. Emergency alerts are handled the same
as an alarm.
Alarm: Situations or conditions which require immediate attention, decision and (if
necessary) action by the bridge team to avoid any kind of hazardous situation and to
maintain the safe navigation of the ship.
Warning: Conditions or situations which require immediate attention for precautionary
reasons, to make the bridge team aware of conditions which are not immediately hazardous, but may become so.
Caution: Awareness of a condition which continues to require attention out of the ordinary consideration of the situation or of given information.
Alert category
An alert is further classified by category, A, B or C, according to its degree of severity
or source.
Category
Description
Category A alerts include alerts indicating

Danger of collision
Danger of grounding
Category B alerts are alerts where no additional information for decision

support is necessary. Category B alerts are all alerts not falling under
category A.
IAS (Integrated Automation System) generated engine alert
20-1
20. ALERTS
20.2
Alert Box
When an alert is generated, the related alert message and alert state icon appear in
the [Alert] box, which is at the bottom right corner on the screen. An audible alarm is
additionally generated for emergencies, alarms and warnings.
In addition to the alert message and alert state icon, the [Alert] box has the buzzer stop
button and provides access to the [Alert List] and [Alert Log].
Alert
state
icon
152
Wheel Over Line
Alert message
(Number and name of alert)
Buzzer stop button

(Click to stop buzzer.)
Alert List/Alert Log button

(Right click to select.)
Alert state icon: The state of an alert is shown with an icon. See page 20-4.
Alert message: The name and number of all active alerts appear in the message area, with the alert of the highest priority on top always. The color of both the message
and the background change according to alert priority and alert state. See the table on
the next page.
An alert can be acknowledged from the [Alert] box or [Alert List]. An alert remains in
the [Alert] box and [Alert List] until it is acknowledged and rectified. See section 20.4.
Alert List/Alert Log button: Right click to select the [Alert List] or [Alert Log]. The
background color of the button is light blue when the log or list is open. See sections
20.5 and 20.6 for a description of the list and log.
Buzzer stop button: Click to temporarily silence the buzzer, which sounds against
alarms, emergency, and warnings. See page 20-4.
20-2
20. ALERTS
Alert message display format
Alert indication
156
Sensor Failure
Priority of
alert
Alert state
Display state
Emergency, - Not acknowledged, Not rectified. Black characters on red

Alarm
OR
background, flashes
- Not acknowledged, Rectified.
every 0.5 s.
Displayed
alternately
Red characters on
gray background.
156
Sensor Failure
156
Sensor Failure
Emergency, Acknowledged, Not rectified.

Alarm
008
Fan2 No Rotati..
Warning
Red characters on
gray background.
- Not acknowledged, Not rectified. Black characters on

OR
yellow-orange
- Not acknowledged, Rectified.
background, flashes
every 0.5 s.
Displayed
alternately
Yellow-orange
characters on
gray background.
008
Fan2 No Rotati..
008
Fan2 No Rotati..
362
Wind Sensor 3..
Warning
Acknowledged, Not rectified.
Yellow-orange
characters on
gray background.
Caution
Not rectified.
Yellow characters on
gray background.
Emergency, Acknowledged, Rectified.

Alarm,
Warning
No display.
Caution
No display.
Rectified.
20-3
20. ALERTS
Alert state icons

The table shows the icons used to indicate the different alert states for the emergency,
alarm, warning and caution alerts.
Icon
Alert state
Icon description
Alert priority: Emergency, Alarm
Not acknowledged, Not rectified Red triangle with black loudspeaker in center
of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s.
Not acknowledged, Not rectified Red triangle with crossed out black loudspeaker
Buzzer temporarily silenced.
in center of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s.
Acknowledged, Not rectified
Red triangle with black exclamation point in

center of triangle.
Not acknowledged, Rectified
Red triangle with black check mark in

center of triangle. Lights 3 s, off 1 s, repeat.
Alert priority: Warning

Not acknowledged, Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with black loudspeaker in
center of circle. Flashing every 0.5 s.
Not acknowledged, Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with crossed out black
Buzzer temporarily silenced
loudspeaker in center of circle. Flashing every
0.5 s.
Yellow-orange circle with black exclamation

point in center of circle.
Yellow-orange circle with black check mark

in center of circle. Lights 3 s, off 1 s, repeat.
Alert priority: Caution

Caution
Steadily displayed yellow square with black

exclamation point in center of square.
Buzzer stop button

The color of both the background and the icon change according to alert state.
Button state
Description
No alert generated. The background is grey and the icon is greyed
out.
An emergency, alarm or warning is being acknowledged. The background is grey and the icon is white.
Button clicked to silence buzzer temporarily. The background is lightblue and the icon is black.
20-4
20. ALERTS
20.3
How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer for an

Alarm or Warning
When the buzzer for an alarm or warning sounds, you can temporarily silence it by doing one of the following:
Click the buzzer stop button in the [Alert] box.
In the [Alert List], click the [Silence] button.
The buzzer stops and the appearance of the alert state icon changes. An alert message remains n the [Alert] box and [Alert] list until acknowledged and rectified. The
alert for the alarm or warning sounds again if not acknowledged within 30 seconds.
20.4
How to Acknowledge an Alarm or Warning

When an alarm or warning is generated, the buzzer sounds and the name of the alert
appears and flashes in the [Alert] box and [Alert List]. To acknowledge the alert, do
one of the following:
Operate the ALARM ACK key on a Control Unit.
In the [Alert] box or [Alert List], click the alert name.
When acknowledged, the buzzer stops and the flashing of the alert name stops. The
state of the alert changes and the alert priority changes as shown below
Priority of
Alert state
alert
1 Emergency, Not acknowledged, Not rectified
Alarm
Priority no.
High
2 Warning
3
Emergency,
Alarm
4 Warning
5
Low
Not acknowledged, Not rectified
Emergency, Acknowledged, Not rectified

Alarm
6 Warning
7 Caution
Not rectified
Unacknowledged warning alerts

If the Warning alert 150 "Early Course Change Indication" or 151 "Actual Course
Change Indication") is not acknowledged within 30 seconds, then the priority changes
to Alarm. If a Warning (other than Alert 150 and 151) is not acknowledged within
60seconds, the warning is generated again.
20-5
20. ALERTS
Category of alert and place of alert acknowledgement

The place of alert acknowledgement depends on the category of the alert.
Category
A
B
C
20.5
Where the alert is generated

Equipment that generated the alert.
Equipment and AMS* (Alert Management System) *No use
IAS (Integrated Automation System)
generated engine alert
Place of alert
acknowledgement
Equipment that generated the alert.
Equipment that generated the alert or
AMS.
Alert List
The [Alert List] displays all active alerts, with unacknowledged alerts at the top, in priority order. To display the list, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the [Alert]
box then select [Alert List Window]. The ZDA sentence is required to display the time
in the list.
The list shows
Alert no.
Alert text
Source of alert
Time (UTC) alert was generated

Time (UTC) alert was acknowledged
Details about the alert selected
Filter
Alert details
Silence buzzer
Alert no.
Alert text
Source
Time
ACKed
Time
generated
Alert info icon
The background color of an unacknowledged emergency or alarm is red and flashing

and unacknowledged warning is yellow-orange and flashing. An acknowledged alert
is displayed steadily, in red for emergency or alarm and yellow-orange for warning. A
caution is displayed steadily in yellow always.
20-6
20. ALERTS
The [Filter] checkboxes at the top of the window let you select what alerts to view.
Check or uncheck the boxes to show or hide the corresponding alerts.
To find details about an alert, click the applicable alert info icon at the left side of the
window to show the details in the [Detail] box at the top of the window. The box shows
the reason for the alert, how to handle the alert, etc.
An individual emergency, alarm or warning can be acknowledged by clicking it.
The [Silence] button silences the buzzer.
How the alert list is updated after acknowledgement, rectification

When you acknowledge an alert, its display method on the [Alert] list changes according to alert category and alert state. Acknowledged and rectified alerts are immediately
removed from the list.
No.
1
2
3
Alert
priority
Emergency,
Alarm
Warning
Display after
acknowledgement
Display after
rectifying
Alert state
Emergency,
Alarm
Warning
Caution
Not rectified
10
Emergency,
Alarm
Acknowledged, Rectified
Acknowledged, Rectified
Rectified
9
10
Caution
20-7
20. ALERTS
20.6
Alert Log
The [Alert Log] stores and displays the latest 10,000 alerts. To display the log, rightclick the [Alert List/Alert Log] button then select [Alert Log Window]. The log shows the
following information for each alert:
Priority of alert (Emergency, Alarm, Warning, Caution)

Category of alert (A, B or C)
Alert description (alert no., alert text)
Source of alert
Occurred Time (UTC)

ACKed Time (UTC)
Rectified Time (UTC)
Alert details
You can select what priority and category of alerts to display with the [Priority] and
[Category] filters at the top of the list. The list can be sorted by [Priority], [Cat.], [Description] or Time (Occurred, Rectified, ACKed). Click the corresponding column title
to sort accordingly. To find information about an alert, select it to show the information
in the [Detail] box. To search the log, enter text in the [Log Search] box then click the
[Find] button. You can save the contents of the log to a USB flash memory, in .dat format, by clicking the [Export Log] button.
Priority
filter
Category
filter
Category
Alert text
Priority
Occured
time
Source
Alert no.
Alert Details
20.7
Alert Reception from Connected Sensors

An "ALR receive and ACK transmit" communication is available for every serial line
input. The ALR message from the sensor includes information about alerts from the
sensor, and is presented though the normal alert system. When you acknowledge an
alert, an ACK message is sent to the sensor to do remote acknowledge.
This interface is based on IEC 61162-1 and IEC 80/520/INF.
20-8
20. ALERTS
20.8
List of Alerts
Below is a list of all available alerts and their default priorities. The priority of Alerts 620
to 638 can be switched between Caution and Warning on the [Chart Alert] page. See
section 8.1.2.
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
070
071
072
073
074
Text
Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering
LCD Unit Lifetime Over
High Temperature Inside Monitor
Fan1 No Rotation
Fan2 No Rotation
Fan3 No Rotation
Fan4 No Rotation
RS485 Communication Timeout
No Signal
Sentence Syntax Error
LCD Unit Lifetime Over
High Temperature Inside Monitor
Fan1 No Rotation
Fan2 No Rotation
Fan3 No Rotation
Fan4 No Rotation
No Signal
Sentence Syntax Error
Main Monitor COM Timeout
Sub Monitor COM Timeout
Sensor Adapter 1 COM Timeout
RCU 1 COM Timeout
RCU 2 COM Timeout
RCU 3 COM Timeout
EC-3000 CPU Temp High
EC-3000 GPU Temp High
Default
priority
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
20-9
20. ALERTS
No.
075
076
077
078
079
080
082
083
084
086
087
088
089
090
094
095
096
097
098
099
150
151
152
153
154
156
158
159
170
171
172
235
236
237
255
256
257
258
259
260
272
273
274
275
277
278
279
280
20-10
Text
EC-3000 CPU Board Temp High
EC-3000 Remote 1 Temp High
EC-3000 Remote 2 Temp High
EC-3000 CPU Fan Rotation Speed Lowering
EC-3000 Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering
EC-3000 Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering
EC-3000 CPU Fan No Rotation
EC-3000 CPU Fan1 No Rotation
EC-3000 CPU Fan2 No Rotation
EC-3000 CPUboard 5V Power Error
EC-3000 CPUboard 3.3V Power Error
EC-3000 CPUboard 12V Power Error
EC-3000 CPUboard Battery Power Error
EC-3000 CPUboard Core Power Error
Early Course Change Indication
Actual Course Change Indication
Wheel Over Line
Track Control Stop
Position Monitor
Sensor Failure
Course Difference
Low Speed Alarm
Positioning System Failure
Crossing Safety Contour
Off Track Alarm
Echo Sounder 1 COM Error
Gyro 1 COM Error
Gyro 2 COM Error
Gyro 3 COM Error
Gyro 4 COM Error
Gyro 5 COM Error
Backup Navigator
UTC Time Not Available
Depth(Bow) Not Available
Depth(Midship) Not Available
Depth(Stern) Not Available
Wind Speed/Direction Not Available
STW Not Available
COG/SOG Not Available
SDME 1 COM Error
Default
priority
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Warning
Warning
Alarm
Alarm
Warning
Alarm
Warning
Alarm
Warning
Alarm
Alarm
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Alarm
Warning
Caution
Caution
Caution
Warning
Caution
Warning
Caution
20. ALERTS
No.
281
282
285
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
330
331
360
361
362
370
371
380
390
391
Text
SDME 2 COM Error
SDME 3 COM Error
Heading Magnetic Not Available
EPFS 1 COM Error
EPFS 2 COM Error
EPFS 3 COM Error
EPFS 4 COM Error
EPFS 5 COM Error
EPFS 6 COM Error
EPFS 7 COM Error
EPFS 8 COM Error
EPFS 9 COM Error
EPFS 10 COM Error
Rudder 1 COM Error
Rudder 2 COM Error
Rudder 3 COM Error
HCS 1 COM Error
HCS 2 COM Error
VDR COM Error
BNWAS COM Error
Other Sensor 1 COM Error
EC-3000 Ch.01 COM Timeout
Double Gyro Status Conflict
Select Gyro Status Missing
Wind Sensor 1 COM Error
Water Current COM Error
Water Temp COM Error
AIS COM Error
NAVTEX COM Error
ROT Gyro 1 COM Error
Default
priority
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Warning
Warning
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Warning
Caution
Caution
20-11
20. ALERTS
No.
392
393
400
401
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
450
451
453
469
470
472
473
474
475
485
495
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
539
20-12
Text
Network Printer Not Available
Local Printer Not Available
Heading Sensor Not Available
Gyro CORR. Source Change
SDME Sensor Not Available
WGS84 Not Used
Datum Change
Position Source Change
Heading Source Change
COG/SOG Source Change
CTW/STW Source Change
Depth Limit
Anchor Watch Error
TT CPA/TCPA
TT Lost
REF Target Lost
AIS New Target
AIS Target Display 95%
AIS Target Display 100%
AIS Target Capacity 95%
AIS Target Activate 95%
AIS Target Activate 100%
AIS CPA/TCPA
AIS Lost
AIS Message Received
Default
priority
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Warning
Caution
Warning
Warning
Caution
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Alarm
Warning
Alarm
Warning
Warning
Warning
Caution
Warning
Caution
Warning
Caution
Warning
Alarm
Warning
Caution
20. ALERTS
No.
541
542
543
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
640
652
665
667
675
690
691
692
693
820
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
871
872
873
Text
AIS Message Transmit Error
AIS Transmitting
No CPA/TCPA for AIS
User Chart Danger Area
Traffic Separation Zone
Inshore Traffic Zone
Restricted Area
Caution Area
Military Practice Area
Anchorage Area
Marine Farm / Aquaculture
PSSA Area
Areas to be Avoided
Buoy
UKC Limit
Non-official ENC
No Vector Chart
Not Up-to-date
Permit Expired
Chart align: Over 30 min
Last WPT Approach
Autopilot Mode Conflict
AP Receive Error
Use MAN Steering
TC Start Timeout
RM Stop - Exceed Max XTE
RM Stop - Disconnect Sensors
RM Stop - Other Causes
NAVTEX Message Received
EPFS 1 Sensor Banned
SDME 1 Sensor Banned
Gyro 1 Sensor Banned
Default
priority
Caution
Caution
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Caution
Alarm
Alarm
Caution
Warning
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
20-13
20. ALERTS
No.
874
875
881
882
883
891
900
901
902
903
904
Text
ROT Gyro 1 Sensor Banned
Water Current Sensor Banned
No Filter Source of Position
No Filter Source of COG/SOG
No Filter Source of CTW/STW
No Filter Source of Heading
No Filter Source of ROT
Default
priority
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Note: The priority of alerts 620 to 638 can be switched between Warning and Caution.
See the installation manual for details.
20-14
21. PARAMETERS
21.1
Ship and Route Parameters

The purpose of the ship and route parameters is set the basic parameters for the ship.
These parameters are relative to ship steering and they are very important to get correct function of the integrated navigation system. They must be maintained carefully.
Modification requires a good knowledge of the parameters' importance.
Open the menu and select [Ship & Route Parameters] from the [General] menu to
show the [Ship & Route] page. Set each item referring to the description below.
Ship Parameters description

[MAX Speed]: Maximum speed the ship can do.
[MAX Height]: Maximum height of ship above sea level.
[MAX Draught]: Maximum draught of ship.
Route Parameters description

[MAX ROT]*: The maximum rate of turn of the ship. Set at installation.
[WPT Approach]*: The alert time before reaching the wheel over point.
[WPT Prewarning]*: The alert time before reaching the wheel over point.
[Default Line Radius]: Define the default value of radius between waypoints during
automatic route steering.
[Default CH Limit]: Define the default value of channel limit.
[Default Safety Margin]: Define the default value of extension for channel limits to be
checked against chart alerts.
* Set at installation and cannot be changed by the operator.
21-1
21. PARAMETERS
21.2
Forwarding Distances
The forwarding distances are the distances the ship travels straight after the steering
command is given to the autopilot. These distances change according to the radius of
turn.
The forwarding distances are entered at installation and cannot be changed by the operator. However, the operator can view the forwarding distances settings on the [Forwarding Distance] display ([MENU][General][Navigation Parameter]).
Note: These are the port side values. Starboard side values can also be shown. Contact a FURUNO dealer for details.
21-2
21. PARAMETERS
21.3
Cost Parameters
The cost parameters are used in the optimization calculation. Therefore define these
parameters before doing the calculation.
Open the menu and select [Cost Parameters] from the [General] menu to show the
[Cost Parameters] page. Set each item according to ships plan, etc.
At the [Cost] window, enter the cost/hour and cost/ton for heavy fuel oil and diesel oil.
At the [Fuel Consumption] window, define the fuel consumption figures for up to 12
different speeds. Before entering the data, plot the data on a graph, like the one shown
below. Use a second graph if, for example, diesel oil consumption is different from that
of heavy fuel oil. Reset the power to effect the settings.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
7
6
5
TON/h
4
3
2
1
0
0
10
12
14
16
20
SHIPS SPEED (kn)
21-3
21. PARAMETERS
21.4
Instant Track Parameters

The instant track feature can create, in route monitoring, a simple route in the following
situations:
Return to the monitored route when the vessel goes outside the channel limits.
Temporarily deviate from the monitored route (avoid collision, etc.).
How to set instant track parameters

Set the parameters for the instant track ([MENU][General][Ship & Route Parameters][Instant Track] tab).
[Delay before Initiating First Turn]: Set the number of seconds (30 - 600 seconds)
to wait before initiating the first turn in the simple route.
[Turn Radius]: Set the turning radius (0.02 - 3.00 NM) to use between waypoints (four
waypoints) in the simple route.
[Channel Limit for Track Control]: Set the channel limit (10 - 1852 m) for the instant
track, automatically or manually. The [Auto] setting uses the channel limit set for the
monitored route.
[Route Check Strictly]: Check to prevent monitoring of instant track when a chart
alert (alarm or warning) is found through the route check. Uncheck to monitor instant
track in spite of chart alert found through the route check.
21-4
22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING

DISPLAYS
22.1
Conning Display
The conning display provides relevant sensor information data (including engine data)
from external equipment, on one display to facilitate safe and efficient monitoring. The
ECDIS accepts sensor information data in analog, serial and contact signal formats.
Six sets of conning displays are available, and they are arranged at installation. Consult with the installer of the equipment to decide the content and layout of each display.
To show the conning display, click the [Operating Mode] button on the Status bar to
select [CONNING].
Note: Analog data is shown in the lowest value of the setting range when the data is
not input.
Conning display Status bar (see next page)

05 Mar 2014
UTC
05 Mar 2014
17.5
Pitch And Roll
ROLL
PITCH
3.8
-2
Azimuth
Note: The cursor can be moved between the main monitor and a sub
Cursor
Cursor
Push
scrollwheel
Conning
Sub monitor
ECDIS
Main monitor
22-1
22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS
monitor and vice versa if the sub monitor is configured to show the Conning display.
Push the scrollwheel until the cursor moves to the other monitor.
Conning display Status bar
No.
1
2
3
4
Button
Operating mode
Conning display
sheet
STANDBY
TOOL
Description
Selects the operating mode, ECDIS or CONNING.
Selects the conning display sheet to use, Sheet.1 - Sheet.6. (Sheet name
is decided at installation. Sheet x (x=sheet number) is the default sheet
name.)
Goes to the Standby mode. See section 1.4.
Shows, hides the software keyboard; adjusts the volume of the key beep
and audio alert.
Shows, hides
software keyboard
Adjusts volume of
key beep, audio
alert
Volume setting
To adjust a
volume, put
cursor in
applicable
box.
Click up arrow
to raise volume;
down arrow to
lower volume.
Selects a display palette. See section 1.7.
Adjusts the brilliance of a FURUNO or Hatteland monitor. See section 1.8.
Takes a screenshot. See section 1.14.
Displays AMS and conning software version and system information. The
information shown in the figure may differ from your own. For System and
System 2 see section 1.17.
Version nos.
subject to change.
9
10
11
22-2
Date
Time
See section 1.13.

See section 1.13.
Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. See section 2.1.2.
Conning display examples

Six conning display sheets are available, and the content, layout and name of each
sheet can be customized, by the service technician. Below are some examples conning display sheets.
Example 1 (General navigation)
22-3
Example 4 (General Navigation)
22-4
Example 5 (All waters, navigation)
Example 6 (All waters, harbor)
22-5
Example 7 (Ocean, navigation)
Example 8 (Ocean, harbor)
22-6
Example 9 (Offshore Service Vessel, Fore 1)
Example 10 (Offshore Service Vessel, Fore 2)
22-7
Example 11 (Offshore Service Vessel, Aft1)
Example 12 (Offshore Service Vessel, Aft2)
22-8
22.2
Mini Conning Display

The mini conning display, available in the Voyage navigation mode, provides various
navigation information and is set during the installation. The display example below
shows heading, doppler log speed and rudder angle. To show or hide the mini conning
display, click the [Mini Conning] button on the InstantAccess bar.
The location of the display can be changed. Right click the mini-conning display to
show the context-sensitive menu. Click the location desired: [Left Top], [Left Middle],
[Left Bottom], [Right Top], [Right Middle] or [Right Bottom].
22-9
22-10
23. SETTINGS MENU

The [Settings] menu provides file import, export and maintenance, testing facilities
(display, keyboard, self test), data sharing, customizing, screenshot processing, user
default restoration, and CCRP selection.
23.1
How to Access the Settings Menu

Click the Settings button (
) on the Status bar then select [Settings]. The right
message appears.
Click the [OK] button to show the [Settings]
menu then click the [OK] button.
For the service

technician
Playback data
No.
Name
Description
Pages (menus)
A total of eleven menus. See the descriptions in this chapter.
Menu area
The menu for the selected page appears here.
Page selection
buttons
Click to scroll the menus.
To open a page, use the page selection buttons to select a page then click the tab of
the page required. The color of the border of the page selected is light blue.
23-1
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.2
File Export
The [File Export] page exports setting data, route/user charts, and playback data*, to
a USB flash memory. Data is exported in .zip files.
* Disable AMS to enable export.
Playback data
Play
No.
Name
Description
Data selection
Check the data to export, setting data, route/user chart, and

playback data.
(The size of the log data is large, thus some time may be required to export the data.)
[Export] button
Click to export all items selected on this menu. The [SAVE

FILE] dialog box appears. Select where to save the data,
then click the [Save] button.
Note 1: The Export button does appear unless an item is checked.

Note 2: The message "Now processing" appears during the exporting, and "File export succeeded." appears upon completion. Click the [OK] button to finish.
23-2
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.3
File Import
The [File Import] page lets you import FMD-3xx0 series created setting data, routes/
user charts, and playback data*, from a USB flash memory.
.*Disable AMS to enable import.
Playback data
No.
Name
Description
Select file to import

button
Click to show the [OPEN FILE] dialog box, where you can
select the file to import.
Data selection
Check the data to import setting data, route/user chart, and

playback data.
[Import] button
Click to import the objects selected. The message shown right

appears.
Following data will be replaced with the imported

data, and system will reboot automatically.
Please export current data before import if needed.
- Setting data
- Route/User chart
Do you wish to continue?
Note 1: Item 2 does not appear until after a file is selected. Item 3 appears after the
data to import is selected.
Note 2: The message "Now processing" appears during the importing, and the message "File import finished." appears upon completion. Click the [OK] button.
Note 3: The larger the file the more the time required to import the data.
Note 4: The system automatically restarts after setting data is imported.
Note 5: If importing could not be completed, first check if the USB flash memory is
properly inserted. If inserted properly, try importing again.
23-3
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.4
File Maintenance
The [File Maintenance] page lets you restore the last-saved route/user chart application and Route/user chart system.
No.
Name
Description
Route/User chart
Application backup
Check to restore last-saved route/user chart application.
Route/User chart
System backup
Check to restore last-saved route/user chart system.
[Restore] button
Click to restore item selected.
Note: To restore the route data from the backup data, first check all route data then
do the restore from the latest data.
23-4
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.5
Self Test
The [Self Test] page is mainly for use by the service technician to check the equipment. The ECDIS function is inoperative during the test.
OK
OK
OK
*
*
*
*
*
Function: ecdis,conning,tcs,ams
*Subject to change.
No.
Name
Description
Test results, program numbers
The results of the self test and the program numbers.
[Start] button
Start the self test.
[Stop] button
Stop the self test. (Shown during test.)
23-5
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.6
Data Sharing
The [Data Sharing] page shares the same brilliance setting between main and slave
displays (ECDIS and conning applications).
Data Sharing
Please check items to share between all applications.
Display Settings
Display Brilliance
23-6
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.7
Customize
The [Customize] page lets you set buzzer volume, key beep volume, and scrollwheel
rotation direction.
File Maintenance
No.
Name
Self Test
Data Sharing
Description
Wheel rotation
Set the direction of scrollwheel rotation direction.

Normal: Downward to increase value, upward to decrease
value.
Reverse: Reverse of "Normal".
Key beep volume
Set the volume of the key beep that sounds for correct key
or mouse button operation.
0, no beep; 1, LOW; 2, MID; 3, HIGH
Alert sound volume Set the loudness of the alert buzzer.

1, LOW; 2, MID; 3, HIGH
23-7
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.8
Display Test
The [Display Test] page displays various test patterns to check the FURUNO-supplied
monitor for proper display of colors. Click the [Display Test] button to start the test. The
buzzer sounds at the start of the test.
Self Test
Data Sharing
Left-click to proceed in the numerical order shown below; right click to proceed in reverse order.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Diagonal
(5)
Black
(6)
All colors
(7)
Black
(8)
White
Red
Green
Blue
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
Gray
Red bars
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
Yellow bars
Aqua bars
Purple bars
Gray bars
Green bars
Blue bars
To quit the display test and close the [Settings] menu, press the ESC key on the applicable Control Unit, or click the Exit button on the [Display Test] menu.
23-8
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.9
Keyboard Test
The [Keyboard Test] page checks the controls and keys on the ECDIS Control Unit
and the trackball module on the ECDIS Control Unit and Trackball Control Unit.
Data Sharing
No.
Customize
Name
Display Test
Keyboard Test
Description
EBL, BRILL, GAIN and

VRM
Operate the related controls on the ECDIS

Control Unit. Rotate a control and the window
above the control shows the setting value.
Push a control and the equivalent location on
screen lights in light blue. (The RAIN and SEA
control have no function and the EBL and VRM
controls do not have a push function.)
InstantAccess knob/key
Check the InstantAccess knob and key.

1) Rotate the knob and the setting value appears in the window.
2) Push the knob and the knob lights in light
blue.
3) Push the key and the key lights in light
blue.
No use
Keyboard of the ECDIS

Control Unit
Operate each key. The pressed key lights in

light blue.
Keys of the ECDIS Control

Unit
Operate each key. The pressed key lights in

light-blue.
23-9
23. SETTINGS MENU
No.
23-10
Name
Description
Trackball module
Check the trackball module of a Control Unit:

1) Spin the scrollwheel and rotate the trackball. The indication above the operated
control shows the setting value.
2) Push each button. The window above a
pushed button lights in light blue.
3) Push the scrollwheel. The window above
the wheel lights in light blue.
[Buzzer ON] button
Click the [Buzzer ON] button to sound the

buzzer. The buzzer sounds and the button
flashes (in red). Click the button again to cancel.
[Contact Output] button
Click the [Contact Output] button to output the

System Failure contact signal from the Processor Unit. Click the button again to cancel.
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.10 Screenshots
The [Screenshot] page processes screenshots saved to the SSD.
No.
Name
Description
List
List of screenshots taken. Screenshots are automatically

assigned a file name consisting of the time and date the
screenshot was taken.
Check boxes
Put a checkmark in the box of the screenshot to process.
Preview
Preview of the screenshot selected.
[Delete] button*
Delete the screenshot(s) selected.
[Export] button*
Export selected screenshot(s) to a USB flash memory.
[Apply] button*
Save comment.
Comment box
Enter comment for screenshot. Put a check in appropriate checkbox then enter comment.
* Button does not appear until related action is completed.
23-11
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.10.1 How to export screenshots

You can export screenshots to a USB flash memory as follows:
1. Insert a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Open the [Screenshot] page.
3. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to export.
4. Click the [Export] button.
SAVE FILE

6. Click the [OK] button to export the screenshots selected.
7. If the exporting was successful, a window showing the number of files exported
appears. Click the [OK] button to finish.
23.10.2 How to delete screenshots

1. Select the [Screenshot] page.
2. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to delete. To select all
screenshots, right-click the box to the left of the [Date] column then select [Select
all]. To clear all check marks, select [Clear all].
3. Click the [Delete] button. You are asked "Selected files will be deleted. Do you
wish to continue?"
4. Click the [Yes] button to delete the screenshots selected. The message "File deletion succeeded." appears.
23-12
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.11 User Default

The [User Default] page restores all default settings for the [Chart Display] and [Symbol Display]. Click the [Restore User Setting] button. You are asked "All setting data
will be restored to the default. Do you wish to continue?" appears. Click the [Yes] button to restore default settings and reset the power.
If you require the settings shown below, copy them to a USB flash memory (using the
file export feature), BEFORE restoring user defaults.
Setting data
Route/User chart
23-13
23. SETTINGS MENU
23.12 CCRP
The [CCRP] page provides for selection of CCRP (Consistent Common Reference
Point) and shows the location of various sensors.
No.
23-14
Name
Description
CCRP
Select the CCRP to use in the case of multiple CCRPs.
Display Filter
Check the items to show on the ships graphic.
Ships graphic
Shows the location of the sensors selected at the [Display Filter].
24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic
system. This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting instructions to keep
optimum performance and the longest possible life of the equipment. Before attempting any maintenance or troubleshooting procedure please review the safety information below. If you cannot restore normal operation after following the troubleshooting
procedures, do not attempt to check inside any unit; there are no operator-serviceable
parts inside. Refer any repair work to a qualified technician.
WARNING
24.1
IMPORTANT
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

Do not open the equipment.
Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant

or contact spray to coating or plastic parts.
Only qualified personnel can work

inside the equipment.
Those items contain organic solvents that can

damage coating and plastic parts, especially
plastic connectors.
Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance program should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table
below.
Interval
When needed
3 to 6 months
Check point
Monitor unit and
Processor Unit
Check and measures

Dust or dirt may be removed from a
cabinet with a soft cloth. Water-diluted
mild detergent may be used if desired.
DO NOT use chemical cleaners to
clean the display unit; they may remove paint and markings.
To clean the LCD, wipe the LCD carefully to prevent scratching, using tissue paper and an LCD cleaner. To
remove dirt or salt deposits, use an
LCD cleaner, wiping slowly with tissue
paper so as to dissolve the dirt or salt.
Change paper frequently so the salt or
dirt will not scratch the LCD. Do not
use solvents such as thinner, acetone
or benzene for cleaning. Also, do not
use a degreaser or an antifog solution, as they can strip the coating from
the LCD.
Filter inside Pro- Have a technician clean the filter if it is
cessor Unit
dusty. See section 24.4.
Cabling
Check that all cabling is firmly connected and is not damaged.
Remarks
Do not use chemicalbased cleaners for
cleaning. They can remove paint and markings.
24-1
24.2
How to Replace the Fuse

The fuse in the Processor Unit, Monitor Unit and Sensor Adapter protects those units
from overvoltage (overcurrent) and internal fault. If a unit cannot be turned on, check
if its fuse has blown. If a fuse has blown, find out the cause before replacing the fuse.
If the fuse blows again after replacement, contact your dealer for advice.
WARNING
Use the proper fuse.
Use of a wrong fuse can damage the
equipment or cause fire.
Unit
24-2
Power supply
Type
Code no.
Processor Unit
EC-3000
100-115 VAC
FGMB 125V 10A PBF
000-157-470-10
220-230 VAC
FGMB 250V 5A PBF
000-157-570-10
Monitor Unit MU-190
100-230 VAC
FGBO 250V 1A PBF
000-155-828-10
Monitor Unit MU-231
100-230 VAC
FGBO 250V 1.5A PBF
000-155-833-10
Sensor Adapter
MC-3000S
24 VDC
FGMB 125V 3A PBF
000-157-481-10
24.3
Trackball Maintenance
If the cursor moves abnormally, dust or dirt may be on the trackball. Clean the trackball
as shown below:
1. Turn the retaining ring on the trackball module counterclockwise 45 to unlock it.
Retaining
ring
2. Remove the retaining ring and ball.

3. Clean the ball with a soft, lint-free cloth, then blow carefully into the ball-cage to
dislodge dust and lint.
4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers. If dirty, clean the rollers with a cotton
swab moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol.
5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers.
6. Re-set the ball and retaining ring. Be sure the retaining ring is not inserted reversely.
24.4
How to Clean the Filter in the Processor Unit

Have a qualified technician clean the air inlet filter in the Processor Unit when it becomes dusty. Remove the filter and clean it with water and a mild detergent. Rinse the
filter, allow the filter to dry then return it to the Processor Unit.
Air inlet
Filter
Processor unit, left side
Note 1: Be sure the air inlet is not blocked. A blocked inlet can cause the temperature
to rise inside the cabinet, which can lead to malfunction.
Note 2: The right side of the Processor Unit has an exhaust vent. Remove dust from
the vent as necessary.
24-3
24.5
Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting table below provides common faults and the remedies with which
to restore normal operation.
Troubleshooting
If
power cannot be
turned on
power can be turned

on but nothing appears on the display
then
power connector may have loosened.
ship's mains is off.
fuse has blown.
brilliance is too low.
the ambient temperature is less
than 0C (32F).
the picture freezes

ECDIS internal error
(display is not updated)
message There is
no dongle or an error
has occurred in the
dongle. The system
will automatically
shut down. appears
monitored route is
not displayed
planned route is not

displayed
symbol of user chart

cannot be erased
position cannot be
found
ARCS chart cannot

be displayed
S57 chart cannot be

displayed
past track is not
displayed
monitored user chart

is not displayed on
ECDIS display
24-4
dongle is not connected.

data in the dongle is corrupted.
Remedy
Check connector.
Check power supply.

Replace fuse.
Adjust brilliance.
The heater is warming the Processor Unit. The display appears in
approx. 2 minutes.
Press the power key on a Control
Unit to turn off the power. If the
power does not go off, hold down
the key. Turn on the power again
to restore normal operation.
Connect dongle.
Contact FURUNO for assistance.
route has not been selected.

Select route to monitor.
monitor route has not been select- Open the [Route] page of the
ed to be visible above the chart.
[Symbol Display] menu and check
the monitored route parts to show.
route has not been selected.
Select route as planned.
planned route has not been select- Open [Route] page of [Symbol Dised to be visible above the chart.
play] menu and check the planned
route parts to show.
two or more symbols may be su Do the delete action several times.
perimposed on each other.
position sensor(s) is not selected
Check position sensor selections.
on the [POSN] page.
position sensor is turned off.
Turn on position sensor.
sensor cable has loosened.
Check cable.
no ARCS chart for area.
Open ARCS chart from the [Manage Charts] dialog box.
Connect dongle.
license has expired.
Renew ARCS license.
no ENC chart for area.
Open S57 chart from [Manage
Charts] dialog box.
Connect dongle.
past track is not selected to be vis- Open [Tracking] page of [Symbol
ible.
Display] menu and select [Own
Ship Past Tracks] to [CCRP], [Primary], [Secondary] or [Pivot] as
appropriate.
user chart is not selected to be vis- Open [Mariner] page of [Symbol
ible.
Display] menu and select parts to
show.
If
route monitoring is
stopped
user chart is not displayed on radar

overlay
message "Nearing
memory usage limit.
Click the Restart
button to restart the
system to prevent
trouble."
appears
message "Nearing
memory usage limit.
If you will start monitoring, click the Restart button to restart
the system to prevent trouble during
route monitoring."
message "Memory
usage limit reached.
Click the Restart
button to restart the
system to prevent
trouble."
appears.
both the operating
mode buttons [ECDIS] and [CONNING] are yellow
24.6
then
Alert 691: RM Stop - Exceed Max
XTE. Own ship is too far away
from the route.
Alert 692: No Valid Sensor Data.
ECDIS internal error.
Alert 693: RM Stop - Other
Causes. Required data (position,
SOG/COG) not found.
user chart is not selected in Voyage navigation mode.
the memory usage limit for software is close to capacity. Performance may be affected.
Remedy
Steer the ship back to the route
then restart route monitoring.
Request service.
Check sensor connections.
Select user chart in Voyage navigation mode.

If you need to save your work, click
the [Later] button then reset the
power. If you dont need to save
your work, click the [Restart] button.
Note that the notice does not appear in the Conning mode.
Click the [Restart] button.
the memory usage limit for software is reached. Performance

may be affected.
Click the [Restart] button to reset

the power. No other operations are
available other than restart.
Note that the notice does not appear in the Conning mode.
Stop all operations and reset the

power.
Consumable Parts
The table below lists the consumable parts in the Processor Unit, Sensor Adapters
and Monitor Units. Replace the parts before their expected expirations.
Unit
Processor Unit
EC-3000
Sensor Adapter
MC-3000S
Sensor Adapter
MC-3010A
Monitor Unit
Part
CPU Fan
Power Fan
Chassis Fan
MC-CS Board
Type
109R0612G429
109P0612H761
109P0612H761
24P0114
Life
8.5 years
8.5 years
8.5 years
8.5 years
MC-ANLG Board
24P0115
7.0 years
MU-190
MU-231
BEZEL (19) & LCD ASSEMBLY

BEZEL (23) & LCD ASSEMBLY
50,000 hours
50,000 hours
24-5
24.7
Color Differentiation Test for S57 Charts

The color differentiation checks if the ECDIS monitor can distinguish between the various color-coded areas, lines and symbols.
1. Click the [Chart INFO] and [Chart 1] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the
[ECDIS Chart 1] menu.
2. Click [Color diagram] to show the color test diagram.
If the colors are correct, the diagonal line will be distinguishable from its surroundings,
at any brilliance setting.
24-6
25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

(option)
25.1
What is an Alert Management System (AMS)?

An AMS warns the navigator, with audio-visual indications, when safety parameters
are violated or there is a failure of connected equipment. The AMS also transfers unacknowledged alerts to the BNWAS.
The main functions of the AMS are
Organize and track alerts that occur on the vessel. The AMS displays the alerts on
its HMI system and sounds a buzzer when an alert condition occurs.
Acknowledge alerts.
Transfer alerts not acknowledged within 30 seconds to the BNWAS. (The BNWAS
then activates the Emergency Call to inform appropriate officers quarters of unacknowledged alarms.)
25.2
System Configuration
Refer to the system configuration for the ECDIS - the AMS is an integral part of the
ECDIS.
25.3
Alert Definition, Priority and Category of Alerts

Alert is a generic name for an emergency, alarm, warning or caution generated by
an equipment connected to the AMS or the ECDIS.
Priority of alerts
Alerts have one of four priorities:
Priority of
alert
Emergency
Alarm
Warning
Caution
Description
Immediate danger to human life or to the ship and its machinery exists
and that immediate action must be taken. Emergency alerts are handled
the same as alarms.
Alarms indicate situations or conditions which require immediate attention, decision and (if necessary) action by the bridge team to avoid any
kind of hazardous situation and to maintain the safe navigation of the ship.
Conditions or situations which require immediate attention for precautionary reasons, to make the bridge team aware of conditions which are not
immediately hazardous, but may become so.
Awareness of a condition which continues to require attention out of the
ordinary consideration of the situation or of given information.
25-1
25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option)
Category of alerts
Each alert is further put into the category A or category B.
Category
of alert
Description
Category A
Category A alerts include alerts indicating

Danger of collision
Danger of grounding
Category B
Category B alerts are alerts where no additional information for decision

support is necessary besides the information that is shown at the central
alert management HMI. Category B alerts are all alerts not falling under
category A.
Category and location of alert acknowledgement

A category A alert cannot be acknowledged at the AMS; it must be acknowledged
at the equipment that generated the alert.
A category B alert can be acknowledged at either the AMS or the equipment that
generated the alert.
All caution alerts are a part of category B. Caution alerts neither sound the buzzer
nor require acknowledgement.
Category A alert:
External
Equipment
AMS
Alert generated
Acknowledge: possible
Acknowledge: not possible
Category B alert:
External
Equipment
25-2
AMS
Alert generated
25.4
Alert Category and Alert acknowledgement

From Connected Equipment, AMS
Category A alert
Acknowledged from the equipment that generated the alert: The alert is acknowledged at both the equipment and the AMS and their buzzers stop.
Acknowledged from the AMS: The alert is acknowledged at neither the equipment
that generated the alert nor the AMS, however their buzzers stop. (The buzzer sounds
again at both locations if the alert is not acknowledged within 30 seconds at the equipment that generated the alert.)
Category B alert
Acknowledged from the equipment that generated the alert or AMS: The alert is
acknowledged at both the equipment and the AMS and their buzzers stop.
25.5
How to Acknowledge an Alert, Stop the Buzzer

From the AMS
There are two methods to acknowledge an alert and/or stop the buzzer from the AMS:
Trackball: Click the alert name on any window in the AMS.
ALARM ACK key: Push the key on the connected Control Unit.
25.6
About the ALR and ACK Sentences

The function of the AMS is to coordinate exchange of alerts and acknowledgement of
alerts between equipment connected to the AMS.
This AMS is designed according to the IECs recommendations for Alert Handling (80/
520/INF). The figure below shows the transition of the Alert status at the sensor.
NO ACTIVE ALERTS
Send no-alerts message
(max. 60 seconds between)
Yes
(send event; clear list)
New alert
(Send event; create list)
No
(Send event;
update list)
New alert
(Send event; update list)
Alert reset.
Last in list?
ACTIVE ALERT(s)
Send alerts-list message
(max. 60 seconds between)
Change in alert ACK state
(Send event; update list)
25-3
Device states
A sensor has two main states, N and A.
State N: No active alerts. The device should send a "no-alerts" message with an interval of a maximum of 60 seconds. This message informs the AMS that the sensor
has no active alerts.
State A: The device has one or more active alerts, of which zero or more may have
been acknowledged and the rest (possibly zero) are unacknowledged. In this state,
the device shall send all active alerts at an interval not greater than 60 seconds. When
multiple alerts are active in the sensor, all active alerts are transmitted as a list" of
alerts (alert-list message). In response to the list, applicable sensors output the ALR
sentence, the content of which is defined in IEC 80/250/INF.
In addition to the periodic transmission mentioned, the sensor sends an Alert message
(ALR) to the AMS when an alert is generated in the sensor in the following instances:
A new alert is generated in the sensor.
An existing alert is acknowledged in the sensor, either by the sensor itself or by remote
acknowledgement by the AMS.
An existing alert condition becomes non-active.
No-alerts message
The no-alerts message to informs the AMS that the sensor has no active alerts. It is
sent at an interval not greater than 60 seconds, and may be used to clear the AMS
alert list. This message is sent as an ALR message, without a time stamp and includes
a V flag in the both the alert condition and acknowledgement field. The no-alerts
message is as shown below.
$--ALR,,,V,V,*hh
The alert-list message

The alerts-list message periodically refreshes the alert list in order for personnel to
have up-to-the-minute list of active alerts. The alert / alert list message is sent with an
interval not greater than 60 seconds. The alert / alert list message consists of the
same message(s) sent when the corresponding event occurred, but all active alerts
shall be reported. An example of two alert-list messages are shown below.
$--ALR,123456,123,A,A,Battery power in use*hh<CR><LF>
$--ALR,130507,456,A,V,Self test failure*hh<CR><LF>
ACK sentence
The AMS sends the ACK sentence to all sensors to acknowledge alerts. The sentence
format is as shown below, where xxx is the Alert no. generated by each sensor.
$--ACK,xxx*hh<CR><LF>
This AMS supports only the single alert acknowledgement as defined by IEC 80/520/
INF. In this case, it is necessary to send an alarm acknowledge message, the format
which is shown below, from the external from the AMS to the sensor. The message is
sent at an interval not greater than 60 seconds.
$--ACK,*hh<CR><LF>
25-4
25.7
How an Alert is Transferred to the BNWAS

Alerts are transferred to the BNWAS in the following sequence.
Note: For a DNV class vessel, only category A alerts are transferred.
1) An alert generated by an equipment connected to the AMS is transferred to the
BNWAS if it is not acknowledged within 30 seconds.
2) The BNWAS sends the Emergency Call to applicable Cabin Panels in living quarters and general quarters, to inform personnel of an unacknowledged alert.
To stop both the Emergency Call and the transfer of the alert, do as follows:
Category A alert: Acknowledge the alert at the equipment that generated the alert.
Category B alert: Acknowledge the alert at the equipment that generated the alert
or the AMS.
Connected
equipment
AMS
Alert generated.
Alert is transferred if not
acknowledged within 30
seconds.
BNWAS
Emergency Call sent to Cabin Panels.
Cabin
Panel
Cabin
Panel
Cabin
Panel
Cabin
Panel
Cabin
Panel
25-5
25.8
Change of Priority for Unacknowledged Warning

IMO MSC302(87) requires that a Warning be changed to an Alarm if it is not acknowledged within 60 seconds. The change of priority feature is enabled or disabled during
the installation.
Acknowledge
60 seconds
Not acknowledged
A Warning
is generated.
25.9
The Warning becomes an Alarm and

is then transferred to the BNWAS.
How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer

The FMD-3xx0 series and the FCR-2xx9 series are compliant with IEC 61924-2, which
has a provision to allow the temporary silencing of the buzzer for 30 seconds against
any alert, from the equipment that generated the alert or from the AMS. The buzzer
again sounds after 30 seconds if the alert is not acknowledged.
How category A alerts are treated at the AMS

The buzzer given against a category A alert can be temporarily silenced at the AMS,
by clicking the alert on any AMS mode window (see section 25.13.2) or pushing the
ALARM ACK key on a Control Unit. However, the alert must be acknowledged from
the equipment that generated the alert. The AMS indicates acknowledgement after
the alert is acknowledged at the equipment.
25.10 Buzzer Patterns

The AMS has two buzzer patterns, legacy and IEC 61924-2, and one is chosen at installation.
Legacy buzzer pattern

This buzzer sounds continuously until an emergency/alarm or warning is acknowledged.
Acknowledge
The buzzer sounds continuously.

Emergency/Alarm or
Warning generated
25-6
IEC 61924-2 buzzer pattern

This buzzer complies with INS regulations. There are two types of buzzer patterns,
Emergency/Alarm and Warning.
Emergency/Alarm: The buzzer sounds three times in 7-second intervals.
Emergency/Alarm generated.
ACK
7 seconds
Buzzer ON
Buzzer muted
Time
Buzzer OFF
0.5 seconds
IEC 61924-2 mode, emergency/alarm priority buzzer

Warning: The buzzer sounds twice and is then muted.
ACK
Warning generated.
Buzzer muted
Buzzer ON
Time
Buzzer OFF
0.5 seconds
IEC 61924-2 mode, warning priority buzzer
25.11 Alert Priority, Alert State

There are seven priority numbers according to the priority of the alert and alert state.
Priority of
Alert state
alert
1 Emergency, Not acknowledged, Not rectified
Alarm
Priority no.
High
2 Warning
3
Emergency,
Alarm
4 Warning
5
Low
Emergency, Acknowledged, Not rectified

Alarm
6 Warning
7 Caution
Not rectified
25-7
25.12 Alert Icons

The alert icons show the state of all alerts.
Icon
Alert state
Icon description
Alert priority: Emergency, Alarm
Not acknowledged/Not rectified Red triangle with black loudspeaker in center
of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s.
Not acknowledged/Not rectified Red triangle with crossed out black loudspeaker
in center of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s.
Acknowledged/Not rectified
Red triangle with black exclamation point in

center of triangle.
Not acknowledged/Rectified
Red triangle with black check mark in

center of triangle. Lights 3 s, off 1 s, repeat.
Acknowledge not allowed for

alarm
Red triangle with black cross in middle of

triangle. Presented with first two icons above.
Alert priority: Warning

Not acknowledged/Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with black loudspeaker in
center of circle. Flashing every 0.5 s.
Not acknowledged/Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with crossed out black
loudspeaker in center of circle. Flashing every
0.5 s.
Acknowledged/Not rectified
Yellow-orange circle with black exclamation

point in center of circle.
Not acknowledged/Rectified
Yellow-orange circle with black check mark

in center of circle. Lights 3 s, off 1 s, repeat.
Acknowledge not allowed for

warning
Yellow-orange circle with a cross in middle of

circle. Presented with first two warning icons
above.
Alert priority: Caution

Caution
25-8
Steadily displayed yellow square with black

exclamation point in center of square.
25.13 AMS Mode Operations

25.13.1 How to select the AMS mode
Select [AMS] with the operating mode button (the leftmost button on the Status bar) to
activate the AMS mode. The configuration of the button depends on the monitor configuration.
MONITOR
(ECDIS, Conning
or AMS)
ECDIS
ECDIS
.
CONNING
EC-3000
AMS
Single monitor configuration and operating mode button
MAIN MONITOR
(ECDIS only)
SUB MONITOR
(AMS or Conning)
CONNING
CONNING
EC-3000
AMS
Dual monitor configuration and operating mode button
25-9
25.13.2 AMS mode windows

The AMS mode shows alert information in three windows: [ACTIVE ALERT], [ALERT
LOG] and [ALERT LIST]. The windows can be selected with the corresponding buttons on the Status bar. Alerts can be acknowledged from any window, by clicking the
alert.
Window selection buttons
Operating buttons, indications (See page 22-2.)
ACTIVE ALERT window

The [ACTIVE ALERT] window shows the status of all active alerts. A maximum of 20
alerts is shown per page. When there are more than 20 active alerts, a new page is
created to hold the new alerts. You can move between pages with the arrow buttons.
The background color of an unacknowledged emergency or alarm flashes red and an
unacknowledged warning flashes yellow-orange. The text of an acknowledged emergency or alarm is red and the text of an acknowledged warning is yellow-orange. The
text of a caution is yellow. Category B alerts can be acknowledged by clicking the alert.
The buzzer for category A alerts can be temporarily stopped by clicking the alert; but,
acknowledgement must be done from the equipment that generated the alert.
See the next page for a description of the contents of the list.
25-10
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item name
Priority Filter
Description
Filter the list by alert priority, [Emergency], [Alarm], [Warning],
[Caution].
Source Filter
Filter the list by the source of the alert, [Navigation], [Communication], [External].
Category Filter
Filter the list by category, A, B or C.
Decision Support box
Displays the reason for an alert and troubleshooting tip when an
information icon is clicked.
[], []
Select the page to display, when there are more than 20
(page selection buttons) active alerts. Greyed out when inoperative.
Alert Icon description
Provides a description of the alert icons.
button
Emergency/Alarm
icons (Red)
Warning icon
(Yellow-orange)
Caution icon
(yellow)
Alarm icon (Red)
Warning icon
(Yellow-orange)
7
8
9
10
11
12
Alert state icon

Alert Text
Source
Occurred Time(UTC)
ACKed Time(UTC)
Information icon
13
Silence button
Show alert state by icon.

Displays alert no. and name of alert.
The name of the device that generated the alert.
The time (UTC) the alert occurred.
The time (UTC) the alert was acknowledged.
Click the icon to display a description of the alert (reason for alert
and troubleshooting tip) in the Decision Support box. Note that
some alerts provide no information.
Silence the buzzer.
25-11
ALERT LOG window

The [ALERT LOG] window provides a comprehensive list of generated alerts.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
25-12
Item name
Current Alert box
Description
This box shows the name of the active alert that has the highest
priority. You can acknowledge the alert by clicking the box.
Priority Filter
Filter the list by the alert priority, [Emergency]. [Alarm], [Warning],
[Caution].
Source Filter
Filter the list by the source of alert, [Navigation], [Communication],
[External].
Category Filter
Filter the list by alert category, A, B or C.
Log Search box
Enter the text string to search.
Search button
Click this button to search the text string entered in the [Log
Search] box.
Reset button
Stop the text search and restore the list to its pre-search state.
Export Log button
Export the contents of the log to a USB flash memory, in .dat format.
[], []
(page selection buttons) alerts. Greyed out when inoperative.
Priority
Priority of the alert.
Cat.
Category of the alert.
Alert Text
Alert no. and name of alert.
Source
The name of the device that generated the alert.
Occurred Time(UTC)
The time (UTC) the alert occurred.
ACKed Time(UTC)
The time (UTC) the alert was acknowledged.
Rectified Time(UTC)
The time (UTC) the alert was rectified.
ALERT LIST window

The [ALERT LIST] window provides a context-based list of generated alerts, by source
and priority.
No.
1
Item name
Current Alert box
2
3
Alert Source window

Priority filter
4
5
Category filter
[], []
(page selection buttons)
Alert state icon
Alert priority, category,
alert text
6
7
Description
This box shows the name of the active alert(s), in order of priority.
Alert sources, [Navigation], [Communication], [External].
Filter the list by the alert priority, [Emergency], [Alarm], [Warning], [Caution].
Filter the list by the alert category, A, B or C.
alerts.
Shows alert state. (Active alerts only)
The data (priority, category, alert no., alert name) of all alerts
related to the alert source selected from the [Alert Source]
window are shown in green. However active alerts are shown
in red (emergency and alarm), yellow-orange (warning) or
yellow (caution).
25-13
25-14
26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS

This chapter covers the type approval testing for the following autopilots:
Type Approval TC-3000: YOKOGAWA PT-500A, TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000, EMRI
FAP-2000, EMRI FAP-3000. (These Autopilots comply with IEC 62065 Ed.1.0.)
Configuration
ECDIS
FMD-3xxx
ECDIS Monitor
or
100-230VAC
100-230VAC
MU-231
100-230VAC
MU-231
MU-190
100-230VAC
MU-190
ECDIS Control Unit

RCU-024
Radar
(FCR-2xx9, FAR-2x07)
GPS navigator
Processor Unit
EC-3000
Gyrocompass
or
Speed log
Autopilot
Digital IN
MC-3020D
Analog IN
MC-3010A
Sensor Adapter
Control/Serial
MC-3000S
Trackball Control Unit

RCU-026
Digital OUT
MC-3030D
Trackball Control Unit

RCU-026
100-230VAC
Steering Gear System
Engine
AIS
ARPA RADARS
LOG/DUAL AXIS LOG
GYRO COMPASS
Serial
Interface(IEC61162)
POSITIONING FIX2
Backup Navigator
Alarm
POSITIONING FIX1
26.1
: MANDATORY
: ALTERNATIVE
: OPTIONAL
: OPTIONAL, BUT NOT USED BY TCS
: EXTERNAL SENSOR or EQUIPMENT
26-1
26.2
Controls
26.2.1
EMRI FAP-2000
Control Panel
12
13
FURUNO
GYRO
ALARM
10
LIGHT
MEDIUM
RESET
LOADED
ECONOMY
MANUAL
SPEED
MEDIUM
FUNC.
SETUP
OFF COURSE
SET
HEADING
PRECISE
ON LIMIT
11
ROUTE
TRACK
TURN
RUD.LIMIT DEG.
SPEED KNOTS
RAD.
PROGRAM
HEADING
CHANGE
AUTO LIMIT
RADIUS
CONTROL
HEADING
CONTROL
SPEED WARN
15
PORT
READY
/MIN
INCREASE
14
HEADING
ROT.
N.M.
GO TO
WAYPOINT
16
GO TO
TRACK
STBD
START
HEADING
CHANGE
ACKN.
WARNING
PROGRAM
TRACK
DECREASE
FAP-2000 AUTOPILOT
17
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
26-2
18
Description
PROGRAM TRACK: Program Track-controlled heading change using set radius. Also for
steering with selected TT models.
GOTO TRACK: Track-controlled route steering.
GOTO WAYPOINT: Course-controlled route steering.
PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE: Program heading-controlled course change using set radius.
RADIUS CONTROL: Immediate radius-controlled course change using set radius.
HEADING CONTROL: Immediate heading-controlled course change using set rudder angle
limit.
Loading condition indicator - Light, Medium or Loaded.
Performance indicator - Economy, Medium or Precise.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Status indicator - Shows selected mode and state of readiness:

ROUTE: FAP-2000 route steering
TRACK: FAP-2000 control mode
TURN: FAP-2000 track controlled turn
HEADING: FAP-2000 control mode
READY: FAP-2000 in operation
Alert indicator and buzzer control:
ALARM lamp lights for FAP-2000 related alarms and errors.
RESET button acknowledges FAP-2000 related alarms and errors.
Special function buttons:
MANUAL SPEED: Manually enter speed.
FUNC. SETUP: Adjust panel dimmer.
Up, Down arrow buttons: Set manual speed value, auto speed, rudder limit function, performance and conditions.
Set heading display includes:
Off course alert
Turn side
Rudder-on limit indication
Gyro reading and a bar graph showing rate of turn
Rudder displays:
Rudder set point in the Radar Control mode.
Rudder limit in the Heading Control mode.
AUTO LIMIT lamp lights to indicate selection of automatic rudder limit function.
Speed displays:
ROT in the Radar Control mode.
Speed in the Heading Control mode.
Speed warning indicator (LOG FAILURE or LOW).
Tiller:
Set course and radius.
PORT and STBD lamps show when the tiller can set course.
INCREASE and DECREASE lamps show when the tiller can set radius or rudder angle
limit.
START HEADING CHANGE button:
Flashes if the newly set heading is different from used set heading.
Push to start course change.
ACKN WARNING button:
Lights when an alert is generated.
Push to acknowledge an alert.
26-3
26.2.2
EMRI FAP-3000
Steering Control Unit
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8-10
11
26-4
Description
PROGRAM NEXT button: Shows next heading, next course, next radius, next rudder limit
field.
CALL REMOTE CTRL button: Initiates integrated control with external navigation equipment
(ECDIS, etc.)
CALL COURSE CTRL button: Heading-controlled course change using set radius
CALL HEADING CTRL button: Immediate heading-controlled course change using set rudder angle limit.
RADIUS button: Immediate radius-controlled course change using set radius.
Tiller
Set course and radius.
PORT and STBD lamps show when the tiller can set course.
INCREASE and DECREASE lamps show when the tiller can set radius or rudder angle
limit.
EXECUTE button: Push to start course change.
SELECT buttons, arrow buttons: Select item to set (manual speed value, auto speed, rudder
limit function, performance and conditions) with arrow buttons.
ALERT ACKN button: Lights when alert is generated; push to acknowledge alert.
26.2.3
TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000

1: Mode selection unit

2: Mode selection switch
3: Non-follow-up unit
4: Non-follow-up steering lever
5: Auto steering control knobs
6: HCS unit (see next page)
7: Course setting knob
8: Remove control selection unit
9: Repeater unit
10: Repeater synchronizing knob
11: Repeater switch

12: Helm unit
13: Steering wheel
14: System selection unit
15: System selection switch
16: Order rudder angle indicator
17: PS display lamps
18: Alert unit
19: Max. rudder angle selection unit
20: Max. rudder angle selection
switch
26-5
Power
System
indicator indicator
Bar graph
selection
indicator
Data selection Bar graph display

indicator
Data display
display
Data
Steering
mode
indicator
No.1 AUTO
SET COURSE
display
Rudder limit
angle indicator
Group
alarm
indicator
Individual
alarm
indicator
HCS Unit
Beneath lid
ADPT control (course-keeping mode, OPN, CNF)

WEATHER control (PID weather adjustment)
RUDDER LIMIT control

(Rudder angle limit)
RATE control (rate of turn)

No. 2 Auto setting
adjustment section
(same controls
as in No.1 section)
No. 1 Auto setting

adjustment section
RUDDER control
(Rudder ratio)
PILOT WATCH control

(Pilot watch)
ADPT control: Select OPN (Open Sea) when economical operation is required. The
course is followed with the least necessary steering, allowing a little meandering
when; for example, sailing on the open sea.
The CNF (Confined) position keeps the ship straight on the course, for better route
steering accuracy. Large rudder may be necessary. The ADPT and CNF/OPN lamps
are turned on.
WEATHER control: Adjust this control when the weather or sea state changes. The
ship should go straight with a rudder angle as small as possible (a lower angle than 5
degrees is desirable), with few rudder operations (less than six times a minute is desirable). The PID lamp goes on when the manual PID is active.
RUDDER control: Set the best value of the rudder ratio changes according to the
ship's speed.
RATE control: Set the best value of the rate of turn changes according to the loading
condition.
26-6
PILOT WATCH control: Set the amount of course deviation to allow in automatic
steering. An alert is generated at the Autopilot when the deviation is more than the value set.
RUDDER LIMIT control: Limit the rudder motion to the least necessary rudder angle
during AUTO steering.
Steering override units

FU Override Unit
Starting steering override:
1) Confirm that the Ready lamp in
the FU unit is ON.
2) Press the Override steering
switch to give the control of the
steering to this unit, by the Override steering knob. A beep
sounds intermittently then the
selected steering mode indicator
flashes.
Override steering
knob
Ready lamp
Override steering
switch
Servo loop
fail lamp
Buzzer
Dimmer knob
Stopping steering override:

1) Push the ON/OFF switch to
show ON in the FU override unit
or push the RESET switch on the
Override reset unit in the steering stand to return to the previous steering mode.
2) If the steering mode was AUTO,
the heading at the time override
steering became active is set as
heading. Auto resume is disabled if the steering mode was
RC/NAV. To restore the RC
mode, turn the mode selection
switch to another steering mode
then select the RC mode again.
Override indicator
Ready
Ready lamp
lamp
Override steering
reset switch
Dimmer kno
Dimmer knob
26-7
FU Override NFU Controller

Starting steering override:
1) Confirm that the Ready lamp in
the NFU controller is ON.
2) Pull out the pin stopper inserted in the override NFU controller and turn the lever to the
desired direction. Beeps
sounds then the selected
steering mode flashes. The ON
lamp in the Override reset unit
is lit.
3) The rudder is taken when the
lever is turned, and the rudder
stops when the lever is returned to the neutral position.
Stopping steering override:
1) Push the Override steering reset switch on the override reset
unit in the steering stand to return to the previous steering
mode.
2) If the steering mode was AUTO, the heading at the time the
override steering became active is set as heading. Auto resume is disabled if the steering
mode was RC/NAV. To restore
the RC mode, turn the mode
selection switch to another
steering mode then select the
RC mode again.
26-8
Override steering
lever
Pin stopper
Override indicator
Ready lamp
Override steering
reset switch
Dimmer knob
26.2.4
YOKOGAWA PT-500A
Steering Repeater
Compass
Auto Steering
Unit
Steering Mode
Selector
Non-Follow Up
Steering Lever
System Selector
Switch
Steering Handle
Control
Steering Repeater Compass
Heading Steering Dial
Auto Steering Unit
Steering Mode Selector
Non-Follow-Up Steering Lever
System Selector Switch
Steering Handle
Description
Shows heading.
Rotate to set heading.
Provides controls for automatic steering functions.
Select NAVI, AUTO, HAND, or RC (Remote Control) steering
mode.
Steers the rudder in the direction selected, port or starboard.
Selects the system to use: OFF, FU-1 (No.1 operating system),
FU-2 (No.2 operating system, NFU (Non-follow-up steering)
Steers the vessel.
26-9
26.3
Steering Modes
26.3.1
EMRI FAP-2000, FAP-3000

The FAP-2000, FAP-3000 receives position, heading and speed data, compares them
with the track section to be steered, and applies that information to calculate and command the necessary rudder angle.
Hand (manual) steering modes

The following hand steering modes are available without the autopilot: Steering wheel,
Wing steering control, and Override tiller. While in a hand steering mode, the ECDIS
indicates the rudder angle and the hand steering mode.
Autopilot steering modes

The autopilot steering modes are selected from the autopilot control panel.
Heading control mode
The autopilot steering modes are selected from the autopilot control panel.
Mode selection: HEADING CONTROL (FAP-2000), CALL HEADING CTRL button
(FAP-3000)
The HEADING CONTROL (FAP-2000), CALL HEADING CTRL button (FAP-3000)
lights.
Immediate course change when the tiller is used to set the heading.
Course change is defined as heading controlled by the set rudder angle limit.
Radius control mode
The Radius Control steering mode can be used always because it does not require position data.
Mode selection: RADIUS button
The lamp on the RADIUS button (FAP-2000, FAP-3000) and CALL HEADING CTRL
button (FAP-3000) lights.
Course change is radius controlled with the set radius.
If wind, current, etc. affect the ship, the ship will drift (inside or outside) from the
planned turn. This is displayed on the radar screen.
Program heading change mode
The Program Heading Change steering mode can be used always because it does not
require position data.
Mode selection: PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE (FAP-2000), PROGRAM NEXT
button (FAP-3000)
The PROGRAM NEXT button (FAP-3000) lights.
The tiller is first used to set a new heading and radius, which are also displayed on
the radar screen.
The START HEADING CHANGE (FAP-2000), EXECUTE button (FAP-3000) flashes
if the newly set heading is different from the currently used heading.
Start course change by pushing the START HEADING CHANGE (FAP-2000) button,
EXECUTE button (FAP-3000).
After activation, control is returned to the RADIUS button (FAP-2000, FAP-3000).
If wind, current, etc. affect the ship, the ship will drift (inside or outside) from the
planned turn. This is displayed on the radar screen.
26-10
26.3.2
TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000, YOKOGAWA PT-500A

Steering functions are available when the ECDIS system is connected to the Autopilot.
To use a steering mode, set your Autopilots system selection switch to the FU-1 (PT500A) or No. 1 (PR-6000) position.
Hand (manual) steering mode (Mode selector: HAND)

Set the Steering Mode Selector Switch to HAND. The ECDIS displays the rudder angle and indicates the steering mode in the [Route Information] box.
Autopilot steering mode (Mode selector: AUTO)

The operator sets the required heading of the ship with the Course Setting knob. Turns
are controlled by the rudder limit or rate of turn and are started the operator.
Turn the Mode selection switch to the AUTO position, and the set course is shown in
the SET. COURSE display. The initial value of the set course is the ship's heading at
that time. To change the course, press the Course setting knob and release it when
the required course appears. Now, the course deviation (CO.DEV: COURSE DEVIATION) is shown in the bar graph and AUTO is lit. AUTO goes off when the ship is following new course.
When the loading condition changes remarkably, yawing can large at the departure.
Then, do auto course; change by 20 of port and starboard two or three times, and
follow the state for approx. 15 minutes.
Turn controlled by the rudder angle: When a new course is set, turns are controlled
by the rudder angle. You can set the required rudder angle limit with the Rudder limit
knob.
Turn controlled by rate of turn: Press the AUTO unit <-SEL switch a number of
times to light the data selection indicator R.O.T. and show the rate of turn (unit deg/
min). Now, press the DATA CHANGE switch (located at the lower right) to show the
turn rate order. The displayed value can be changed with - or + while pressing the
DATA CHANGE switch. This value becomes the turn of rate order during automatic
course change. The setting, however, cannot be changed during automatic course
change.
Route steering mode (Mode selector: NAVI (PT-500A), RC (PR-6000))

GoSEA mode (open sea mode): The planned track is followed at moderate and "economical accuracy" between waypoints and also during the turns (position-controlled
turn). When the ship nears a waypoint, the ECDIS alerts the operator both well before
the turn and just before the turn.
GoAW mode (all waters mode): The planned track is followed at the "maximum accuracy" between waypoints and also during the turns (position-controlled turn). When
the ship nears a waypoint, the ECDIS alerts the operator both well before the turn and
just before the turn.
Non-follow-up steering mode (Mode selector: NFU) (PR-6000)

The operator sets the steering mode selector to NFU and steers with the Non-FollowUp lever. While in the NFU steering mode the ECDIS system displays both the rudder
angle and the steering mode.
26-11
Remote hand steering mode (Mode selector: RC) (PR-6000)

When the Mode selection switch mode is
set to RC, the mode becomes RC, not the
selected condition. The steering mode indicator RC flashes. The hand steering is in
use while RC flashes. (This operation is
like the HAND mode.) At this time you can
switch to the remote steering mode. Press
the Enable switch button while pressing the
Steering location selection switch. The
lamp of the steering location comes on.
(See Note 1.) The state of the steering
mode indicator RC changes from flashing
to lighting.
Note 1: If your RC Selection Unit does not
have the Enable switch button, like the figure below, press the NAV button to start
the TCS.
Steering mode
indicator
Steering location
selection switch
(P/W, W/H, S/W)
Nav entry switch
Enable switch
Remote control
selection unit
Steering mode
selection switch
Remote control
steering position
Note 2: When you select the RC mode, select "RC" in one motion. Do not stop at any
of the secondary positions on the switch, to prevent loss of the TCS. If the TCS is lost,
first check that the rudder is centered then restore manual steering (HAND) at the autopilot. Restart TCS (GoAW) at the ECDIS then reselect RC.
26-12
26.3.3
Summary of steering modes

Route steering modes (all autopilots)
Mode
Item
Set course
Set radius
Radius control
Design before execution
Wind, current, etc. compensation running straights between WPT
Wind, current, etc. compensation in turns
Needs a gyrocompass
Needs a log
Precision of position-fixing equipment
Needs direct SOG/COG sensor
GoSEA
GoAW
Automatic
Automatic
Yes
Yes
Low gain
Yes
Automatic
Automatic
Yes
Yes
High gain
Yes
Yes
Yes
Good(GPS)
No
Yes
Yes
High(GPS)
No
Summary of autopilot steering modes (FAP-2000, FAP-3000)

Heading
Control
Radius
Control
Program
Heading
Change
Program
Track
Set heading
Set radius
Radius control
Design before execution
Wind, current, etc. compensation
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Needs a gyrocompass
Needs a log
Needs precise position-fixing equipment
Needs direct SOG/COG sensor
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Item
26-13
26.4
Autopilot Functions at the ECDIS

Autopilot functions are available in the Voyage navigation mode. Click the [NAVI] button to get into this mode.
[Track Control Status]

Preconditions for Track Control Start are missing:
AP connection error.
Instant
Track
TC:
(1)
TCS buttons
TCS TCS
Setting State
Go
AW
Go
SEA
The buttons in the TCS button group do the following

tasks. See section 26.6.
[TCS]: Opens the TCS button group.
[TCS Setting]*: Selects a
steering mode, [GoAW] or
[GoSEA]. *Not shown on
FAP-2000.
[TCS State]: Shows or hides
the [Track Control Status]
window. See
"Messages" on page 26-19.
26-14
(2)
[Track Control Status] window
MANUAL
(3)
[Route Information] box

The [Track Control Status] window displays a message when the route steering preconditions are not complete.
See "Messages" on page 26-19.
TC:
GoAW Appr. Enabled
The [TC] field shows Autopilot status. In the example

above, the status is [GoAW
Appr. Enabled]. See
section 26.7.1 for a description of the autopilot status
information that appears in
this box.
26.5
How to Select the ECDIS to Control the Autopilot

If the ship has more than one ECDIS, you can select the ECDIS to control the Autopilot. The ECDIS are connected to the Autopilot via a hardware switch to permit manual
switching of the ECDIS.
HUB-3000
FMD-3xx0
HUB-100
FMD-3xx0
Hardware switch
Autopilot
For example, ECD0002 is currently the primary ECDIS and ECD003 is the secondary
ECDIS. Then, to swap primary and secondary ECDIS units, do as follows.
1. If the TCS is engaged to the ECDIS, stop the TCS.
CAUTION: DO NOT switch the ECDIS units while the TCS is engaged. Stop the
TCS, then switch the units. Failure to disengage the TCS from the ECDIS can
cause sudden and violent movement, creating a potentially dangerous situation.
2. Switch from ECD002 to ECD003 with the hardware switch.
3. Open the ECDIS menu.
4. From the [General] menu, open the [TCS] dialog box.
5. Click the radio button [ECD003].

Then, the [TCS] button (InstantAccess bar) at the ECDIS formerly selected as Primary
becomes inoperative (greyed out) and the [TCS] button at the ECDIS now selected as
Primary becomes operative.
Description of items in TCS dialog box

Start: The deviation threshold for the planned route and heading at the start of track
control.
Alert Threshold: The deviation threshold for the planned route and heading in route
monitoring and track control.
Min Maneuvering Speed: The minimum allowable maneuvering speed in track control. A speed lower than this triggers the low speed alarm.
26-15
26.6
How to Activate, Deactivate the Track Control

System (TCS) from the ECDIS
26.6.1
How to activate the TCS

The TCS cannot be activated if the route steering preconditions have not been met. A
related alert and status message appear on the ECDIS.
See section 26.7.2 for the status messages.
FAP-3000, PR-6000, PT-500A

1. Click the [TCS] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the TCS button group.
TCS TCS
Setting State
Go
AW
Go
SEA
2. Click the [TCS Setting] and [Go AW] or [Go SEA] buttons to activate the route
steering.
3. Do one of the following:
FAP-3000: Push the CALL REMOTE CTRL button.
PR-6000: Select the RC mode.
PT-500A: Select the NAVI mode.
FAP-2000
At the Autopilot, push the GoAW or Go SEA button as appropriate. The TCS starts
with the steering mode selected.
26.6.2
How to deactivate the TCS

Change the steering mode at the Autopilot to hand to automatic.
26-16
26.7
Route Steering Related Indications, Alerts and

Messages Generated by ECDIS
26.7.1
Route steering related information in Route Information box

The [TC] field in the [Route Information] box shows the route steering related information.
TC:
GoAW Appr. Enabled
Indication
Reason
Comments
AUTO
Automatic steering activated.
DPS*
Dynamic Positioning System activated.
GoAW
GoAW mode activated.
GoAW Appr. Enabled
Shown between the time of the WPT prewarning notice and its acknowledgement.
GoAW GC
Great circle navigation in the GoAW mode.
GoAW Turn
Turning in the GoAW mode.
GoAW Turn Enabled
Shown between the time of the prewarning
acknowledgement and the beginning of the
turn.
GoSEA
The GoSEA mode activated.
GoSEA Appr. Enabled
Shown between the time of the WPT prewarning notice and its acknowledgement.
GoSEA GC
Great circle navigation in the GoSEA mode.
GoSEA Turn
Turning in the GoSEA mode.
GoSEA Turn Enabled
Shown between the time of the prewarning
acknowledgement and the beginning of the
turn.
JOY*
Joystick is being operated.
MANUAL
Manual steering activated.
NAVI
Mode is different from GoAW or GoSEA.
Service State
Vessel is now making gradual advancement [TC] is yellow.
(instead of immediate).
[TC] is red
TCS module error found.
The TCS cannot be
started.
[TC] is yellow
Service state or TCS module status is NA.
*Not shown on FAP-2000, FAP-3000, PR-6000.
26-17
26.7.2
Alerts and messages when precondition for route steering are

not complete
When you select the GoAW mode and change the steering mode to NAVI at the Autopilot to activate the route steering, but route steering preconditions are not complete,
an alert and a message are given.
Alerts
Route steering precondition related alerts appear in the [Alert] box, at the bottom-right
position on the ECDIS screen. The alert flashes if it is an alarm or warning category
alert.
158
156
Course Difference
Alert ID no. and alert name
Alert "158 Course Difference" informs you that there is a difference between the current heading of your ship and the required heading. The alert threshold is set during
the installation.
Alert "172 Off Track Alarm" appears if the ship is outside the channel limits of the
route.
Alert "665 Auto Pilot Mode Conflict" informs you that neither the ECDIS nor the Autopilot can start the route steering mode. First change the steering mode from NAVI*1
to AUTO*2 then check that the preconditions for the route steering are complete.
*1
REMOTE CONTROL on FAP-3000
*2
HEADING CONTROL on FAP-3000
Alert "690 TC Start Timeout" informs you that the 60-second timeout has passed before you changed the mode to NAVI. After you select the GoSEA or GoAW at the ECDIS, you have 60 seconds to change the mode to NAVI, otherwise alert 690 is given.
26-18
Messages
The message in the [Track Control Status] window (at the top of the display) states the
reason why the preconditions for the start of track control are not complete.

This window can be shown or hidden with the [TCS State] button.
TCS
TCS TCS
Setting State
Only PR-6000, PT-500A

show TCS Setting.
TCS
State
Click the button to

show or hide
message window.
Window OFF
(gray)
TCS
State
Window ON
(blue)
Messages in the Track Control Status window

Message
"AP connection error"
"AP heading error"
Reason
Problem with connections at the Autopilot.
No HDG at Autopilot.
"AP not ready"
AP is in the NFU mode.
"Off course"
"Invalid HDG"
Ship is off course.

No HDG at ECDIS.
"Speed too low"
Current speed is lower than that set as

the maneuvering speed.
"Not using filter"

"Out of channel"
The filter is not being used.

You tried to activate the route steering
outside the channel limits.
"Unreliable POSN"
Position data is not reliable.
Action
Check the Autopilot.
Check connections,
heading source.
Select NAVI (REMOTE CONTROL on
FAP-3000) mode.
Correct your course.
Check connections,
heading source.
Raise speed to match
maneuvering speed
set.
Steer the ship inside
the channel then try to
activate the route
steering again.
Check navigator.
26-19
26.7.3
Alerts given when approaching a waypoint

This section provides examples of how the ECDIS responds to acknowledged, unacknowledged alerts when approaching a waypoint.
Condition 1: No acknowledgement to alerts

1. The vessels position is 90 seconds from the WOL.
2. The ECDIS releases the Early Course Change Indication (ECCI), which is the
Alert "150 Early Course Change Indication".
3. The ECCI is not acknowledged.
4. The vessels position is now 30 seconds from the WOL.
5. The ECDIS releases the Course Change Alarm (CCA), which is the Alert "152
Wheel Over Line".
6. The vessel passes the WOL.
7. 30 seconds after the vessel passes the WOL, the ECDIS outputs the Backup Navigator Alarm (contact signal, N/O or N/C) to the BNWAS.
8. The CCA is acknowledged.
9. The ECDIS stops the Backup Navigator Alarm and resets the contact signal.
90 sec.
before WOL
No ACK
30 sec.
before WOL
No ACK
(1) ECCI
released
30 sec.
after WOL
WOL
(2) CCA
released
No ACK
(3) Backup
navigator alarm
released
Condition 2: Early course change acknowledged, actual course change not

acknowledged
2. The ECDIS releases the Early Course Change Indication (ECCI), which is the
Alert "150 Early Course Change Indication".
3. The ECCI is acknowledged.
5. The ECDIS releases the Course Change Indication (CCI), which is the Alert "151
Actual Course Change Indication".
6. The CCI is not acknowledged.
7. When the vessel passes the WOL, the ECDIS releases the Course Change Alarm
(CCA), which is the Alert "152 Wheel Over Line".
8. The CCA is not acknowledged.
9. 30 seconds after the vessel passes the WOL, the ECDIS outputs the Backup Navigator Alarm (contact signal, N/O or N/C) to the BNWAS.
10. The CCA is acknowledged.
26-20
11. The ECDIS stops the Backup Navigator Alarm and resets the contact signal.
90 sec.
before WOL
ACK
(1) ECCI
released
30 sec.
before WOL
No ACK
(2) CCI
released
30 sec.
after WOL
No ACK
(3) CCA
released
(4) Backup
navigator alarm
released
Waypoint-related indications in the Route Information box

The text "GoSEA Appr. Enabled" or "GoAW Appr. Enabled" appears in the [Route
Information] box until you acknowledge the Alert "150 Early
Course Change Indication".
When you acknowledge the
waypoint approach alert, the
text "GoSEA Turn Enabled" or
"GoAW Turn Enabled" appears
in the [Route Information] box.
During a turn, the text

"GoSEA Turn" or "GoAW Turn"
appears in the [Route Information] box.
Note: When you approach the last waypoint, the Alert "652 Last WPT Approach" appears. If you acknowledge Alert 652 when the Autopilot is in the NAVI mode, the route
steering is automatically stopped and the system shows Alert "665 Auto Pilot Mode
Conflict". Route steering is deactivated until the NAVI mode is selected again at the
Autopilot. To return to the route steering, the ship's heading must be set toward the
next waypoint and the ship must be inside the channel limits. Otherwise, an alert is
given.
26-21
26.7.4
Other route steering indications and alerts

Route steering indications in the Route Information box
Permanent alerts appear in the [Route Information] box in red in any the steering
mode. In the example below the [Off Track] value is shown in red when the vessel is
outside the channel.
Route steering alerts

Alert "150 Early Course Change Indication" appears 90 seconds before you arrive
to the wheel over line (WOL).
Alert "152 Wheel Over Line" appears if (1) Alert "150 Early Course Change Indication" is not acknowledged within 30 seconds of arrival to the wheel over line, or (2)
Alert "151 Actual Course Change Indication" is not acknowledged at the arrival at
the wheel over point. If Alert 152 stays unacknowledged, Alert 150 is given at the next
waypoint.
Alert "153 Track Control Stop" appears when the heading signal is lost.
Alert "156 Sensor Failure" appears when there is no gyro data or the conditions of
Alert 156 have been valid for the last minute.
Alert "158 Course Difference" appears when there is a large difference between the
planned course and the current course.
Alert "172 Off Track Alarm" appears when your vessel is off track.
Alert "652 Last WPT Approach" appears when your vessel is near the last WPT in
the route monitored.
Alert "667 AP Receive Error" appears when the ECDIS cannot communicate with the
Autopilot. Change the steering mode to AUTO (HEADING CONTROL on FAP-3000).
Alert "675 Use MAN Steering" is instruction for the user to change the steering mode
to AUTO (HEADING CONTROL on FAP-3000) or HAND. This alert is generated if
there is not enough conditions to continue the TCS.
26-22
26.8
Route Steering Operations
26.8.1
How to stop or change a pre-enabled turn in route steering

There are two conditions where an automatic turn in a route must be stopped or
changed:
The turn cannot be done to the last value.
The turn is outside of the planned turn (too fast or too slow).
How to stop a turn

FAP-2000, PR-6000, PT-500A: Change the steering mode from NAVI to HAND.
FAP-3000: Change the steering mode from REMOTE CONTROL to HAND.
How to change a turn

What to do
Use different
final value of set
course
How to execute the turn

The problem is that radius control is only available in the NAVI*1 steering mode.
When you change the steering mode to a mode different from NAVI*1, the ship
stops following the radius. Below is what you can do:
Change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to AUTO*2. This stops the turn completely and the current gyro heading is selected as the new set course for the
Autopilot. Then, set a new final value for the set course and select an acceptable max. rudder angle to prevent too fast turning.
Turn the steering wheel to an acceptable angle to continue with a new radius
(i.e. to equal previous rudder angle). Then, change the steering mode from
NAVI*1 to AUTO*2. Continue manual steering.
Change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to NFU, then use the NFU steering lever. Manually steer the ship.
Compensate too
fast turning
As soon as you change the steering mode to something other than NAVI*1 the
ship stops following the radius. Below is what you can do:
Change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to AUTO*2. This stops the turn completely and the current gyro heading is selected as the new set course for the
Autopilot. Then set a final value for the set course and select a suitable max.
rudder angle to prevent too fast turning.
Set the steering wheel to a suitable angle to continue with a larger radius (i.e.
smaller than previous rudder angle). Then change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to HAND. Manually steer the ship.
Change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to NFU. Manually steer the ship.
Compensate too
slow turning
As soon as you change the steering mode to something other than NAVI*1, the
ship stops following the radius. Below is what you can do:
Set the steering wheel to a suitable angle to continue with a smaller radius (i.e.
higher rudder angle than before). Then change the steering mode from NAVI*1
to HAND. Continue manual steering.
Change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to NFU. Manually steer the ship.
*1
*2
26-23
26.8.2
Collision avoidance maneuver in route steering

Route steering is often interrupted by a collision avoidance maneuver, but there are
also several other reasons to interrupt route steering. There are several possibilities
to set the collision avoidance or any other maneuver:
Use the Non-Follow-Up steering lever to directly control rudder pumps.

Use the Override steering.
Use the Follow-Up rudder control. (Change mode from NAVI*1 to HAND.)
Use the local Autopilot Heading control. (Change mode from NAVI*1 to AUTO*2)
*1
*2
26.9
Steering Performance
Below is a summary of how different environmental conditions change steering performance.
26.9.1
Expected steering performance for going ahead
Environmental
conditions
Calm sea, no
wind, no current
Moderate wind
and/or current
High wind and/or
current
Heading control=
AUTO
COG is approx. the

same as Set
Course in Autopilot.
Ship has a tenden- Ship follows monitored
cy to drift.
route.
Ship is drifting.
1) Ship follows monitored
route but may go outside
channel limit area.*
2) Ship may have a problem following monitored
route inside the channel
limit, however.
There is no comShip follows monitored
pensation for
route.
change.
There is no com1) Ship may go outside
pensation for
channel limit but is rechange.
turned to center of channel.*
2) Ship can have a problem
following monitored route
inside the channel limit.
Wind and/or current changes

slowly.
Sudden change
of wind and/or
current (For example sudden
change from no
current to 5 kn
current perpendicular to track)
Fast change of
There is no comspeed (For exam- pensation for
ple, speed dechange.
creased from 20
to 7 kn)
26-24
Mode
GoSea (FAP-2000/3000)
GoAW (FAP-2000/3000)
GoSea+RC (PR-6000)
GoAW+RC (PR-6000)
GoSea+NAVI (PT-500A)
GoAW+NAVI (PT-500A)
Ship follows monitored
route.
route accurately.

route, but may need full
channel limit area.

route accurately.
route.*
route accurately.
1) Ship is kept within channel limit.*
channel limit area.
* The Track Control System can compensate drift up to 45 degrees. If the drift is larger,
your ship may go outside the channel limit.
26.9.2
Expected steering performance for turns
Environmental
conditions
Heading control=
AUTO
Calm sea, no
wind, no current
Ship does normal

Autopilot turn under
this condition.
Ship does normal
this condition.
Ship does normal
this condition.
Moderate wind
and/or current
High wind and/or
current
Wind and/or
current changes
slowly.
Sudden change
of wind and/or
current (For example sudden
change from no
current to 5 kn
current perpendicular to track)
Slow change of
speed
Ship does normal

this condition.
Ship does normal
this condition.
Ship does normal

this condition.
Fast change of
Ship does normal
speed (For exam- Autopilot turn under
ple, speed dethis condition.
creased from 20
to 7 kn)
Mode
GoSea (FAP-2000/3000)
GoAW (FAP-2000/3000)
GoSea+RC (PR-6000)
GoAW+RC (PR-6000)
GoSea+NAVI (PT-500A)
GoAW+NAVI (PT-500A)
route.
route accurately.
route.

route accurately.

route, but may go outside
channel limit area.*
route.

route.*
1) Ship may go outside

channel limit but is returned to center of channel.*
1) Ship is kept within channel limit.*

channel limit area.
channel limit area.

route.

route accurately.


channel limit area.
* The Track Control System can compensate drift up to 45 degrees. If the drift is larger,
your ship may go outside the channel limit.
26-25
26.9.3
Expected steering performance under critical failure

Below is a summary of the system behavior in different failures in the GoSEA or
GoAW steering mode.
Lost heading to Autopilot and/or ECDIS
Immediately
Within a few
seconds
*1
26-26
Related
Expected system
alerts
performance
These alerts and
warnings may be generated at the ECDIS:
1) Alert "450 Heading
Sensor Not Available"
2) Alert "902 No Filter
Source of COG/
SOG"
3) Alert "903 No Filter
Source of Heading"
The lamp*1 on the Autopilots Steering Control Unit (or Control
Panel) lights.
Alert "153 Track Con- TCS stops and
trol Stop"*
If the ship is running
*Transferred to BNstraight, the rudder orWAS if not acknowlder is frozen at the last
edged within 30
value to approximately
seconds.
continue ahead.
Alert "156 Sensor
If the ship is turning, the
Failure"
rudder order is frozen at
Alert "665 Auto Pilot
the last value to approxMode Conflict"
imately continue the
rate of turn.
Operator
action
Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
PT-500A: EMRG ALM; PR-6000: RC, FAP-2000, FAP-3000: ALARM
Lost speed
Associated
alerts
Speed log data, VTG
sentence lost. Alert
"901 No FIlter Source
of COG/SOG", Alert
"902 No Filter Source
of CTW/STW" given.
Alert "675 Use Man
Steering"
Repeated
every two
minutes
Within 30
seconds
Within 10
minutes
Expected system
performance
Guidance for navigator
Alert "156 Sensor

Failure"
Alert "153 Track Con- TCS stops and
trol Stop"* and Alert
straight, actual heading
"665 Auto Pilot Mode
is used as set course.
Conflict" are generated at the ECDIS. The If the ship is turning,
last-set course and ralamp*1 on the Autopidius are used to comlots Steering Control
plete the turn.
Unit lights.
Operator
action
Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
Change immediately to
local Autopilot control.
Acknowledge alerts.
Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
Change the steering
mode to AUTO (HEADING CONTROL on
FAP-3000).
*Transferred to
BNWAS if not
acknowledged within
30 seconds.
*1
PT-500A: CAUT ALM; PR-6000: RC; FAP-2000, FAP-3000: ALARM
Low speed
Associated
alerts
Alert "159 Low Speed
Alarm".
Expected system
performance
Operator
action
Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
Position discrepancy (position from only one GPS navigator is reliable)
Precondition
Associated
alerts
If sensors in Filter calculation are NOT inside
operator selected position discrepancy limit,
Alert "851 Sensor
Banned"* appears.
* 222 Position Discrepancy on FAP-2000.
Expected system
performance
Operator
action
Monitor situation.
26-27
Total lost position (position from ALL GPS navigators is unreliable)
Precondition
Within 30
seconds
Repeated
every two
minutes
Within 10
minutes
Associated
alerts
Alert "290 EPFS1 COM
Error" (example).
OR
The Kalman filter detects position jump, etc.
Alert "156 Sensor Failure"
Alert "170 Positioning
System Failure".
Alert "900 No Filter
Source of Position".
Alert "901 No Filter
Source of COG/SOG".
Alert "675 Use MAN

Steering"
Alert "153 Track Control Stop"* and Alert

"156 Sensor Failure"
are generated at the
ECDIS. The lamp*1 on
the Autopilots Steering
Control Unit lights.
*Transferred to BNWAS
if not acknowledged
within 30 seconds.
*1
26-28
Expected system
performance
Operator
action
Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
The Kalman filter is

turned OFF and the
system uses dead
reckoning for positioning.
If you have a log or
dual-axis log, then
dead reckoning is
based on them and the
gyro.
If you have a log or
dual-axis log, then
dead reckoning is
based on last valid
speed from position
sensors.
Guidance for navigator
Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
TCS stops and

straight, actual heading is used as set
course.
If the ship is turning,
last-set course and radius are used to complete the turn.
Change immediately to
local Autopilot control.
Acknowledge alerts.
Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
Change the steering
mode to AUTO (HEADING CONTROL on
FAP-3000).
PT-500A: EMRG ALM; PR-6000: RC; FAP-2000, FAP-3000: ALARM
Lost communication between Autopilot and ECDIS and vice versa

Associated
alerts
Alert "667 AP Receive
Error" is generated at
the ECDIS.
Alert "153 Track Control Stop"* is generated
at the ECDIS. Track
control is stopped and
the lamp*1 on the Autopilots Steering Control
Unit lights.
Within 15
seconds
After Alert
"667 AP
Receive
Error"
Expected system
performance
Guidance for the navigator
Operator
action
Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
TCS stops and

Acknowledge alerts.
Monitor situation.
straight, actual heading Change the steering
is used as set course.
mode to AUTO (HEAD If the ship is turning,
ING CONTROL on
last set course and radiFAP-3000).
us are used to complete
the turn.
*Transferred to BNWAS if
not acknowledged within
30 seconds.
*1
PT-500A: CAUT ALM; PR-6000: RC; FAP-2000, FAP-3000: ALARM
26-29
26-30
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

Main Menu
MENU
bar
(click)
General
Ship & Route

Parameters
Ship
Parameters
Route
Parameters
Instant
Track
* Set at installation
MAX Speed (0.1 to 80 kn, 22.1)

MAX Height (0.0 to 100 m, 16.1)
MAX Draught (0.0 to 50 m, 20.0)
Max R.O.T*
WPT Approach*
WPT Prewarning*
Default Line Radius (0.1 to 3.0 NM, 0.8)
Default CH Limit (10 to 1852 m, 185)
Default Safety Margin (0 to 1000 m, 40)
Delay before Initiating First Turn (30 to 600 sec, 60)
Turn Radius (0.02 to 3.00 NM, 1)
Channel Limit for Track Control (Auto, Manual (10 - 1852m))
Route Check Strictly
Navigation Parameters (Show forwarding distances, set at installation.)

TCS (Select the ECDIS unit to control Autopilot.)
Sensor
Cost
Parameters
Cost (Input values for Hour, Heavy Fuel Oil,

Diesel Oil)
Fuel Consumption (Input values for Speed,
Heavy Fuel Oil, Diesel Oil)
System/Local
Select
System
Sensor
Settings
Sensor Type (System Sensor, Local Sensor)

HDG
SPD
COG/
SOG
POSN
Local Sensor
Settings
HDG
SPD
COG/
SOG
POSN
Other Sensor
Settings
Other
Sensor
Data Source (Sensors, Manual)

Stabilization Mode ( Bottom, Water)
Sensor Type (GPS, LOG)
Data Source (Sensors)
Analog Gyro (No use)
Manual
Gyro Correction
Stabilization Mode ( Bottom, Water)
Sensor Type (GPS, LOG)
Data Source (Sensors, Manual, Reference SPD, Drift)
Data Source (Sensors)
Wind
Speed (kn, m/s)

Reference (APPARENT (relative, ref. to heading), NORTH (true,
ref. to North), THEORETICAL (true, ref. to heading)
(Values for Bow, Mid and Aft)
Depth
Below
Trans.
Temperature (Temperature of water surface)
Water Current (Course and speed of water current)
Filter Status (Monitors sensor status and integrity.)
(Cont on next page)
AP-1
(Cont from previous page)

DISP
Basic
Setting
Chart
Display
Symbol
Display
Symbols (Paper Chart, Simplified)

Depths (Two Color, Multi Color)
Boundaries (Plain, Symbolized)
Lightsectors (Limited, Full)
Light Popup (OFF, ON)
TM Reset (20-99%, 80)
Shallow Pattern (None, Diamond)
Shallow Hazard (ON, OFF)
Standard (Checkbox for each of Unknown Object or Presentation; Chart
Data Coverage; Standard Land Features; Water and Seabed Features;
Traffic Routes; Cautionary Areas; Information Areas; Buoys and
Beacons; Lights; Fog Signals; Radar; Services)
Other (Checkbox for each of Information about Chart Data; Other Land
Features; Soundings; Depth Contour Labels; Depth Contours,
Magnetics, Currents; Seabed, Pipelines and Obstructions; Obstructions
with Soundings; Service and Small Craft Facilities; Low Accuracy;
Special Areas; Additional Information Available; Clearance, Bearings,
Radio Channels; Other Text; Names for Position Report; Light
Descriptions; Seabed; Swept Depth, Magnetics; Berth and Anchorage;
Geographic Names, etc.; Land Elevation)
AIO (Checkbox for Temporary Notice; Preliminary Notice; No Information)
General
Ship Outlines (ON, OFF)
AIS Outlines (ON, OFF)
True outlines shown if (Set length and beamwidth.)
Velocity Vectors
Ship Vectors (ON, OFF)
Target Vectors (ON, OFF)
Style (std ECDIS, Conventional)
Time Increments
Path Predictor
Radar Antenna
Tracking
Own Ship
CCRP
Primary
Past Tracks
Secondary
Pivot
Style (Tick, Point)
Length (1-120 min, 1)
Labels (0-60 min, 0)
Route
Mariner
Events
User Events
Auto Events
Positions
Show (Newer than 12 hours, Newer
than 24 hours, Newer than 1 week,
Newer than 2 weeks, Newer than 1
month, Newer than 3 months, All)
Monitored
Route
Channel Limit
Safety Margin
Leg Marks (True, Relative)
Wheel Over Line
Planned
Route
Channel Limit
Safety Margin
Leg Marks (True, Relative)
User Chart
Labels
Lines
Clearing Lines
Tidals
Areas
Circles
Density (0%, 25%, 50%, 75%)
NAVTEX*
* Valid when NAVTEX
receiver is activated at
installation.
Targets
(Cont on next page)
AP-2
Color (Blue, Black, Magenta, Brown, Green)

TT Size (Standard, Small)
AIS ROT TAG Limit (0.0/min to 720.0/min, 0.0)
TT Label (ON, OFF)
AIS Label (ON, OFF)
TT Pop-up INFO (ON, OFF)
AIS Pop-up INFO (ON, OFF)
Past Position
TT Points (5, 10)
AIS Points (5, 10)
Style (Points, Points and dots)
(Cont from previous page)
Record
Chart
Alert
Setting
Set WARNING or CAUTION for Safety Contour*, Areas To Be Avoided,

User Chart Danger, Traffic Separation Zone, Inshore Traffic Zone,
Restricted Area, Caution Area, Offshore Production Area, Military
Practice Area, Seaplane Landing Area, Submarine Transit Lane,
Anchorage Area, Marine Farm / Aqua Culture, PSSA Area,
Non-official ENC, No Vector Chart, Not Up-to-date, Permit Expired, UKC Limit)
Shallow Contour (0-99 m, 10)
Safety Depth (0-99 m, 20)
*: Fixed at WARNING
Safety Contour (0-99 m, 30)
Deep Contour (0-99 m, 60)
NAVI
Log
Voyage
Target Log
TT/AIS
Setting
Setting. 1
Shared
PI Lines
AIS DISP
Filter
Sleep All
Targets
Class A (ON, OFF)

Class B (ON, OFF)
Base Station (ON, OFF)
Max Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12)
Min Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0)
AIS-CPA
Auto
Activate

Except Class B (ON, OFF)
AIS Lost
Target
Filter

Except Class B (ON, OFF)
TT Lost
Target
Filter

Own Ship (Shows own ships MMSI No., Name, Call Sign, Type, Description,
Length, Width, Reference Bow, and Reference Port.)
Voyage
data
NAV Tools
Speed (1 to 10 kn, 5)
Course (0.0 to 30.0, 0.0)
Log Interval (1 to 4 hours, 4)
Distance Counter
Bottom
Odometer
Trip Meter
Water (same items as Bottom)
Danger Target (Log Interval 1 to 100 min, 1)
Setting. 2
NAV
Status
Limits
Navigational Status (Underway using engine, At anchor, Not

under command, Restricted maneuverability, Constrained by
her draught, Moored, Aground, Engaged in fishing, Underway
sailing, Reserved for high speed craft, Reserved for wing in
ground, Reserved for future use, AIS-SART (active), Not defined)
Persons (0 to 8191, 0)
MAX Draught (0.0 to 25.5 m, 0.0)
ETA
Destination
Truncate (Set fore and aft lengths of parallel lines)
Monitoring (Set master and backup units)
AP-3
Settings Menu
Settings
(Click)
File Export (Select data to export (Setting data, Route/User chart, Playback data*).
* Disable AMS
File Import (Select data to import (Setting data, Route/User chart, Playback data*). to use
File Maintenance (Restores last-saved route/user chart application and Route/user chart system.)
Self Test (Check various components of the system.)
Data Sharing (Share display brilliance setting among units)
Customize
Wheel rotation (Normal, Reverse)

Key beep volume (0-3, 1)
Alert sound volume (1-3, 3)
Display Test (Display test patterns.)

Keyboard Test (Test the ECDIS Control Unit and Trackball Control Unit.)
Screenshot (Manage screenshots.)
User Default (Restore all user default settings.)
CCRP
AP-4
Select CCRP
Display Filter (CCRP, Center of Gravity, Pivot Point, Radar Antenna, GPS
Sensor, AIS Transponder, Echo Sounder, SDME Sensor)
APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS,
SYMBOLS
Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Meaning
ACQ
Acquire
ACT
Activate
ADJ
Adjustment
AIS
Automatic Identification System
ANT
Antenna
Apr
April
ATON
Aid To Navigation
Aug
August
AUTO
Automatic
BB
Blackbox
BCR
Bow Cross Range
BCT
Bow Cross Time
BLU
Blue
BRG
Bearing
BT
Bottom Tracking
Caps
Capital (letters)
CAT
Category
CCRP
Common Consistent Reference Point
COG
Course over the Ground
CONFIG
Configuration
CORRE
Correlation
CPA
Closest Point of Approach
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CSE
Course
CU/TM
Course-up/True Motion
CYA
CYAN
Dec
December
DEMO
Demonstration
DISP
Display
AP-5
APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS
Abbreviation
AP-6
Meaning
DR
Dead Reckoning
English
East
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
EXT
External
Feb
February
FILT
Filter
GPS
Global Positioning System
GRN
Green
GRY
Gray
Gyro
Gyrocompass
HDG
Heading
IHO
International Hydrographic Organization
IMO
International Maritime Organization
IND
Indication
INS
Integrated Navigation System
Japanese
Jan
January
Jul
July
Jun
June
kyd
kiloyard
Long (pulse length)
L/L
Latitude/Longitude
LAN
Local Area Network
LL
Latitude, Longitude
LO
Low
MAG
Magnetic or Magenta
MAN
Manual
Mar
March
MAX
Maximum
MID
Middle
min
minute
MIN
Minimum
MMSI
Maritime Mobile Service Identity
Abbreviation
Meaning
MOB
Man Overboard
MON
Monitor
Navtex
Navigational Telex
NM
Nautical miles
NO.
Number
North
Nov
November
Oct
October
OP
Operation
OS
Own Ship
PC
Personal Computer
PERPENDIC
Perpendicular
PI
Parallel Index (lines)
POSN
Position
Relative
REF
Reference
Rel
Relative
RM
Relative Motion
RNG
Range
ROT
Rate of Turn
South
S1 (2)
Short1(2) (pulse length)
SAR
Search And Rescue
SART
Search And Rescue Transponder
SEL
Select
Sep
September
SM
Statute Miles
SOG
Speed Over the Ground
SPD
Speed
SPEC
Specification
STAB
Stabilization
STBY
Stand-by
SW
Switch
SYNC
Synchronization
AP-7
Abbreviation
AP-8
Meaning
True
TB
True Bearing
TC
Track Control
TCPA
Time to Closest Point of Approach
TCS
Track Control System
TGT
Target
TGT, TGTS
Target, Targets
TM
True Motion
True-G
True-ground
True-S
True-sea
TT
Tracked Target or Target Tracking
TTD
Tracked Target Data
TTG
Time to go
TTM
Tracked Target Information
TX
Transmit
UTC
Universal Time, Coordinated
VECT
Vector
VRM
Variable Range Marker
West
W/O
Without
WHT
White
WPT
Waypoint
WT
Water Tracking
YEL
Yellow
Symbols
ECDIS symbols
Symbol name and description
Own ship - true scaled outline
This can be displayed when based on user selection
either beam width or length is more than 6 mm.
Symbol graphic(s)
Radar antenna position

This symbol indicates location of the radar antenna.
Select if position of radar antenna is displayed with
symbol X by Symbol Display menu.
Heading line
This line originates from CCRP or Radar antenna
position.
CCRP: Consistent Common Reference Point
Beam line
This line passed through the CCRP or Radar antenna position.
Velocity vector - time increments
Velocity vector - stabilization indicator

Ground stabilization is indicated by double arrowhead and water stabilization is indicated as single
arrowhead.
Past track
System past track is indicated by thick line. Raw
sensor primary past track is indicated by thin line.
Raw sensor secondary past track is indicated by
grey thin line.
AP-9

Past track - time increments
Time increments are presented as single lines perpendicular to the past track.
Symbol graphic(s)
Past track - past positions

Past positions are drawn as small filled circular symbols.
Radar targets in acquisition state
5 mm in diameter
Tracked radar targets
TT: Std or small user selection by Symbol Display
3 mm in diameter
Tracked radar targets - alternative
TT: Std or small user selection by Symbol Display
1 mm in diameter
Tracked radar targets - dangerous target
Dangerous target symbol is red and it flash until acknowledged.
5 mm in diameter
Sleeping AIS targets
Orientation is towards heading (or COG if heading
unknown).
If both heading and COG are unknown the orientation is toward top of display.
Activated AIS targets
Orientation is towards heading (or COG if heading
unknown).
AP-10
Sleeping
AIS target
Sleeping AIS target with no

CPA/TCPA data
Activated
AIS target
Activated AIS target with no

CPA/TCPA data

Activated AIS targets - true scaled outline
This can be displayed when based on user selection either beam width or length is more than 7.5
mm.
AIS outline: ON/OFF
Symbol graphic(s)
Activated AIS targets - dangerous targets

Dangerous target symbol is red and it flash until acknowledged.
Dangerous target
Dangerous target with no

CPA/TCPA data
Activated AIS targets - heading lines
Activated AIS targets - heading lines - turn indicators
AP-11

Velocity vectors
Radar target
AIS target
Velocity vectors - time increments

Radar target
AIS target
Velocity vectors - path predictor
AP-12
Symbol graphic(s)

Target past positions
Symbol graphic(s)
AIS aid to navigation (ATON)

Real ATON is without "V" and virtual ATON is with
"V".
An ATON in off position is yellow.
AIS search and rescue transmitter -SART
AP-13

Selected targets
Symbol graphic(s)
Lost targets
Lost target symbol is red and it flash until acknowledged.
Waypoint
WPT4
Next waypoint
WPT4
AP-14

Routes - Monitor
Monitored route leg lines are dashed.
Leg lines may indicate planned speed and bearing.
Symbol graphic(s)
W05a
Planned Position
W04
40 NM
15kn
136T
20 NM
1115/20Jan
W05
Wheel over position
1115/20 Jan
15 deg
1213
Plotted positions
Plotted position includes some labels. Type is DR,
EP or Fix (Fix is without label).
Examples of source labels are
GNSS: G
GPS: G
DGPS: dG
Loran: L etc.
Line of position
Abbreviation is LOP. Label TPL is used to indicate
measurement transferred by dead reckoning.
AP-15

Tidal stream
User defined tidal stream symbols are available as
part of User Chart.
Actual tidal stream use solid vector and predicted
tidal stream use dashed vector.
Danger highlight
Route Plan, Route Monitor and own ship Chart
Alarm search area use danger highlight to indicate
violation against user selected dangers.
Danger bearing
Also called by traditional name clearing line.
User defined clearing line symbols are available as
part of User Chart.
Event marker
Event markers indicate events recorded into the
Voyage record.
The Man overboard event marker has the label
MOB.
User cursor
Electronic bearing line (EBL)

Second example show with range marker.
Variable range marker (VRM)
Range rings
AP-16
Symbol graphic(s)

Symbol graphic(s)
Symbols on operating buttons

Symbol
Meaning
Minimize button
(on InstantAccess bar)
Symbol
Meaning
Screenshot capture
Access AIS, Navtex

message processing
Monitor brilliance (FURUNO

or Hatteland monitor only)
Access user profile,

common settings
Color palette selection
Information (show program

no., operator's manual)
Activate weather display
Undo, redo
AP-17
APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE

Digital Interface
Input sentence
ABK, ALR, CUR, DBT, DPT, DTM, ETL, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, HTD, MTW, MWV, NRX, OSD,
PRC, RMC, ROT, RPM, RSA, RSD, THS, TLL, TRC, TRD, TTM, VBW, VDM, VDO, VDR, VHW,
VTG, XDR, XTE, ZDA
Output sentences
ABM, ACK, BBM, EVE, HTC, OSD, VBW, VSD, XTE
Data reception
Data is received in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced in
IEC 61162-2.
The following parameters are used:
Baud rate: 38,400 bps (HDT, THS, !AIVDM, !AIVDO, !AIABK, $AIALR). The baud rate of all other
sentences is 4800 bps
Data bits: 8 (D7 = 0), Parity: none, Stop bits: 1
D0
Start
bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
Data bits
D5
D6
D7
Stop
bit
Data Sentences
Input sentences
ABK - UAIS Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement
$**ABK,xxxxxxxxx,x,x.x,x,x,*hh<CR><LF>
1
2 3 4 5
1. MMSI of the addressed AIS unit (9 digits)
2. AIS channel of reception (No use)
3. Message ID (6, 8, 12, 14)
4. Message sequence number (0 - 9)
5. Type of acknowledgement (See below)
1 = message was broadcast (6 or 12), but not ACK by addressed AIS unit
2 = message could not be broadcast (quantity of encapsulated data exceeds five slots)
3 = requested broadcast of message (8, 14 or 15) has been successfully completed
4 = late reception of message (7 or 13) ACK that was addressed to this AIS unit (own ship
and referenced a valid transaction
5 = message has been read and acknowledged on a display unit.
AP-18
ALR - Set alarm state

$**ALR,Hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,cc,*hh<CR><LF>
1
2 3 4 5
1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC (000000.00 - 235960.99)
2. Unique alarm number (identifier) at alarm source (000 - 999)
3. Alarm condition (A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded)
4. Alarm acknowledge state (A=acknowledged, V=not acknowledged)
5. Alarm description text (alphanumeric characters, max. 32)
CUR - Current
$**CUR,A,x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011
1. Validity of data (A=valid, V=not valid)
2. Data set number (0 - 9)
3. Layer number (0.0 - 3.0)
4. Current depth in meters (No use)
5. Current direction in degrees (0.00 - 360.00)
6. Direction reference in use (true or relative)
7. Current speed in knots (0.00 - 99.99)
8. Reference layer depth in meters (No use)
9. Heading (0 to 360.00)
10. Heading reference in use (true or magnetic)
11. Speed reference (B=Bottom track W=Water track P=Positioning system)
DBT - Depth below transducer

$**DBT,xxxx.x,f,xxxx.x,M,xxxx.x,F,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
4 5
6
1. Water depth (0.00-99999.99)
2. feet
3. Water depth (0.00-99999.99)
4. Meters
5. Water depth (0.00-99999.99)
6. Fathoms
DPT - Depth
$**DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
1. Water depth relative to the transducer, meters (0.00-99999.99)
2. Offset from transducer, meters (No use)
3. Minimum range scale in use (No use)
DTM - Datum reference

$**DTM,ccc,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,ccc,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Local datum (W84=WGS84 W72=WGS72 S85=SGS85, P90=PE90
2. Local datum subdivision code (NULL or one character)
3. Lat offset, min (0 - 59.99999)
4. N/S
5. Lon offset, min (0 - 59.99999)
6. E/W
7. Altitude offset, meters (No use)
8. Reference datum (W84=WGS84 W72=WGS72 S85=SGS85, P90=PE90)
AP-19
ETL - Engine telegraph operation status

$**ETL,hhmmss.ss,a,xx,xx,a,x*hh<CR><LF>
1
2 3 4 56
1. Event time (UTC)
2. Message type (O=order A=answerback)
3. Position indicator of engine telegraph
00 = Stop engine
01 = [AH] Dead Slow
02 = [AH] Slow
03 = [AH] Half
04 = Full
05 = [AH] Nav. Full
11 = [AS] Dead Slow
12 = [AS] Slow
13 = [AS] Half
14 = [AS] Fulll
15 = [AS] Crash Astern
4. Position indication of sub telegraph (000 to 100)
5. Operating location indicator (B=bridge P=port wing S=starboard wing C=engine control room
E=engine side/local W=wing
6. Number of engine or propeller shaft (000 to 100)
GGA - Global positioning system fix data

$**GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx,*hh<CR><LF>
1
2 3
4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1. UTC of position (no use)
2. Latitude (0000.00000 - 9000.00000)
3. N/S
4. Longitude (0000.00000 - 18000.00000)
5. E/W
6. GPS quality indicator (1 - 8)
7. Number of satllite in use (No use)
8. Horizontal dilution of precision (0.0 - 999.9)
9. Antenna altitude above/below mean sealevel (No use)
10. Unit, m (No use)
11. Geoidal separation (No use)
12. Unit, m (No use)
13. Age of differential GPS data (0 - 999)
14. Differential reference station ID (No use)
GLL - Geographic position, latitude/longitude

$**GLL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,hhmmss.ss,a,x,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2
3
4
5
6 7
1. Latitude (0000.00000 - 9000.00000)
2. N/S
3. Longitude (0000.00000 - 18000.00000)
4. E/W
5. UTC of position (No use)
6. Status (A=data valid V=data invalid)
7. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous D=Differential E=Estimated M=Manual input S=Simulator)
AP-20
GNS - GNSS fix data

$**GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,IIIII.III,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. UTC of position (no use)
2. Latitude (0000.00000 - 9000.00000)
3. N/S
4. Longitude (0000.00000 - 18000.00000)
5. E/W
6. Mode indicator (P, R, D, F, A, E, M, S)
N=No fix A=Autonomous D=Differential P=Precise R=Real Time Kinematic
F=Float RTK E=Estimated Mode M=Manual Input Mode S=Simulator Mode
7. Total number of satellites in use (No use)
8. HDOP (0.00 - 999.99)
9. Antenna altitude, meters (-999.99 - 9999.99)
10. Geoidal separation (No use)
11. Age of differential data (0 - 99)
12. Differential reference station ID (No use)
13. Naivgational status indicator (S=Safe, C=Caution, U=Unsafe, V=Not valid)
HDT - Heading, true

$**HDT, xxx.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
1 2
1. Heading, degrees (0.00 to 360.00)
2. True (T)
HTD - Heading/Track control data

$**HTD,A,x.x,a,a,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,A,A,A,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 141516 17
1. Override, A = in use, V = not in use
2. Commanded rudder angle, degrees
3. Commanded rudder direction, L/R = port/starboard
4. Selected steering mode
5. Turn mode R = radius controlled
T = turn rate controlled
N = turn is not controlled
6. Commanded rudder limit, degrees (unsigned)
7. Commanded off-heading limit, degrees (unsigned)
8. Commanded radius of turn for heading changes, n.miles
9. Commanded rate of turn to heading changes, deg/min
10. Commanded heading-to-steer, degrees
11. Commanded off-track limit, n.miles (unsigned)
12. Commanded track, degrees
13. Heading reference in use, T/M
14. Rudder status (A = within limits, V = limit reached or exceeded)
15. Off-heading status (A = within limits, V = limit reached or exceeded)
16. Off-track status (A = within limits, V = limit reached or exceeded)
17. Vessel heading, degrees
MTW - Water temperature

$**MTW,x.x,C<CR><LF>
1
1. Water temperature, degrees C (-100.000 - 100.000)
AP-21
MWV - Wind speed and angle

$**MWV,x.x,a,x.x,a,A*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 45
1. Wind angle, degrees (0.00 - 360.00)
2. Reference (R/T) (R=Relative, T=Theoretical)
3. Wind speed (0.00 - 9999.99)
4. Wind speed units (K=km/h M=m/s N=nm)
5. Status (A)
NRX - Navtex received data

$**NRX,xxx,xxx,xx,aaxx,x,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,x.x,x.x, A,c--c,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. Number of sentences (001 to 999)
2. Sentence number (001-999)
3. Sequential message ID (00 to 99)
4. Navtex message code (aaxx aa: AA to ZZ xx: 00 to 99)
5. Frequency table index (0 to 9, null)
6. UTC of receipt of message (No use)
7. Day (0 to 31, null)
8. Month (01 to 12, null)
9. Year (0000 to 9999, null)
10. Total number of characters in this series of NRX sentences (1 to 8000, null)
11. Total number of bad characters (0 to 8000, null)
12. Status indication (A=correct message, V=incorrect message; Null)
13. Message body (English alphanumeric characters)
OSD - Own ship data

$**OSD,x.x,A,x.x,R,x.x,R,x.x,x.x,N*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1. Heading, degrees true (0.00 - 359.99, null)
2. Heading status (A=data valid, V=data invalid)
3. Vessel course, degrees true (0.00 - 359.99, null)
4. Course reference (B/M/W/R/P, null)
B=Bottom tracking log
M=Manually entered
W=Water referenced
R=Radar tracking (of fixed target)
P=Positioning system ground reference
5. Vessel speed (0.00 - 999.99, null)
6. Speed reference, B/M/W/R/P
7. Vessel set, degrees true, manually entered (0.00 - 359.99)
8. Vessel drift (speed), manually entered (0.00 - 99.99, null)
9. Speed units (N=Knots)
AP-22
PRC - Propulsion remote control

$**PRC,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,a,x*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 678
1. Lever demand position (-100 to 100, 0=stop)
2. Lever demand status (A=data valid V=data invalid)
3. RPM demand value (-9999.9 to 9999.9)
4. RPM mode indicator (P=per cent R=Revolutions per min.)
5. Pitch demand value (-999.9 to 999.9)
6. Pitch mode indicator (P=per cent D=degrees V=data invalid)
7. Operating location indicator (B=bridge P=port wing S=starboard wing
C=engine control room E=engine side/local W=Wing)
8. Number of engine or propeller shaft (00 to 99)
RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT datas

$**RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,x.x,ddmmyy,x.x,a,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4
5
6 7 8
9
10 11 1213
1. UTC of position fix (000000 - 235959)
2. Status (A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning)
3. Latitude (0000.00000 - 9000.0000)
4. N/S
5. Longitude (0000.00000 - 18000.0000)
6. E/W
7. Speed over ground, knots (0.00 - 99.94)
8. Course over ground, degrees true (0.0 - 360.0)
9. Date (010100 - 311299)
10. Magnetic variation, degrees E/W (0.00 - 180.0/NULL)
11. E/W
12. Mode indicator (A= Autonomous mode D= Differential mode S= Simulator
F=Float RTK P=Precise R=Real time kinematic E=Estimated (DR) M=Manual
13. Navigational status indication (S=Safe C=Caution U=Unsafe V=Navigational status not valid)
ROT - Rate of turn

$**ROT,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
1 2
1. Rate of turn, deg/min, "-"=bow turns to port (-9999.9 - 9999.9)
2. Status (A=data valid, V=data invalid)
RPM - Revolutions
$**RPM, a, x, x.x, x.x, A*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
1. Source (S=shaft E=engine)
2. Engine or shaft number (00 to 99)
3. Speed, revolutions/min (-9999.99 to 9999.99)
4. Propeller pitch (-100.0 to 100.0)
5. Status (A=data invalid V=data valid)
AP-23
RSA - Rudder sensor angle

$**RSA,x.x,A,x.x,A*hhCR>&ltLF>
1 2 3 4
1. Starboard(or single) rudder sensor data (-180 - 180.0, NULL)
2. Starboard(or single) rudder sensor status (A=Vaild N=Data invalid)
3. Port rudder sensor data (-180 - 180.0, NULL)
4. Port rudder sensor status (A=Vaild N=Data invalid)
RSD - Radar system data

$**RSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,N,H*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. Origin 1 range, from own ship (0.000 - 999) (see note 2)
2. Origin 1 bearing, degrees from 0 (0.0 - 359.9) (see note 2)
3. Variable range marker 1(VRM1), range (0.000 - 999)
4. Bearing line 1(EBL1), degrees from 0 (0.0 - 359.9)
5. Origin 2 range (0.000 - 999.9) (see note 2)
6. Origin 2 bearing (0.0 - 359.9)(see note 2)
7. VRM2,.9 range (0.000 - 999)
8. EBL2, degrees (0.0 - 360.0)
9. Cursor range, from own ship (0.000 - 999)
10. Cursor bearing, degrees clockwise from 0 (0.0 - 359.9)
11. Range scale in use (0.0625 - 120)
12. Range units (K/N/S)
13. Display rotation (see note 1)
NOTES
1 Display rotation:
C=Course-up, course-over-ground up, degrees true
H=Head-up, ship's heading(center-line) 0 up
N=North-up, true north is 0 up
2 Origin 1 and origin 2 are located at the stated range and bearing
from own ship and provide for two independent sets of variable range
markers (VRM) and electronic bearing lines (EBL) originating away from
own ship position.
THS - True heading & status

$**THS,xxx.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2
1. Heading, degrees True (0.00 to 360.00)
2. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous S=Simulator)
AP-24
TLL - Target latitude and longitude

$**TLL,xx,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c,hhmmss.ss,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
4
5 6
7
89
1. Target number, NULL
2. Latitude (0.0000 - 9000.0000)
3. N/S
4. Longitude (0.0000 - 18000.0000)
5. E/W
6. Target name, NULL
7. UTC of data (000000 - 235959)
8. Target status, NULL
L=lost, tracked target has been lost Q=query, target in the process of acquisition
T=tracking
9. Reference target=R, NULL otherwise
TRC - Thruster control data

$**TRC,x,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
1. Number of thruster, bow or stern (01 to 99)
2. RPM demand value (-999.9 to 999.9)
3. RPM mode indicator (P=per cent R=revolutions per min
V=data invalid)
4. Pitch demand value (-180.0 to 180.0)
5. Pitch mode indicator (P=per cent D=degree V=data invalid)
6. Azimuth demand (000.0 to 359.9)
7. Operating location indicator (B=bridge P=port wing S=starboard wing
C=engine control room E=engine side/local W=Wing)
8. Sentence flag status (R=Sentence is a status report of current settings
(Used for a reply to a query.) C=Sentence is a configuration command
to change settintgs. A sentence without C is not a command.)
TRD - thruster data response

$**TRD,x,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Number of thruster, bow or stern (01 to 99)
2. RPM response (-999.9 to 999.9)
3. RPM mode indicator (P=per cent R=revolutions per min
V=data invalid)
4. Pitch response value (-999.9 to 999.9)
5. Pitch mode indicator (P=per cent D=degree V=data invalid)
6. Azimuth response (000.0 to 359.0, Null)
AP-25
TTM - Tracked target message

$**TTM,05,12.34,23.4,R,45.67,123.4,T,1.23,8.23,N,c--c,T,R,hhmmss.ss,M*hh<CR><LF>
1
2
3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14
15
1. Target number (00 to 999)
2. Target distance from own ship (0.000 - 99.999)
3. Bearing from own ship,degrees (0.0 - 359.9)
4. True or Relative (T)
5. Target speed (0.00 - 999.99, null)
6. Target course, degrees (0.0 - 359.9, null)
7. True or Relative
8. Distance of closet point of approach (0.00 - 99.99, null)
9. Time to CPA, min., "-" increasing (-99.99 - 99.99, null)
10. Speed/distance units (N=nm)
11. Target name (null)
12. Target status (L=Lost Q=Acquiring T=Tracking)
13. Reference target (R, NULL otherwise)
14. UTC of data (null)
15. Type of acquisition (A=Automatic M=Manual )
VBW - Dual ground/water speed

$**VBW,x.x,x.x,x,x.x,x.x,x,x.x,x,x.x,x,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1. Longitudinal water speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999)
2. Transverse water speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999, null)
3. Status: water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
4. Longitudinal ground speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999)
5. Transverse ground speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999, null)
6. Status: ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
7. Stern transverse water speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999)
8. Status: stern water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
9. Stern transverse ground speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999)
10. Status: stern ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
VDM - UAIS VHF data-link message

!**VDM,x,x,x,x,s--s,x,*hh<CR><LF>
1234 5 6
1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 to 9)
2. Message sentence number (1 to 9)
3. Sequential message identifier (0 to 9, NULL)
4. AIS channel Number (A or B)
5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message (1 - 63 bytes)
6. Number of fill-bits (0 to 5)
VDO - UAIS VHFG data-link own vessel report

!**VDO,x,x,x,x,s--s,x,*hh<CR><LF>
1234 5 6
1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 to 9)
2. Message sentence number (1 to 9)
3. Sequential message identifier (0 to 9, NULL)
4. AIS channel Number (A or B, NULL)
5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message (1 - 63 bytes)
6. Number of fill-bits (0 to 5)
AP-26
VDR - Set and drift

$**VDR,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Direction, degrees (0.00 - 360.00, null)
2. T=True (fixed)
3. Direction, degrees (0.00 - 360.00, null)
4. M=Magnetic (fixed)
5. Current speed (0 - 99.99)
6. N=Knots (fixed)
VHW - Water speed and headings

$**VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Heading, degrees (0.00 - 360.00)
2. T=True (fixed)
3. Heading, degrees (0.00 - 360.00)
4. M=Magnetic (fixed)
5. Speed, knots (0.00 - 9999.99)
6. N=Knots (fixed)
7. Speed, knots (0.00 - 9999.99)
8. K=km/hr (fixed)
VTG - Course over ground and ground speed

$**VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a,*hh <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1. Course over ground, degrees (0.00 - 360.00)
2. T=True (fixed)
3. Course over ground, degrees (No use)
4. M=Magnetic (No Use)
5. Speed over ground, knots (0.00-99.94)
6. N=Knots (fixed)
7. Speed over ground (0.00-99.94)
8. K=km/h (fixed)
9. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous, D=Differential E=Estimated (dead reckoning)
M=Manual input S=Simulator P=Precision)
XDR - Transducer measurements

$**XDR,a,x.x,a,c,c,a,x.x, a,c...c*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
4
5
5
1. Transducer type, transducer no. (C, A, F, N, P, R, T, H, V)
2. Measurement data, transducer no. (Transducer no. N)
3. Units of measure, transducer no. (Transducer type, transducer no. N)
#1=CC
#1=AD
#1=DM
#1=FH
#1=NN
#1=PB
#1=RI
#1=TR
#1=HP
#1=VM
4. Data, varialbe number of transducers
5. Transducer n
AP-27
XTE - Cross-track error, measured

$**XTE,A,A,x.x,a,N,a,*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 45 6
1. Status: A=data valid V=LORAN C blink or SNR warning
2. Status: V=LORAN C blink or SNR warning
3. Magnitude of cross-track error (0.0000 - 9.9999)
4. Direction to steer, L/R
5. Units, nautical miles (fixed)
6. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous mode D=Differential mode S=Simulator mode)
ZDA - Time and date

$**ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx<CR><LF>
1
2 3 4 5 6
1. UTC (000000.00 - 235960.99)
2. Day (01 - 31)
3. Month (01 -12)
4. Year (UTC, 1970 - 2037)
5. Local zone, hours (No use)
6. Loca zone, minutes (No use)
Output sentences
See input sentences for OSD, VBW, XTE.
ABM - UAIS Addressed binary and safety related message
!**ABM,x,x,x,xxxxxxxxx,x,x.x,s--s,x,*hh<CR><LF>
12 3
4
5 6 7 8
1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 - 9)
2. Message sentence number (1 - 9)
3. Message sequence identifier (0 - 3)
4. The MMSI of destination AIS unit for the ITU-R M.1371 message (9 digits)
5. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message (0 - 3)
6. VDL message number (6 or 12), see ITU-R M.1371
7. Encapsulated data (1 - 63 bytes)
8. Number of fill-bits (0 - 5)
ACK - Acknowledge alarm

$**ACK,xxx,*hh<CR><LF>
1
1. Local alarm number (identifier) (000 - 999)
BBM - UAIS broadcast binary message

$**BBM,x,x,x,x,xx,s--s,x,*hh<CR><LF>
12 3 4 5 6 7
1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 - 9)
2. Sentence number (1 - 9)
3. Sequential Message identifier (0 - 9)
4. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message (0 - 3)
5. ITU-R M.1371 message ID (8 or 14)
6. Encapsulated data (1 - 63 bytes)
7. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
AP-28
EVE - General event message

$ **EVE,hhmmss.ss,c--c,c--c*hh <CR><LF>
1
2 3
1. Event time (000000.00 - 235960.99)
2. Tag code used for identification of source of event (RA0001 - RA0010, EI0001 - EI0016,
IN0001 - IN0016, II0001 - II0016)
3. Event description (OPERATION)
HTC - Heading/Track control command

$**HTC,A,x.x,a,a,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1. Override, A = in use, V = not in use
2. Commanded rudder angle, degrees
3. Commanded rudder direction, L/R = port/starboard
4. Selected steering mode
5. Turn mode R = radius controlled
T = turn rate controlled
N = turn is not controlled
6. Commanded rudder limit, degrees (unsigned)
7. Commanded off-heading limit, degrees (unsigned)
8. Commanded radius of turn for heading changes, n.miles
9. Commanded rate of turn to heading changes, deg/min
10. Commanded heading-to-steer, degrees
11. Commanded off-track limit, n.miles (unsigned)
12. Commanded track, degrees
13. Heading reference in use, T/M
14. Sentence status
VSD - UAIS Voyage static data

$**VSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,c--c,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4
5
6 7 8 9
1. Type of ship and cargo category (0 - 255)
2. Maximum present static draught (0 to 25.5 meters, null)
3. Persons on-board (0 - 8191, null)
4. Destination (1 - 20 characters, null)
5. Estimated UTC of arrival at destination (000000.00 - 235959.99)
6. Estimated day of arrival at destination (00 to 31(UTC))
7. Estimated month of arrival at destination (00 to 12(UTC))
8. Navigational status (0 - 15, null)
9. Regional application flags (0 - 15)
AP-29
Serial Interface
TD-A
TD-B
LTC1535
ISOGND
RD-A
RD-B
110 ohm*
* Set with jumper.

Switchable open/close.
470 ohm
RD-H
PC-400
RD-C
Processor Unit, Sensor Adapter: IEC 61162-2/1 input/output

470 ohm
RD-H
PC-400
RD-C
Processor Unit, Sensor Adapter: IEC 61162-1 input
10 ohm
SN65LBC172
10 ohm
TD-A
TD-B
Processor Unit, Sensor Adapter: IEC 61162-1 output
AP-30
APPENDIX 4 DATA COLOR AND

MEANING
Indication
color
SYSTEM
Sensor
color
GRN
WHT
YEL
WHT
HDG
THS-A
HDT
L/L
SPD
GNS-A,D*,F,P,R
GGA-1,2,3,4,5*
GLL-A,D and (status: A)*
RMC-A,D,F,P,R
and (status: A)*
VBW-A
VHW
COG/SOG
Display example
VTG-A,D,P
All values in green.

RAIM error in GBS
sentence is greater than
10 m and DGPS update
interval in GGA, GNS
sentence is higher than
10 s. *1
Position in
yellow characters.
RED
GRN
(***.*)
LOCAL
MANUAL
RED
WHT
GNS-E(YEL*),M,S
GGA-6(YEL*),7,8
GLL-E(YEL*),M,S or
(status: V)
RMC-E,M,S or(status: V)
( YEL*)
DGPS update interval in
GGA, GNS sentence is
higher than 30 s.
THS-E,M, GNS-N, GGA(YEL*)
S, N
GLL-N, RMC-N
VBW-V
(Color
remains
yellow
when
switched
A to V.)
VTG-E,M,S
VTG-N
SPD, COG, SOG and

POSN values and pos.
source name in red.
(status: V)
GRN
WHT
YEL
WHT
RAIM error in GBS sentence

is greater than 10 m and
DGPS update interval in
GGA, GNS sentence is
higher than 10 s.*1
RED
RED
GNS-E(YEL*),M,S
GGA-6(YEL*),7,8
GLL-E(YEL*),M,S or
(status: V)
RMC-E,M,S or(status: V)
( YEL*)
DGPS update interval in GGA, GNS
sentence is higher than 30 s.
GRN
(***.*)
WHT
YEL
YEL
(MAN)
(DR)
THS-A
HDT
GNS-A,D*,F,P,R
GGA-1,2,3,4,5*
GLL-A,D and (status: A)*
RMC-A,D,F,P,R
and (status: A)
VBW-A
VHW
Same as corresponding
indication in SYSTEM.
VBW-V
(Color
remains
yellow
when
switched
A to V.)
THS-E,M, GNS-N, GGA(YEL*)

S, N
GLL-N, RMC-N
(status: V)
Manual
setting
value
Manual setting value

(Dead Reckoning)
VTG-A,D,P
HDG value shown

with asterisks.
VTG-E,M,S
VTG-N
Manual
setting
value
HDG, SPD and POSN

values and "MAN" in
yellow characters.
*1 Navigational status in RMC sentence shown in C, U only (IEC 61162-1 ed4).
AP-31
APPENDIX 4 DATA COLOR AND MEANING
AP-32
APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST

No.
001
Text
Fan1 Rotation
Speed Lowering
Default
Caution
002
Fan2 Rotation
Speed Lowering
Caution
003
Fan3 Rotation
Speed Lowering
Caution
004
Fan4 Rotation
Speed Lowering
Caution
005
LCD Unit
Lifetime Over
Warning
006
High Temperature
Inside Monitor
Warning
007
Fan1 No
Rotation
Warning
008
Fan2 No
Rotation
Warning
009
Fan3 No
Rotation
Warning
010
Fan4 No
Rotation
Warning
Meaning
For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1(Main Monitor).
Fan1 rotation speed is below threshold.
For MU-231: Connected to
COM1(Main Monitor).
COM1(Main Monitor).
COM1(Main Monitor).
COM1. LCD unit operating
time exceeds 50000 hours.
COM1. LCD unit operating
Internal temperature exceeds threshold.
Monitor: Connected to
COM1 (Main Monitor).
For MU-190/231:
Connected to COM1 (Main
Monitor).
Fan1 rotation speed is
below threshold.
For MU-190/231:
Connected to COM1 (Main
Monitor).
below threshold.
below threshold.
below threshold.
Remedy
If the error frequently
occurs, contact FURUNO
and inform frequency of
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
LCD unit replacement is
required. Contact
FURUNO.

occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
AP-33
No.
011
Text
Default
Caution
012
No Signal
Caution
013
Sentence Syntax
Error
Caution
014
Fan1 Rotation
Speed Lowering
Caution
015
Fan2 Rotation
Speed Lowering
Caution
016
Fan3 Rotation
Speed Lowering
Caution
017
Fan4 Rotation
Speed Lowering
Caution
018
LCD Unit
Lifetime Over
Warning
019
High Temperature
Inside Monitor
Warning
020
Fan1 No
Rotation
Warning
021
Fan2 No
Rotation
Warning
AP-34
Meaning
For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1. There has
been no communication
from processor unit through
RS485 for 180 seconds.
(No communication implies
in completed sentence or
checksum error.)
been no signal continuously
for 60 seconds.
For Main monitor, connected to COM1, value of externally input sentence is out of
range that defined by sentence.
For MU-190/231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor).
COM2 (Sub Monitor).
COM2 (Sub Monitor).
COM2 (Sub Monitor).
COM2 LCD unit operating
COM2 LCD unit operating
Internal temperature
exceeds threshold.
Monitor: Connected to
COM2 (Sub Monitor).
Remedy
Check the connection of
brightness control cable.

video cable.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
LCD unit replacement is
required. Contact
FURUNO.
Please turn off monitor.

If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and
inform frequency of occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
No.
022
Text
Fan3 No
Rotation
Default
Warning
023
Fan4 No
Rotation
Warning
024
Caution
025
No Signal
Caution
026
Sentence Syntax
Error
Caution
027
Main Monitor COM

Timeout
Caution
028
Sub Monitor
COM Timeout
Caution
030
Sensor Adapter 1
COM Timeout
Caution
031
Sensor Adapter 2
COM Timeout
Caution
032
Sensor Adapter 3
COM Timeout
Caution
033
Sensor Adapter 4
COM Timeout
Caution
Meaning
COM2 (Sub Monitor).
COM2 (Sub Monitor).
been no communication
from processor unit through
RS485 for 180 seconds.
(No communication implies
incomplete sentence or
checksum error.)
been no signal continuously
for 60 seconds.
For Sub monitor, connected
to COM2, value of externally input sentence is out of
range defined by sentence.
Communication with MU is
interrupted. 60 seconds timeout.
Communication with MU is
interrupted. 60 seconds timeout.
Communication error with
No.1 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout.
No.1 sensor adapter is
turned off, or there is a problem with network.
Remedy
occurrence.
occurrence..
brightness control cable.

video cable.
occurrence.
Check the connection with
the monitor.
the monitor.
No.1 sensor adapter and
network.

network.

network.

network.
AP-35
No.
034
Text
Sensor Adapter 5
COM Timeout
Default
Caution
035
Sensor Adapter 6
COM Timeout
Caution
036
Sensor Adapter 7
COM Timeout
Caution
037
Sensor Adapter 8
COM Timeout
Caution
038
Sensor Adapter 9
COM Timeout
Caution
039
Sensor Adapter 10
COM Timeout
Caution
070
RCU 1 COM
Timeout
Caution
071
RCU 2 COM
Timeout
Caution
072
RCU 3 COM
Timeout
Caution
073
EC-3000 CPU
Temp High
Caution
AP-36
Meaning
No.1 remote control unit is
detected. 40 seconds
timeout.
timeout.
timeout.
CPU temperature in
processor unit exceeds
threshold.
Remedy
network.

network.

network.

network.

network.

network.

No.1 remote control unit.


Turn off Processor Unit. If

same error occurs after a
few minutes, contact
FURUNO.
No.
074
Text
EC-3000 GPU
Temp High
Default
Caution
Meaning
075
EC-3000 CPU
Board Temp High
Caution
CPU temperature in
threshold.
076
EC-3000 Remote 1
Temp High
Caution
CPU temperature in
threshold.
077
EC-3000 Remote 2
Temp High
Caution
CPU temperature in
threshold.
078
EC-3000 CPU Fan

Rotation Speed
Lowering
Caution
Rotation speed of CPU fan

in processor unit is below
threshold.
079
EC-3000 Fan1
Rotation Speed
Lowering
Caution
Rotation speed of fan1 in

processor unit is below
threshold.
080
EC-3000 Fan2
Rotation Speed
Lowering
Caution

threshold.
082
EC-3000 CPU
Fan No Rotation
Warning
Rotation speed of fan in

threshold.
083
EC-3000 CPU
Fan1 No Rotation
Warning

threshold.
084
EC-3000 CPU
Fan2 No Rotation
Warning

threshold.
086
EC-3000 CPU
board 5V Power
Error
Warning
5 V power voltage of CPU

board in processor unit is
out of threshold.
087
EC-3000 CPU
board 3.3V Power
Error
Warning
3.3 V power voltage of CPU

out of threshold.
088
EC-3000 CPU
board 12V Power
Error
Warning
12 V power voltage of CPU

out of threshold.
CPU temperature in
threshold.
Remedy
FURUNO.
FURUNO.
FURUNO.
FURUNO.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
occurrence.
AP-37
No.
089
Text
EC-3000 CPU
board Battery
Power Error
Default
Caution
090
EC-3000 CPU
board Core
Power Error
Caution
094
Sensor Adapter 11
COM Timeout
Caution
095
Sensor Adapter 12
COM Timeout
Caution
096
Sensor Adapter 13
COM Timeout
Caution
097
Sensor Adapter 14
COM Timeout
Caution
098
Sensor Adapter 15
COM Timeout
Caution
099
Sensor Adapter 16
COM Timeout
Caution
150
Early Course
Change Indication
Warning
AP-38
Meaning
Remedy
CPU board battery voltage

in processor unit is out of
threshold.

FURUNO.
CPU board core voltage in
processor unit is out of
threshold.
FURUNO.
No.11 sensor adapter is de- No.11 sensor adapter and
tected. 30 seconds timeout. network.
Waypoint is soon being
approached. Ship's position
is less than set time of
prewarning from WOL.
Default: 90 seconds
Be careful that WPT is

approaching.
No.
151
Text
Actual Course
Change Indication
Default
Warning
152
Wheel Over Line
Alarm
153
Track Control Stop
Alarm
154
Position Monitor
156
Sensor Failure
158
Course Difference
Warning
159
Low Speed Alarm
Alarm
170
Positioning
System Failure
Warning
171
Crossing Safety
Contour
Alarm
Warning
Alarm
Meaning
Waypoint is now being
approached. Alert150 is
acknowledged and the
ship's position is less than
set time of approach alarm
from WOL.
Default: 30 seconds
Waypoint is now being
approached. When alert
150 and 151 are not
acknowledged, ship
crosses WOL. When alert
150 is not acknowledged,
this is generated instead of
alert 151. (30 seconds
before WOL)
Track Control is
discontinued because
sensors such as GYRO,
GPS, LOG and Autopilot
stop input during Track
Control.
When inputting position
data from 2 GPS or more
GPS, there is a difference
between position data from
each GPS.
Sensor data related to
Track Control (GYRO,
GPS, LOG) is lost.
Deviation between current
heading and plan course is
more than set value.
Default: 30 degrees
While carrying out TCS,
ship's speed becomes less
than set value.
All position data has been
lost for more than 30
seconds.
When check area is set,
ship entered in the
shallower area than check
area set in Safety Contour.
Remedy
Be careful that WPT is approaching.
Be careful that ship

crossed WPT.

GPS and LOG, or
connection with Autopilot.
Check an accurate position

data, GPS reception status
and GPS setting.

GPS and LOG.
Make deviation between
current heading and plan
course smaller.
Raise speed or stop track
control.
all GPS.
Reconfirm Safety Contour
setting or change the
course.
AP-39
No.
172
Text
Off Track Alarm
Default
Alarm
235
Echo Sounder 1
COM Error
Caution
236
Echo Sounder 2
COM Error
Caution
237
Echo Sounder 3
COM Error
Caution
255
Gyro 1 COM Error
Caution
256
Gyro 2 COM Error
Caution
AP-40
Meaning
Remedy
Deviation is big between

planning course and
current heading. While
monitoring route, ship
position deviates Channel
Limit.
Input of depth data from
No.1 echo sounder has
been discontinued for more
than set time.
(Set at installation)
Default: 60 seconds
No.1 echo sounder is
turned off, or there is a
problem with network.
than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
Data from No.1 gyro has
than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
No.1 gyro is turned off, or
there is a problem with
network.
than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
network.
Reconfirm Channel Limit or

keep own ship inside of
channel limit.

No.1 echo sounder and
network.

network.

network.

No.1 gyro and network.

No.
257
Text
Gyro 3 COM
Error
Default
Caution
258
Gyro 4 COM
Error
Caution
259
Gyro 5 COM
Error
Caution
260
Backup
Navigator
272
UTC Time Not

Available
Warning
273
Depth(Bow) Not
Available
Caution
274
Depth(Midship)
Not Available
Caution
275
Depth(Stern) Not
Available
Caution
Alarm
Meaning
Remedy

than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
network.
than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
network.
than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
network.
When not acknowledging
alerts related to WPT
approach or track control
stop alert during track
control, alert is forwarded to
BNWAS by this signal on
30 seconds after passing
WOL. This is not shown.
Time data of all available
GPS sensor has been not
available for more than 3
seconds.
Depth data of all available
depth sensor(Bow) has
been not available for more
than 3 seconds.
depth sensor(Midship) has
than 3 seconds.
depth sensor(Stern) has
than 3 seconds.



Acknowledge 152 Wheel

Over Line alert or 153
Track Control Stop.

all GPS.

all echo sounders.

all echo sounders.

all echo sounders.
AP-41
No.
277
Text
Wind Speed/Direction Not Available
Default
Warning
278
STW Not Available
Caution
279
COG/SOG Not
Available
Warning
280
SDME 1 COM Error
Caution
281
SDME 2 COM Error
Caution
282
SDME 3 COM Error
Caution
285
Heading Magnetic
Not Available
Caution
290
EPFS 1 COM Error
Caution
AP-42
Meaning
Remedy
Wind speed/direction data

of all available WIND
sensors has been not
seconds.
STW data of all available
SDME sensors has been
not available for more than
3 seconds.
COG/SOG data of all
available GPS sensor has
than 3 seconds.
Speed data from No.1
SDME has been
discontinued for more than
set time. (Set at installation)
Default: 60 seconds
No.1 SDME is turned off, or
network.
SDME has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.
SDME has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.
Heading data of all
available magnetic gyro
has been not available for
more than 3 seconds.
Ship position data from
No.1 GPS has been
set time.(Set at installation)
Default: 60 seconds
No.1 GPS is turned off, or
network.

all wind sensors.

all SDME.

all GPS.

No.1 SDME and network.



all magnetic gyro.

No.1 GPS and network.
No.
291
Text
EPFS 2 COM Error
Default
Caution
292
EPFS 3 COM Error
Caution
293
EPFS 4 COM Error
Caution
294
EPFS 5 COM Error
Caution
295
EPFS 6 COM Error
Caution
296
EPFS 7 COM Error
Caution
Meaning
Remedy

No.2 GPS has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.
No.3 GPS has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.
No.4 GPS has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.
No.5 GPS has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.
No.6 GPS has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.
No.7 GPS has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.






AP-43
No.
297
Text
EPFS 8 COM Error
Default
Caution
298
EPFS 9 COM Error
Caution
299
EPFS 10 COM Error
Caution
300
Rudder 1 COM Error
Caution
301
Rudder 2 COM Error
Caution
302
Rudder 3 COM Error
Caution
AP-44
Meaning
Remedy

No.8 GPS has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.
No.9 GPS has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.
No.10 GPS has been
Default: 60 seconds
network.
Rudder data from No.1
rudder sensor has been
Default: 60 seconds
No.1 Rudder is turned off,
or there is a problem with
network.
Default: 60 seconds
network.
Default: 60 seconds
network.




No.1 rudder sensor and
network.

network.

network.
No.
303
Text
HCS 1 COM Error
Default
Caution
304
HCS 2 COM Error
Caution
305
VDR COM Error
Caution
306
BNWAS COM Error
Caution
310
Other Sensor 1
COM Error
Caution
311
Other Sensor 2
COM Error
Caution
Meaning
Remedy
Data from No.1 HCS has

than set time.
(Set at installation) Default:
60 seconds
No.1 HCS is turned off, or
network.
Data from No.2 HCS has
than set time.
60 seconds
No.2 HCS is turned off, or
network.
Sentence from VDR has
than set time.
Default: 180 seconds
VDR is turned off, or there
is a problem with network.
Caution Sentence from
BNWAS has been
BNWAS is turned off, or
network.
Data from No.1 other
sensor has been
No.1 other sensor is turned
off, or there is a problem
with network.
sensor has been
with network.

No.1 HCS and network.

No.2 HCS and network.

VDR and network.

BNWAS and network.

No.1 other sensor and
network.

network.
AP-45
No.
312
Text
Other Sensor 3
COM Error
Default
Caution
313
Other Sensor 4
COM Error
Caution
314
Other Sensor 5
COM Error
Caution
315
Other Sensor 6
COM Error
Caution
316
Other Sensor 7
COM Error
Caution
317
Other Sensor 8
COM Error
Caution
AP-46
Meaning
Remedy

sensor has been
with network.
sensor has been
with network.
sensor has been
with network.
sensor has been
with network.
sensor has been
set time.
180 seconds
with network.
sensor has been
with network.

network.

network.

network.

network.

network.

network.
No.
318
Text
Other Sensor 9
COM Error
Default
Caution
319
Other Sensor 10
COM Error
Caution
320
EC-3000 Ch.01
COM Timeout
Caution
321
EC-3000 Ch.02
COM Timeout
Caution
322
EC-3000 Ch.03
COM Timeout
Caution
323
EC-3000 Ch.04
COM Timeout
Caution
324
EC-3000 Ch.05
COM Timeout
Caution
325
EC-3000 Ch.06
COM Timeout
Caution
Meaning
Remedy

sensor has been
with network.
sensor has been
No.10 other sensor is
Input from EC-3000 serial
ch.1 has been discontinued
for more than certain time.
Default: No timeout
Default: No timeout
Default: No timeout
Default: No timeout
Default: No timeout
Default: No timeout

network.

network.

Ch.1.

Ch.2.

Ch.3.

Ch.4.

Ch.5.

Ch.6.
AP-47
No.
326
Text
EC-3000 Ch.07
COM Timeout
Default
Caution
327
EC-3000 Ch.08
COM Timeout
Caution
330
Double Gyro Status Conflict
Warning
331
Select Gyro Status

Missing
Warning
360
Wind Sensor 1
COM Error
Caution
361
Wind Sensor 2
COM Error
Caution
362
Wind Sensor 3
COM Error
Caution
AP-48
Meaning
Default: No timeout
Default: No timeout
When connected with
Double Gyro System,
instrument produced by
Yokogawa Electric, two
gyro has been displayed
"Selected" status for 3
seconds.
When connected with
Double Gyro System,
instrument produced by
Yokogawa Electric, "Double
Gyro" status cannot be
acquired.
Data from No.1 wind sensor
has been discontinued for
more than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
No.1 wind sensor is turned
with network.
more than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
with network.
more than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
with network.
Remedy
Ch.7.

Ch.8.

occurrence.

occurrence.

No.1 wind sensor.

No.2 wind sensor.

No.3 wind sensor.
No.
370
Text
Water Current
COM Error
Default
Caution
371
Water Temp COM

Error
Caution
380
AIS COM Error
Warning
390
NAVTEX COM Error
Caution
391
ROT Gyro 1 COM

Error
Caution
392
ROT Gyro 2 COM

Error
Caution
393
ROT Gyro 3 COM

Error
Caution
Meaning
Remedy
Data from water current has

than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
Water current sensor is
water current and network.
Data from water temp. has
than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
Water temp sensor is
Data from AIS has been
set time.
Default: 60 seconds
AIS is turned off, or there is
a problem with network.
Data from NAVTEX has
than set time.
NAVTEX is turned off, or
network
Data from No.1 ROT gyro
more than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
more than set time.
Default: 60 seconds
more than set time.
Default: 60 seconds

water current and network.

water temp and network.

AIS and network.

NAVTEX and network.

No.1 ROT gyro.

No.2 ROT gyro.

No.3 ROT gyro.
AP-49
No.
400
Text
Network Printer
Not Available
Default
Caution
401
Local Printer Not

Available
Caution
411
Other Sensor 11
COM Error
Caution
412
Other Sensor 12
COM Error
Caution
413
Other Sensor 13
COM Error
Caution
414
Other Sensor 14
COM Error
Caution
AP-50
Meaning
Remedy
When executing printout,

network printer is not
recognized, network printer
connection is interrupted, or
printer error such as paper
shortage, paper jam and
run out of ink occurs.
When executing printout,
local printer is not
recognized, local printer
connection is interrupted, or
printer error such as paper
shortage, paper jam and
run out of ink occurs.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
Check that the printer is

connected to network or
printer errors such as
paper shortage, paper jam
and run out of ink does not
occur.
Check that the printer is
connected to network or
printer errors such as
paper shortage, paper jam
and run out of ink does not
occur.
network.

network.

network.

network.
No.
415
Text
Other Sensor 15
COM Error
Default
Caution
416
Other Sensor 16
COM Error
Caution
417
Other Sensor 17
COM Error
Caution
418
Other Sensor 18
COM Error
Caution
419
Other Sensor 19
COM Error
Caution
Meaning
Remedy

sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.

network.

network.

network.

network.

network.
AP-51
No.
420
Text
Other Sensor 20
COM Error
Default
Caution
421
Other Sensor 21
COM Error
Caution
422
Other Sensor 22
COM Error
Caution
423
Other Sensor 23
COM Error
Caution
424
Other Sensor 24
COM Error
Caution
AP-52
Meaning
Remedy

sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.

network.

network.

network.

network.

network.
No.
425
Text
Other Sensor 25
COM Error
Default
Caution
426
Other Sensor 26
COM Error
Caution
427
Other Sensor 27
COM Error
Caution
428
Other Sensor 28
COM Error
Caution
429
Other Sensor 29
COM Error
Caution
Meaning
Remedy

sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.
sensor has been
set time.

network.

network.

network.

network.

network.
AP-53
No.
430
Text
Other Sensor 30
COM Error
Default
Caution
450
Heading Sensor
Not Available
Warning
451
Gyro CORR.
Source Change
Caution
453
SDME Sensor Not

Available
Warning
469
WGS84 Not Used
Warning
470
Datum Change
Caution
472
Position Source
Change
Warning
473
Heading Source
Change
Warning
474
COG/SOG Source
Change
Warning
475
CTW/STW Source
Change
Warning
485
Depth Limit
AP-54
Alarm
Meaning
Remedy

sensor has been
set time.
Heading data of all
available gyro has been not
seconds.
Heading sensor used in
system is changed.
Speed data from all
available SDME has been
not available for more than
3 seconds.
WGS84 is not used for
datum of EPSF or cannot
be acquired.
Acquisition timing: Once in
60 seconds or when
position sensor is changed.
Current datum of EPSF is
changed.
Acquisition timing: Once in
60 seconds or when
position sensor is changed.
Position sensor used in
system (distributed by own
ship's information
management) is changed.
Heading sensor used in
ship's information
COG/SOG sensor used in
ship's information
CTW/STW sensor used in
ship's information
Seabed has been less than
set depth for more than 3
seconds.

network.

all gyro.

all SDME.
Check the operator's

manual of GPS.
Check the operator's manual of GPS.
Be careful of risk of grounding.
No.
495
Text
Anchor Watch Error
Default
Warning
526
TT CPA/TCPA
527
TT Lost
Warning
528
REF Target Lost
Warning
529
AIS New Target
Warning
System detected the new

AIS target.
530
AIS Target Display

95%
Caution
95% of maximum number

of target which can be
displayed is used.
531
AIS Target Display

100%
Warning
100% of maximum number

of target which can be
displayed is used.
532
Caution
95% of memory capacity for

AIS targets is filled.
533
Warning
100% of memory capacity

for AIS targets is filled.
534
AIS Target Activate

95%
Caution
95% of capacity for active

AIS is used.
535
AIS Target Activate

100%
Warning
100% of capacity for active

AIS is used.
536
AIS CPA/TCPA
Alarm
Alarm
Meaning
While anchor watch alert
function is enabled, ship's
position has been outside
of alarm area centering
certain position for more
than 3 seconds.
CPA(Closest Point of
Approach) and TCPA(Time
to CPA) of TT is within the
set range.
Target has been not
detected 5 times
successively. Tracked
target is lost.
REF target is lost and cannot be tracked.
CPA and TCPA of AIS

activating target is below
the value set in menu.
Remedy
Be careful of dragging anchor.
Be careful of the risk of

collision with other ships.
TT is lost. Check the lost

target.
REF target is lost. Check

the lost target.
AIS target entered into AZ.
The number of AIS target
became 95% of that can be
displayed. Change the
display number using filter
function.
The number of AIS target
became 100% of that can
be displayed. Change the
display number using filter
function.
Memory for AIS targets is
filled 95%. Cancel
unnecessary targets.
Memory for AIS targets is
filled 100%. Cancel
unnecessary targets.
The number of active AIS
target became 95% of its
limit. Change the
unnecessary targets to
sleep mode.
The number of active AIS
target became 100% of its
limit. Change the
unnecessary targets to
sleep mode.
Be careful of the risk of
collision with other ships.
AP-55
No.
537
Text
AIS Lost
Default
Warning
539
AIS Message Received

AIS Message
Transmit Error
AIS Transmitting
Caution
541
542
Caution
Caution
543
No CPA/TCPA for
AIS
Warning
620
User Chart Danger

Area
Warning
621
Traffic Separation
Zone
Warning
622
Inshore Traffic
Zone
Warning
623
Restricted Area
Warning
624
Caution Area
Warning
625
Warning
AP-56
Meaning
AIS data has not been
received for certain time
(shorter time between 6
minutes and 5 report
interval).
Lost target. Dangerous AIS
target has not been
received for certain time
(shorter time between 6
minutes and 5 report
interval).
AIS message is received.
Remedy
AIS target is lost. Check
the lost target.
AIS message transmission Check the connection with

is failed.
AIS.
AIS transponder is transmitting.
Ship's SOG/COG data is
not available, and L/L of
own ship and AIS are not
available. System cannot
calculate CPA/TCPA for
AIS.
When User Chart Danger
Area is set to Warning/
Caution in chart alert, ship
entered in check area.
When Traffic Separation
Zone is set to Warning/
When Inshore Traffic Zone
is set to Warning/Caution in
chart alert, ship entered in
check area.
When Restricted Area is set
to Warning/Caution in chart
alert, ship entered in check
area.
When Caution Area is set
area.
When Offshore Production

GPS. Check that grounding
speed is available.
Be careful of the object

mentioned left, on ship's
direction.
direction.
direction.
direction.
direction.
direction.
No.
626
Text
Military Practice
Area
Default
Warning
627
Seaplane Landing
Area
Warning
628
Submarine Transit
Lane
Warning
629
Anchorage Area
Warning
630
Marine Farm /
Aquaculture
Warning
631
PSSA Area
Warning
632
Areas to be Avoided
Warning
633
Buoy
Warning
634
UKC Limit
Warning
635
Non-official ENC
Warning
636
No Vector Chart
Warning
637
Not Up-to-date
Warning
Meaning
When Military Protection
When Seaplane Landing
When Submarine Transit
Lane is set to Warning/
When Anchorage Area is
set to Warning/Caution in
check area.
When Marine Farm/
Aquaculture is set to
Warning/Caution in chart
area.
When PSSA Area is set to
Warning/Caution in chart
area.
When Areas to be Avoided
is set to Alarm in chart alert,
ship entered in check area.
When Buoy is set to Alarm
in chart alert, ship entered
in check area.
Measured depth from echo
sounder is less than set
UKC limit value.
When No Official Data is
check area.
When No Vector Chart is
chart alert, chart except
vector chart is in check
area.
When Not Up to Date is set
alert, chart except vector
chart is in check area.
Remedy
direction.
direction.
direction.
direction.
direction.

direction.
direction.
direction.
Be careful that measured
depth is less than UKC
limit.
mentioned left, on ship's direction.
direction.

direction.
AP-57
No.
638
Text
Permit Expired
Default
Warning
640
Chart align: Over

30 min
Caution
652
Last WPT
Approach
Alarm
665
Autopilot Mode
Conflict
Alarm
667
AP Receive Error
Caution
675
Use MAN
Steering
Warning
690
TC Start Timeout
Alarm
691
RM Stop - Exceed
Max XTE
Alarm
692
RM Stop - Disconnect Sensors
Alarm
693
RM Stop - Other
Causes
Alarm
820
NAVTEX Message
Received
AP-58
Caution
Meaning
When Permit Expired is set
alert,
Own ship position has been
offset for more than 30
minutes.
Ship will reach last
waypoint in 30 seconds.
In communication between
AP, TCS mode of ECDIS
and AP are different.
Communication between
AP and ECDIS is
discontinued.
All GPS signals are lost
during track control, and
track control has been
continued for 10 minutes in
DR. Alarm generates every
2 minutes.
Operation to start track
control in autopilot is not
performed in 30 seconds
after performing the
operation to start track
control in ECDIS.
*Currently not used
because TCS start
operation is caused by
autopilot.
Route monitoring is
stopped because distance
from route is more than set
value of Max XTE.
Error occurs inside of route
monitoring function.
Required data for route

monitoring such as
position, SOG/COG cannot
be acquired.
NAVTEX message is received.
Remedy
mentioned left, on ship's direction.
Reset offset.
Be careful that last waypoint is approaching.

Check the mode in autopilot.
autopilot.
Switch autopilot mode to
manual or auto.
Perform operation to start

track control again.
Start route monitoring after

approaching the monitoring
route.
If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and
inform frequency of occurrence.
GYRO, GPS and SDME.
No.
851
Text
EPFS 1 Sensor
Banned
Default
Caution
Meaning
Remedy
Own ship position data from

No.1 GPS is determined
abnormal by integrity
check.
Reset the filter to confirm

that it isn't a temporal error
value. If the data is normal,
it is reusable. However, if
it's continually removed,
there is a possibility that
correct data is not received
from sensor. In this case,
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
852
EPFS 2 Sensor
Banned
Caution

check.
853
EPFS 3 Sensor
Banned
Caution

check.
854
EPFS 4 Sensor
Banned
Caution

check.
855
EPFS 5 Sensor
Banned
Caution

No.5GPS is determined
check.
AP-59
No.
856
Text
EPFS 6 Sensor
Banned
Default
Caution
857
EPFS 7 Sensor
Banned
Caution

check.
858
EPFS 8 Sensor
Banned
Caution

check.
859
EPFS 9 Sensor
Banned
Caution

check.
860
EPFS 10 Sensor
Banned
Caution

check.
AP-60
Meaning
Remedy

check.

contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
No.
861
Text
SDME 1 Sensor
Banned
Default
Caution
Meaning
862
SDME 2 Sensor
Banned
Caution
Own ship speed data from

No.2 SDME is determined
check.
863
SDME 3 Sensor
Banned
Caution

check.
871
Gyro 1 Sensor
Banned
Caution
Heading data from No.1

Gyro is determined
check.
872
Gyro 2 Sensor
Banned
Caution

Gyro is determined
check.

check.
Remedy
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
AP-61
No.
873
Text
Gyro 3 Sensor
Banned
Default
Caution
874
Gyro 4 Sensor
Banned
Caution

Gyro is determined
check.
875
Gyro 5 Sensor
Banned
Caution

Gyro is determined
check.
881
ROT Gyro 1
Sensor Banned
Caution

ROT Gyro is determined
check.
882
ROT Gyro 2
Sensor Banned
Caution

check.
AP-62
Meaning
Gyro is determined
check.
Remedy
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
No.
883
Text
ROT Gyro 3
Sensor Banned
Default
Caution
Meaning
891
Water Current
Sensor Banned
Caution
Data from water current is

determined abnormal by
integrity check.
*Currently not generated
because integrity check is
not performed for Current.
900
No Filter Source of
Position
Warning
901
No Filter Source of
COG/SOG
Warning
902
No Filter Source of
CTW/STW
Warning
903
No Filter Source of
Heading
Warning
904
No Filter Source of
ROT
Warning
No valid position sensor is

available for filter. (Banned
or connection error)
No valid COG/SOG sensor
is available for filter.
(Banned or connection
error)
No valid CTW/STW sensor
is available for filter.
(Banned or connection
error)
No valid heading sensor is
No valid position sensor is

check.
Remedy
contact FURUNO.
contact FURUNO.
all GPS.
all GPS.

all GPS.

all GPS.
all GPS.
AP-63
AP-64
FURUNO
FMD-3200/3300/3200-BB
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)
FMD-3200/3300/3200-BB
1
1.1
1.5
MONITOR UNIT
Display type
MU-190 (FMD-3200)
19-inch color LCD, 1,280 x 1,024 pixel (SXGA)
MU-231 (FMD-3300)
23.1-inch color LCD, 1,600 x 1,200 pixel (UXGA)
HD26T21 MMD-MA4-FAGA (FMD-3300)
25.54-inch color LCD, 1,920 x 1,200 pixel (WUXGA)
FMD-3200-BB
Commercial monitor (user supply)
Brilliance
MU-190: 450 cd/m2 typical, MU-231: 400 cd/m2 typical
HD26T21 MMD-MA4-FAGA: 350 cd/m2 typical
Viewable distance
MU-190: 1.02 m nominal, MU-231: 1.20 m nominal
Video interface
DVI-D: DVI-standard, VESA-DDC2B
Brilliance control
RS-485, serial data control (DDC sentence)
2.
2.1
2.2
PROCESSOR UNIT
Display mode
Chart materials
1.2
1.3
1.4
HU/NU/CU/RU (True/Relative motion)

IMO/IHO S57-3 ENC or C-MAP CM-93/3 vectorized material
BA ARCS rasterized material
2.3
Own ships indication
Own ships mark/track and numeral position in lat/lon,

speed, course and heading
2.4
Target tracking (TT)
Range, bearing, speed, course, CPA/TCPA

Target information from AIS
2.5
Other information
Waypoint, Route monitoring and several alarms
2.6
Display features
Chart zoom-in/out, Cursor (EBL, VRM, parallel index lines),

Scroll, Symbol select, Palette select, One touch activation,
Electric chart information auto-update
2.7
Position calculation
Navigation by result of positioning found with external sensor

Dead reckoning with gyro and log
Highly accurate position, speed and heading from Kalman filter
2.8
Route planning
Planning by rhumb line, great circle, Chart alarm, SAR composition,

Optimize
2.9
Route monitoring
Off-track display, Waypoint arrival alarm, Shallow depth alarm

Route creation; route data may be transferred to radar
2.10 User chart creation
1000 points max. (200 points x 5 files)
2.11 Notes
Create and display notes data; transferred to radar
2.12 AIS safety message
Receive, create and transmit safety messages

View and modify own ship information stored in AIS transponder
2.13 NAVTEX message
Receive and display NAVTEX messages
2.14 MOB (Man Overboard)
Position and other data at time of man overboard are recorded

MOB mark is displayed on the screen
SP - 1
E4473S01H-M
FURUNO
FMD-3200/3300/3200-BB
2.15 Manual update
User selects symbols
2.16 Other functions
Radar overlay, Playback log
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
INTELLIGENT HUB (OPTION)

Number of ports
8 ports (10/100/1000BASE-T)
Swiching method
Store and forward, non-blocking L2 switching
Capacitance of switching 16 Gbps
Flow Control
Full-Duplex (IEEE802.3x flow-controlled at automatic mode)
Ring aggregation
8 group max.
Spanning tree
STP(IEEE802.1D), RSTP(IEEE802.1w), MST(IEEE802.1s)
IGMP snooping
IGMP v1, v2, v3
Operation control
PING, SNMPv1, v2c, v3
VLAN
Port-base VLAN, IEEE802.1Q Tag VLAN supported,
VLAN ID1 to 4094, VLAN registration128 group
3.10 Multiple VLAN
Communication between isolated ports is disabled
3.11 Cast control
Broadcast, Multicast suppression
4
4.4
INTERFACE
Serial I/O
Input
7 ports (IEC61162-1/2: 2 ports, IEC61162-1: 5 ports)

ABK, ALR, CUR, DBT, DPT, DTM, ETL, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT,
HTD, MTW, MWV, NRX, OSD, PRC, RMC, ROR, ROT, RPM, RSA,
RSD, THS, TRC, TRD, TTM, VBW, VDM, VDO, VDR, VHW, VTG,
XDR, ZDA
Output
ABM, ACK, BBM, DDC, EVE, HTC, OSD, VBW, VSD, XTE
4.5
Digital input
1 channel: contact signal, 100 ohm max. or 24VDC input
4.6
Alarm output
6 channels: contact signal, load current 250 mA

Normal close: 2, Normal open: 2, System fail: 1, Power fail: 1
4.7
DVI output
2 ports: DVI-D (DVI1/2), 1 port: DVI-I or RGB (DVI3)
4.8
USB
4 ports (3 ports for control units)
4.9
LAN
3 ports: Ethernet 1000Base-T for network equipment, sensor

adapter and spare
4.10 Sensor adapter (option)
5
5.1
5.2
MC-3000S (serial)
8 ports: I/O, IEC61162-1/2: 4 ports, IEC61162-1: 4 ports
MC-3010A (analog)
3 ports: Input, -10 to +10V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA
MC-3020D (digital-in)
8 ports: relay contact, logics set from program
MC-3030D (digital-out)
8 ports: relay contact, normal open and normal close available
POWER SUPPLY
Monitor unit
MU-190
100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
MU-231
100-230 VAC: 1.0-0.6 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
HD26T21 MMD-MA4-FAGA 115/230 VAC: 1.1-0.5 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC: 5.2 A
Processor unit
100-115/220-230 VAC: 1.5-0.7 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
SP - 2
E4473S01H-M
FURUNO
5.3
FMD-3200/3300/3200-BB
Sensor adapter (option) 24 VDC: 1.4 A (for 11 units), Input to MC-3000S, the sources of
other sensor adapters are fed from MC-3000S
5.4
HUB (HUB-3000, HUB-100, option)
100-230 VAC: 0.1 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
Ambient temperature
-15C to +55C
Relative humidity
95% or less at 40C
Degree of protection
Monitor unit
IP22
HUB
IP22 (HUB-3000), IPX0 (HUB-100)
Others
IP20 (IP22 by specified mounting method, option)
Vibration
IEC 60945 Ed.4
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
COATING COLOR
Monitor unit
Processor/control unit
Sensor adapter
HUB
Console
N2.5 (fixed)
N3.0 (fixed)
N3.0
N2.5 (HUB-3000), N3.0 (HUB-100)
2.5GY5/1.5 (standard)
SP - 3
E4473S01H-M
SP-4
INDEX
A
Abbreviations ..........................................AP-5
ACTIVE ALERT window........................ 25-10
AIO
chart cells ................................................ 5-9
chart object information ......................... 5-10
displaying ................................................ 5-8
information to display ............................ 5-11
AIO page ................................................... 4-4
AIS
automatic activation of sleeping targets 14-8
CPA/TCPA alarm .................................. 14-6
deleting received and sent
safety messages ................................ 15-3
filtering targets....................................... 14-6
lost target alarm .................................... 14-9
Lost target alarm filter ......................... 14-10
own ship data ...................................... 14-13
past positions ...................................... 14-13
received and sent safety messages ...... 15-2
sending safety messages...................... 15-1
showing, hiding targets ......................... 14-5
sleeping activated targets ..................... 14-9
symbols ................................................. 14-2
target data ................................ 14-11, 14-12
Vector length ....................................... 14-10
voyage data........................................... 14-4
Alert box ......................................... 2-12, 20-2
Alert list ................................................... 20-6
ALERT LIST window ............................. 25-13
Alert log ................................................... 20-8
ALERT LOG window ............................. 25-12
Alert parameters page............................... 9-7
Alerts
acknowledging ...................................... 20-6
alert list .................................................. 20-6
alert log ................................................. 20-8
buzzer silencing .................................... 20-5
buzzer stop button................................. 20-4
definition ................................................ 20-1
list of ...................................................... 20-9
message format .................................... 20-3
AMS
ACK sentence ....................................... 25-3
ACTIVE ALERT window...................... 25-10
alert acknowledgement ......................... 25-3
alert categories...................................... 25-2
alert definition ........................................ 25-1
alert icons .............................................. 25-8
ALERT LIST window ........................... 25-13
ALERT LOG window ........................... 25-12
alert priorities......................................... 25-1
alert transfer to BNWAS ........................ 25-5
ALR sentence........................................ 25-3
buzzer silencing..................................... 25-3

buzzer, IEC 61924-2 mode ................... 25-7
buzzer, legacy mode ............................. 25-6
buzzer, silencing (temporarily) .............. 25-6
category and alert acknowledgement.... 25-3
description ............................................. 25-1
display priority order .............................. 25-7
mode selection ...................................... 25-9
priority change....................................... 25-6
Anchor watch .......................................... 12-7
Approved until date ................................... 5-5
ARCS charts
catalog of chart cells.............................. 3-18
chart cell grouping ................................. 3-20
chart installation ...................................... 3-6
chart legend............................................. 6-1
datum ...................................................... 6-5
deleting.................................................. 3-24
details ...................................................... 6-2
export list of ........................................... 3-14
install/update history.............................. 3-17
license backup....................................... 3-15
license deletion........................................ 3-8
license display ....................................... 3-15
license installation ................................... 3-5
license installation, automatic.................. 3-5
license restoring .................................... 3-15
notes........................................................ 6-4
permanent warnings................................ 6-5
permit status.......................................... 3-16
preferences for inset................................ 6-3
SDD......................................................... 6-4
subscriptions ........................................... 6-6
T&P notices ............................................. 6-2
warnings .................................................. 6-3
Area report ............................................ 10-12
Autopilot
activating, deactivating TCS................ 26-16
Autopilot FAP-2000
control panel.......................................... 26-2
Autopilot FAP-3000
control panel.......................................... 26-4
Autopilot operations
alerts when approaching a waypoint ... 26-20
collision avoidance .............................. 26-24
ECDIS unit to control autopilot ............ 26-15
messages when preconditions
not met ............................................. 26-19
preconditions not met .......................... 26-18
route information box................ 26-14, 26-17
route steering alerts............................. 26-22
route steering indications ......... 26-17, 26-22
steering modes, FAP-2000.................. 26-10
steering modes, PR-6000, PT-500A ... 26-11
IN-1
INDEX
steering performance, going ahead .....26-24

steering performance, GPS
navigator unreliable...........................26-27
steering performance, lost
communication ..................................26-29
steering performance, lost heading......26-26
steering performance, lost speed.........26-27
steering performance, low speed .........26-27
steering performance, total lost
position..............................................26-28
steering performance, turns .................26-25
TCS buttons .........................................26-14
track control status window ..................26-14
turns, stopping, changing .....................26-23
waypoint-related indications.................26-21
Autopilot PR-6000
FU override unit......................................26-7
HCS unit.................................................26-5
override NFU controller ..........................26-8
steering control unit................................26-5
Autopilot PT-500A
steering control unit................................26-9
B
Basic setting page......................................4-3
BRILL control ..................................... 1-6, 1-7
Buzzer stop button ...................................20-4
C
CCRP page ............................................23-14
CCRS .......................................................18-1
Chart alerts
introduction...............................................8-1
objects used in .........................................8-3
own ship check.........................................8-4
route monitoring .......................................8-7
route planning ..........................................8-5
Chart cells
AIO ...........................................................5-9
catalog of................................................3-18
deleting...................................................3-21
editing.....................................................3-20
grouping .................................................3-20
status......................................................3-21
Chart database button .............................4-10
Chart legend
C-MAP......................................................7-3
S57 (ENC)................................................5-2
Chart scale ...............................................2-16
Chart synchronization
select units to synchronize .....................3-28
synchronization status............................3-29
Chart usage log........................................19-8
Charts
approved until date...................................5-4
cell deleting ............................................3-21
cell editing ..............................................3-20
display date ..............................................5-4
Check area page.............................. 8-4, 12-5
IN-2
Check results page ....................................9-8

Circle report............................................10-12
Clearing line report.................................10-11
C-MAP charts
cartographic services ...............................7-1
catalog of chart cells ..............................3-18
chart cell grouping..................................3-20
chart cell status ......................................3-21
chart legend .............................................7-3
database deletion...................................3-13
database installation ..............................3-10
deleting...................................................3-24
eToken registration ..................................3-9
export list of............................................3-14
install/update history ..............................3-17
installing from CD ROM ...........................3-6
license installation ..................................3-11
opening ..................................................3-22
permit status...........................................3-16
subscription services................................7-2
update file, applying ..................... 3-12, 3-13
update file, generating, ordering ............3-12
C-MAP DL charts
enabling..................................................3-14
update file, generating, ordering ............3-13
COG/SOG page .......................................18-4
Color differentiation test
(S57 ENC charts) ...................................24-6
Consummable parts .................................24-5
Context-sensitive menus..........................2-13
Cost parameters.......................................21-3
CPA/TCPA alarm
AIS .........................................................14-6
TT...........................................................13-3
Cursor position box ..................................2-18
Customize page .......................................23-7
D
Danger targets log
conditions for logging ...........................19-10
viewing ...................................................19-9
Data sentences
input ....................................................AP-18
output ..................................................AP-28
Data sharing.............................................23-6
Deep contour..............................................4-1
Depth sensor..........................................18-13
Details log ................................................19-5
Display date ...............................................5-5
Display test page......................................23-8
Divider
activating ..............................................12-10
limitations .............................................12-11
E
EBL
bearing reference ...................................2-21
context-sensitive menu ..........................2-22
hiding......................................................2-21
INDEX
measuring bearing with ......................... 2-21

showing ................................................. 2-21
EBL, VRM boxes..................................... 2-13
ECDIS Control Unit ................................... 1-3
ECDIS modes ......................................... 2-16
ECDIS system information ...................... 1-15
ENC charts
AIO display .............................................. 5-8
approved until date.................................. 5-5
catalog of chart cells ............................. 3-18
chart cell grouping ................................. 3-20
chart cell status ..................................... 3-21
chart installation ...................................... 3-3
chart legend ..................................... 5-2, 7-3
chart update approval ............................. 5-4
color differentiation test ......................... 24-6
deleting.................................................. 3-24
display date ............................................. 5-5
ENC coverage indication....................... 3-25
ENC list export ...................................... 3-15
ENC permit display ............................... 3-15
export list of ........................................... 3-14
install/update history ............................. 3-17
installing from medium ............................ 3-6
license backup ...................................... 3-15
license deletion ....................................... 3-8
license installation, automatic ................. 3-2
license installation, manual ..................... 3-3
license restore ....................................... 3-16
manual updates..................................... 3-25
opening ................................................. 3-22
permanent warnings................................ 5-3
permit status.......................................... 3-16
presentation library.................................. 5-6
publishers notes .................................... 3-24
reconverting .......................................... 3-30
symbols used in ...................................... 5-6
F
File import page ...................................... 23-3
File maintenance page............................ 23-4
Filter status.............................................. 18-9
Full user chart report ............................. 10-10
Full WPT report ....................................... 9-23
Fuse replacement ................................... 24-2
G
General page ............................................ 4-5
H
Heading input .......................................... 1-11
I
Instant access bar ..................................... 2-6
Instant track
back to track .......................................... 11-7
button label.......................................... 11-13
details .................................................. 11-10
messages .............................................. 11-9
monitoring ........................................... 11-10
parameters ............................................ 21-4

returning to monitored route ................ 11-12
safe off track.......................................... 11-6
stopping monitoring ............................. 11-11
K
Keyboard test page ................................. 23-9
L
Label report ........................................... 10-12
Line report ............................................. 10-11
Log playback ......................................... 19-11
Lost target alarm
AIS......................................................... 14-9
TT .......................................................... 13-3
M
Mains switch.............................................. 1-2
Maintenance............................................ 24-1
Manual updates
deleting update symbols........................ 3-27
inserting new update symbols ............... 3-26
modifying existing update symbols........ 3-27
Mariner page ............................................. 4-8
Menu tree ................................................AP-1
Mini conning display................................ 22-9
MOB button ............................................. 1-12
MOB position........................................... 1-12
N
Navigation data ....................................... 18-7
Navtex
deleting messages ................................ 15-5
receiving messages............................... 15-4
O
Odometer resetting ................................. 2-29
Operator s manual................................. 1-15
Optimize page .................................. 9-6, 9-16
Other page ................................................ 4-4
Other sensors page................................. 18-4
Overlay/NAV Tools box
anchor watch ......................................... 12-7
check area page.................................... 12-5
PI (parallel index) page ......................... 12-1
predictor ................................................ 12-6
ring ........................................................ 12-5
UKC....................................................... 12-8
Overlay/Nav Tools box ............................ 2-12
Own ship functions box ........................... 2-10
P
Palette (color) ............................................ 1-6
Palette button ............................................ 1-6
activating, deactivating .......................... 12-2
bearing reference .................................. 12-2
interval................................................... 12-3
length adjustment .................................. 12-4
mode ..................................................... 12-2
number of lines to display...................... 12-2
IN-3
INDEX
orientation ..............................................12-3
resetting .................................................12-3
Passage plan report .................................9-24
Permanent warning box ...........................2-12
Permanent warnings
ARCS charts ............................................6-5
ENC charts...............................................5-3
Permit status ............................................3-16
PI (parallel index) page ............................12-1
Play back log..........................................19-11
Position
alignment..............................................18-11
reference ................................................18-6
Position events.........................................19-2
POSN page ..............................................18-4
Power key (control unit) .............................1-2
Power switch (processor unit) ....................1-2
Predictor...................................................12-6
Presentation library ....................................5-6
Presentation mode ...................................2-17
Printing
cell status list..........................................3-23
chart list..................................................3-22
S57 chart object information ....................5-6
Processor unit EC-3000 .............................1-1
Public key (ENC charts) .............................3-1
Publishers notes ......................................3-24
R
Radar overlay
errors in ........................................ 16-3, 16-4
introduction.............................................16-1
setting up................................................16-2
Recording
chart usage log.......................................19-8
danger targets log ..................................19-9
details log ...............................................19-5
user events.............................................19-1
voyage log..............................................19-6
Reports
area ......................................................10-12
circle.....................................................10-12
clearing line ..........................................10-11
full user chart........................................10-10
Full WPT ................................................9-23
label......................................................10-12
passage plan..........................................9-24
tidal.......................................................10-10
WPT table ..............................................9-22
Ring page.................................................12-5
Route bank...............................................9-14
Route information box ..............................2-11
Route page ................................................4-8
Routes
adding waypoints at end of route .............9-9
changing waypoint position ......................9-9
creating new.............................................9-2
deleting...................................................9-20
deleting waypoints..................................9-10
IN-4
exporting FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII data.....9-20

exporting FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 data.....9-19
full WPT report .......................................9-23
importing csv, ASCII data.......................9-19
importing FEA-2x07 data .......................9-18
importing FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 data.....9-18
inserting waypoint ..................................9-10
optimizing ...............................................9-16
overview in planning.................................9-1
passage plan report ...............................9-24
route bank ..............................................9-14
SAR........................................................9-11
selecting for monitoring ..........................11-1
selecting route components to display ...11-3
stopping monitoring................................11-3
switching monitored to planning.............11-5
user chart information in
route monitoring ..................................11-5
user chart page (route planning) ..............9-5
Waypoints page (monitoring) .................11-4
waypoints page (route planning) ..............9-4
WPT table ..............................................9-22
S
S57 charts
printing chart object information ...............5-6
Safety contour .................................... 4-1, 8-2
Safety depth ...............................................4-1
SAR route.................................................9-11
Screenshots
capturing ................................................1-13
deleting.................................................23-12
exporting ..............................................23-12
Screenshots page ..................................23-11
Self test page ...........................................23-5
Sensor information box ..............................2-9
Sensor set (system, local)..........................1-8
Sensors menu ..........................................18-2
Settings menu ..........................................1-14
accessing ...............................................23-1
CCRP ...................................................23-14
customize page ......................................23-7
file export page.......................................23-2
file import page.......................................23-3
file maintenance page ............................23-4
keyboard test page.................................23-9
screenshots page.................................23-11
self test page..........................................23-5
user default page .................................23-13
Shallow contour..........................................4-1
Ship and route parameters.......................21-1
SPD page.................................................18-3
Speed input ................................................1-9
Split screen ..............................................1-16
Standard page............................................4-4
Status bar...................................................2-4
Symbols (ECDIS) ....................................AP-9
INDEX
T
T&P notices............................................... 6-2
Targets page ............................................. 4-9
Tidal report ............................................ 10-10
Time ........................................................ 1-13
Tips ......................................................... 1-16
Trackball control unit ................................. 1-5
Trackball maintenance ............................ 24-3
Tracking page ........................................... 4-7
trip meter resetting .................................. 2-29
Troubleshooting ...................................... 24-4
True motion reset .................................... 2-19
TT
CPA, TCPA settings .............................. 13-3
dangerous target alarm ......................... 13-3
lost target alarm .................................... 13-3
lost target alarm filter............................. 13-4
past positions, attributes ....................... 13-7
past positions, plot interval, reference... 13-7
showing, hiding ..................................... 13-1
symbol color .......................................... 13-2
symbol size ........................................... 13-2
symbols and their attributes .................. 13-2
target data ............................................. 13-6
vector length.......................................... 13-4
U
UKC page
setting.................................................... 12-8
UKC window.......................................... 12-9
UKC window............................................ 12-9
Undo................................................. 9-4, 10-5
User chart page
route monitoring .................................... 11-5
route planning ......................................... 9-5
User charts
area report........................................... 10-12
circle report ......................................... 10-12
clearing line report............................... 10-11
creating ................................................. 10-2
deleting.................................................. 10-9
deleting objects from ............................. 10-8
editing objects on .................................. 10-7
full report ............................................. 10-10
importing ............................................... 10-6
information in route monitoring.............. 11-5
line report ............................................ 10-11
notes ..................................................... 10-4
selecting objects to display ................... 10-8
tidal report ........................................... 10-10
User default page.................................. 23-13
User events ............................................. 19-1
User profile.............................................. 1-14
VRM
hiding..................................................... 2-21
measuring range with ............................ 2-21
showing ................................................. 2-21
W
Waypoints page
route monitoring .................................... 11-4
route planning.......................................... 9-4
Weather overlay
activating ............................................... 17-1
cloud coverage display.......................... 17-6
deactivating ........................................... 17-2
file playback........................................... 17-2
file selection........................................... 17-2
ocean current display ............................ 17-7
operability .............................................. 17-8
precipitation rate display........................ 17-6
setup...................................................... 17-3
temperature display............................... 17-6
viewability .............................................. 17-8
waves display ........................................ 17-7
Weather Overlay Control dialog box ..... 17-2
Weather Overlay dialog box .................. 17-2
weather spot information ....................... 17-8
wind display........................................... 17-5
Wind sensor .......................................... 18-12
WPT table report .................. 9-22, 9-23, 9-24
V
Vector length
AIS ...................................................... 14-10
TT .......................................................... 13-4
Voyage log .............................................. 19-7
IN-5

ECDIS FMD3200 Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ECDIS FMD3200 Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ECDIS FMD3200 Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this manual?

What is the purpose of this manual?

What safety instructions are mentioned?

What safety instructions are mentioned?

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

The paper used in this manual

FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

All rights reserved.

Pub. No. OME-44730-E1

How to discard this product

How to discard a used battery

In the European Union

In the other countries

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

Do not open the equipment.

Do not dissassemble or modify the

This equipment uses high voltage that

Fire, electrical shock or bodily injury can

Turn off power at switchboard if the

Do not operate the equipment with

Fire or electrical shock can result if the

Keep the equipment away from areas

Turn off power at switchboard if the

Fire or electrical shock can result if

Fire or electrical shock can result if the

Name: Warning Label (2)

Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire

Name: Warning Label (1)

System Configuration ................................................................................................ 1-1

OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .................................................................................2-1

How to Select the Presentation Mode......................................................................2-17

HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS ............................................................................... 3-1

3.20 How to Find the Chart Type..................................................................................... 3-25

HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS ..............................................................4-1

VECTOR (S57) CHARTS.......................................................................................5-1

RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS ...................................................................................6-1

C-MAP CHARTS ................................................................................................... 7-1

C-MAP Cartographic Service .....................................................................................7-1

CHART ALERTS................................................................................................... 8-1

10. USER CHARTS ...................................................................................................10-1

11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES.............................................................................11-1

How to Start Route Monitoring ................................................................................ 11-1

12. NAVIGATION TOOLS .........................................................................................12-1

13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS.............................................................. 13-1

14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS ................................................................................. 14-1

15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES.................................................................. 15-1

16. RADAR OVERLAY ............................................................................................. 16-1

17. WEATHER OVERLAY .........................................................................................17-1

What is the Weather Overlay?................................................................................. 17-1

18. NAVIGATION SENSORS ....................................................................................18-1

19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS............................................................19-1

20. ALERTS ...............................................................................................................20-1

What is an Alert? ..................................................................................................... 20-1

21. PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................21-1

21.3 Cost Parameters ......................................................................................................21-3

22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS ..................................................... 22-1

23. SETTINGS MENU ............................................................................................... 23-1

24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................... 24-1

25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) ....................................................... 25-1